Home

Pelco DX8100 DVR User Manual

1. Cancel Figure 7 Channel Mapping for Extended Monitor Page 2 To assign a camera to a pane click and drag the camera from the Site Tree onto a pane O E E El el A El EE Panel 1 2 N A N A N A NA Camera 1 Figure 8 Assigning a Camera to a Pane 3 Repeat step 2 to assign other cameras to the view 4 To move a camera from one pane to another pane right click and drag the camera to the new pane If the new pane was empty the N A moves from the new pane to the old pane If a camera was already assigned to the new pane the two cameras switch places 5 To remove a camera entirely from a view right click the camera and drag it outside of the view area 6 Click Apply to save the channel mapping C2630M C 7 09 35 VIEWING VIDEO ON THE EXTENDED MONITOR To display video on the extended monitor 1 After you have mapped the channels move the cursor to the extended monitor 2 Click in the top middle area of the extended monitor s display The division buttons appear bel Gel sal 8 El El sal PELCO PELCO Figure 9 Displaying the Extended Monitor Division Buttons 3 Click the specific division button for which a view is configured Video is displayed on the extended monitor At the extended monitor video is only displayed if a view is already configured for the division button you selected Otherwise the Pelco blue logo appears 4 Click a division button to display a d
2. as r Device r Tife Range E G Optical Drive J statday stat tin end day End Time CD R RW fii 0210 2004 05 27 00 02 10 2004 07 06 00 ch01 021004_052700_ O EJCD TEAC CD W552E 82 0210 20049 102019 021020049 1319549 ch01 021004 104201 5 63 DVD R RW O3 02402004 1615 00 0210 2004 17 36 40 ch01 021004_161500_ Not Installed O4 02102004 21 28 41 0210 2004 223900 ch01 021004_212841_ 5 HDD B 63 Local Drives E Not Installed a Remote Drives ES Not Installed Delete Item File Name Apply r Export Format gt C ANI C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF IV Audio Record Y RealTime Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y Refresh Create folder Figure 68 Export Time Range ASSIGNING A CUSTOM EXPORT VIDEO FILE NAME By default the DX8100 assigns a file name to each time range When the video channel selected is exported the file is assigned the name appearing in the Name column r Time Range cons 10 13 2004 10 13 2004 10 13 2004 10 13 2004 10 13 2004 10 13 2004 08 00 00 10 15 00 13 00 00 14 00 00 16 00 00 17 00 00 Delete ltem 10 13 2004 08 02 00 10 13 2004 10 16 00 10 13 2004 13 02 00 10 13 2004 14 41 06 10 13 2004 16 05 00 10 13 2004 17 05 00 Security Lobby File Name Security Lobby Apply StatDay Stat Ti EndDay EndTime Name ch01 101304_080000__101304_080200 ch01 101304_101500__101304_101600 ch01 101304_130000__101304_130
3. Alarm Settings ES Alarm Channel O ae Alarm Name po E r Alam Type Figure 105 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Alarm Settings Section LINKING RELAY OUTPUTS TO EXTERNAL EVENTS This section describes how to link relay outputs to external events such as motion alarm ATM POS and video loss events The following topics are included e Linking Relay Outputs to Motion Events e Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Events on page 135 e Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events on page 135 e Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events on page 136 To access the Event Relay Link Settings page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page opens to the Relay and Alarm Settings page 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab Linking Relay Outputs to Motion Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to motion detection events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 In the Motion Detection Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera channel from the Camera Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected camera You can also drag relays onto cameras in the Site Tree while in Live mode main screen
4. Unlimited licenses for remote computer Web and handheld client Pre alarm time estimate is based on 16 channel recording at a resolution of 320 x 240 CIF and a frame rate of 5 ips C2630M C 7 09 Getting Started with DX8100 HVR Software This section provides information to help you get started using the DX8100 HVR server software You must install your DX8100 Series HVR before using this guide In order for your system to operate properly you must also perform the following tasks e Read the Important Security Information for System Administrators manual and configure the DX8100 to ensure maximum DX8100 server operation security e Change the default language if other than English For more information refer to Selecting the Language on page 224 e Set the system clock For more information refer to Setting the System Time on page 224 e identify network parameters For more information refer to Setting Up Network Properties on page 168 e Adda printer if you want to print still video images For more information refer to Printing Images on page 68 If the above steps have not been completed refer to the installation manual supplied with the unit for instructions on installing and configuring your DX8100 NOTE System administrators are recommended to read the Important Security Information for System Administrators manual and configure the DX8100 to ensure maximum DX8100 server operation security Thi
5. 210 No Security Low Security Medium Security High Security Groups Cameras Cameras Cameras Cameras Administrators Y Y A Y Power Users Y Y Y Y Standard Users Y Y Y Restricted Users Y Y Guest Users Y C2630M C 7 09 MODIFYING USER ACCESS RIGHTS The Admin user can alter default access rights of lower level users In this case any permission granted to a lower level user must first be granted to all other higher level users For example export rights must first be granted to the Standard user before they can be granted to a Restricted user Click the user group buttons to enable disable the access right for each access category The access right category is enabled when the button s text is red permission granted and it is disabled when the button s text is white permission not granted Click a button to toggle the access right on and off Repeatedly clicking the Camera Security button cycles through the security levels none low medium and high To modify a user s access rights 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click icon The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click icon The User page is displayed 3 Do one of the following a To grant an access right to a user left click on an access right button above the user s group list The text will toggle from white to red and that permission will be active for that user b To deny an access right to a user left click on an access right button above t
6. 2 9 10 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page n the Setup dialog box click Network button E The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed the NTP Server drop down box select an NTP server Click Add Edit Delete The NTP Server List dialog box opens n the Server List select a server Click Delete The selected server entry is deleted Do one of the following e To accept the deletion and close the dialog box click OK e Toreject the deletion and close the dialog box click Cancel Make the desired change Click Apply Comparing the DX8100 and NTP Server Time The DX8100 s check the difference feature allows you to quickly compare its time with an external time source To compared the DX8100 s time with an external time source le Ze On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select an NTP server Click Check the Difference The difference between the DX8100 server and NTP Server time is displayed in the Difference time area Manually Synchronizing the DX8100 Time You can manually synchronize the DX8100 to an external time source You do not have to enable the NTP service but you do need access to an NTP time serv
7. Editing a Remote Site on page 218 Deleting a Remote Site on page 218 Editing a Remote Site To change the attributes of a remote site 1 1 2 9 0 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click the Site Setup button LA Select the site name you want to edit from the Site IP list by clicking its site name c ick Edit The Server Information dialog box opens Enter a new site name for the remote HVR Enter the new IP address of the remote site If necessary enter a base port number 9002 is the default Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change port numbers from their default values Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical If necessary enter an upgrade port number 9003 is the default Click OK Click Apply Deleting a Remote Site To delete an existing site from the site list 1 2 3 4 Select the site name you want to delete from the Site IP list by clicking its site name Click Delete Click OK to confirm or click Cancel to abort the deletion Click Apply SYSTEM SETUP Users with Power User or greater permissions can save configuration settings using the system export feature Previously saved settings can be loaded into the HVR using system import 218 Thi
8. Exception Name promo A 7b Line Item rv Modifier P 7d Value ale This Exception Effect Display Effect Show A DK Cancel Figure 155 Exceptions Dialog Box 8 In the Exceptions dialog box do the following a In the Exception Name box enter a name or description for the exception up to 20 characters b In the Line Item box enter the name of the line item up to 20 characters The line item entry is case sensitive If the transaction is displayed as all capital letters then the line item entry must be in all capital letters The HVR will search for this entry anywhere in the transaction ATM transactions do not usually contain line items The program may display a No data found error message if searching ATM transactions using line items If the line item box is blank it is considered found or satisfied c Inthe Modifier drop down box select a modifier that further defines the line item A modifier must be selected before a value can be entered If a modifier is not selected the Value box is unavailable d In the Value box enter the value The value 9999 99 maximum is used with the modifier above to trigger an exception You can use a period to separate dollars and cents but do not use a comma between thousands and hundreds e Inthe This Exception Effect section do one of the following e Accept the default display effect setting e In the Display Effect drop down box select
9. The DX8100 can record at frame rates up to 480 ips by National Television System Committee NTSC stan Line PAL standards dards and 400 ips by Phase Alternating This total frame rate capacity is distributed among 8 16 24 or 32 cameras depending on the configuration of your unit Resolution and frame rate values can be assigned evenly among all cameras or they can be configured independently for indivi also be customized according to recording mode type normal motion alarm or ATM POS dual cameras Frame rate values can Power Users and Administrators can configure recording frame rates on the DX8100 All cameras are opt imized to provide 30 ips frame rates at 320 x 240 resolution for NTSC 352 x 288 resolution for PAL The DX8100 allows you to change the frame rates available to each camera while resolution values must remain constant or change both frame rate and resolution settings This section describes how to configure the frame rate and includes the following topics e Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box e Setting the Frame Rate e Setting the Resolution and Frame Rate on page 158 e Understanding the DX8100 Frame Rate Calculations on page 163 Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box To access the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera 2 Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is dis
10. e To use emergency e mail notification the DX8100 Series HVR must be connected to a LAN that maintains an SMTP mail server The network must also be connected to either an intranet or the Internet depending on the location of the e mail accounts to which you want to send notifications Consult your network administrator for information about configuring e mail notification on your local network e The DX8100 does not support the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol required by Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP servers e The DX8100 does not support Google Gmail This section describes how to set up emergency e mail notification and includes the following topics e Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup on page 238 e Configuring Emergency E mail Notification on page 238 e Setting Up the Time Period on page 241 e Sending E mail Notifications on page 248 ACCESSING THE EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION SETUP To access the emergency e mail notification setup 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab CONFIGURING EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION This section describes how to set up emergency e mail notification and includes the following topics e Enabling or Disabling E mail Notification e Setting Up the E mail Server e Testing E mail Notification
11. 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed The Ext Monitor page is displayed C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP CAMERA MAPPING The DX8100 allows you to set up automatic or manual camera mapping This sections describes how to set up camera mapping and includes the following topics e Setting Up Automatic Camera Mapping e Setting Up Manual Camera Mapping on page 230 Setting Up Automatic Camera Mapping Automatic camera mapping offers a simplified method for configuring the capture card analog output Video from each camera source will be automatically cycled across the monitor s view panels In the automatic mode all cameras will be displayed sequentially starting with Camera 1 and continuing through Camera 32 depending on your system configuration The following information should be noted when using the automatic camera mapping feature e The automated sequence is interrupted each time a motion or alarm event is detected e When the HVR detects an event either motion or alarm the monitor output displays the camera source that detected the event The amount of time that an event channel is permitted to override the automated sequence can be set from 1 to 60 seconds e Eight channel HVRs offer only the 1 x 1 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 view panel options If you select more than one screen division each camera channel will cycle through each screen before the next panel division is presented To configure autom
12. 85 86 7 Click Start Search The POS Search Table is populated with POS transaction data 4a Start o 10 2006 x 09 00 00 End or 10 2006 i 0o40 e Transaction Information IV Device Name ATM POSO1 I Transaction Number m Data Information TF Transaction with Exception Only T Line Item T Action Code zj I Exception Code Start Search y Stop Search T E Data Overlay Enable Chan Device Name Trans Date Time 2 ATM POSO1 16 2006 1 10 9 3 36 2 ATM POSO1 17 2006 1 10 9 3 50 2 ATM POSO1 18 2006 1 10 9 3 59 2 ATM POSO1 19 2006 1 10 9 4 12 2 ATM POS01 21 2006 1 10 9 4 36 2 ATM POSO1 22 2006 1 10 9 4 44 2 ATM POSO1 23 2006 1 10 9 4 53 2 ATM POSO1 24 2006 1 10 9 5 0 4 gt Figure 51 POS Transaction Search by Device Name Displaying POS Data Discovered by Device Name To display a POS transaction and its associated video if 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button alk On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed Perform a POS search by device name For information about performing a search by ATM POS device name refer to Searching POS Data by Device Name on page 85 In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window On the playback control click Play The video recorded for the selected POS transaction is played back and i
13. CONFIGURING DISPLAY OVERRIDE The capture card can be configured to interrupt normal output when a motion or alarm event is detected Each event instance causes live video from the sensing camera to be displayed for up to 60 seconds after event detection To set up event monitor override options 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 Select the type of event that will be allowed to override the monitor output e Alarm input e Motion detection 4 Set the dwell time an event will be allowed to override the screen 1 60 seconds 5 Click Apply USING THE EXTERNAL MONITOR OPTION To assign a sequence profile to an external analog monitor 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed The External Monitor drop down menu is displayed 3 Select a profile from the External Monitor drop down menu EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION SETUP The Emergency Agent Notification alerts selected clients to motion alarm and video loss events detected by DX8100 server sites When a motion alarm or video loss event is triggered a pop up window opens on the monitor of the remote site client The window displays one or more still images taken during the event Users with Power User access and
14. Se Se KX os 2 Se III S 2 SS l s X x e gt SSNS OIR SSK SSSR ORG IRS RS SSS RX eS 2 2 e x x SSS OOOO SS oe 1 se e 2 ROS SK KKKY e KO ttre eS gos SS SS sees SxS 25 SIISTISTI e de X SSSI S SRS LLR OOOO Latent eS oot lt x SS ORR 288S PS SKK KKK xe eS SS OI RRR RFR ROO SOOO Soe 32903 eS x BORK KR KR KS rons x Nese EXE gt SINS 22S INS POS ee SS notes RRS e Se OM a 9 LR SS Se e lS SOS OS 99 ee 99 seco oe oo SS SSS 99 SOS ONS SS SS ze e Ze Ke CO ROSS seer lt lt S 25 SS SS SS X III AAA cases 299299 sees voces ue SRG 1 SRS os e JA QS SSS LSO ee SOS lt x xX Sa x SA 5 OSOS eS SOS SINS RR 2 eS SS SS SSS SS KKK os eS QSOS IIIS es SS KRG SS RX o os e e SX 2 See RS es x lS 5 SRREKR EK O O KKK EK EK KER KERRY Kx Figure 189 Removing the Filter 7 Do the following Using a can of compressed air blow air from the back side of the filter through the front Verify that the filter is clean Use a cloth to remove dust from the filter bracket Insert the filter into the filter bracket Re install the filter assembly 8 Close the front panel door 9 Start the DX8100 and resume operation C2630M C 7 09 253
15. The DX8100 allows you create and save various recording schedules This section describes how to create yearly recording schedules and includes the following sections e Creating a Yearly Recording Schedule e Scheduling Individual Days Using the Year View on page 148 e Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day on page 148 Creating a Yearly Recording Schedule Year View allows a user to customize recording schedules for individual days Year View displays daily recording schedules in a calendar format The calendar displays one year s worth of daily recording schedules The scheduling period begins in the current month e Days circled in red have been assigned weekday weekend or everyday recording schedules e Days circled in blue have been assigned a custom recording schedule e Days without circles denote that no recording has been scheduled for that day C2630M C 7 09 147 148 Scheduling Individual Days Using the Year View To schedule individual days using the Year View 1 2 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed Click the Year View tab The Year View page is displayed Click the day you want to schedule Using your mouse select the recording modes and times for each channel you want to schedule For information about selecting a recording mode refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on
16. The local or remote server will reboot 30 seconds after the upgrade process has been completed 250 C2630M C 7 09 UPDATING DX8100 CONFIGURATION FILE The DX8100 HVR allows you to update the configuration file for multiple DX8100 servers and server groups simultaneously The Multiple Configuration Upload command on the File menu opens a dialog box which displays all of the DX8100 devices and groups listed in the Site Tree To upload the resident DX8100 server configuration file to selected DX8100 devices 1 C2630M C 7 09 In the System page export the current HVR settings For more information about exporting configuration settings refer to Exporting the Current HVR Settings on page 219 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Multiple Configuration Upload The Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box opens The DX8100 devices and groups listed in the Site Tree are listed in the Multiple Configuration dialog box Site List In the Site List in the Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box click the check box for each DX8100 server and server group you want to update In the Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box do the following a b E d Click Browse The DX8100 Setup File Import dialog box opens Select the configuration file you want to use to update the DX8100 servers Click Open The path to the configuration file is displayed in the Configuration File Path box Click Upload The configuration file is uplo
17. To access the features of the DX8100 Series HVR you must log in with a valid user name and password The DX8100 comes equipped with a built in user account named Guest Each time the unit is turned on the Guest account is automatically activated In addition to the Guest account there are four other user access levels or groups that can be configured on the DX8100 The Guest user is granted only limited access to the system The other four access levels range from the Administrator group with the most rights and privileges to the Restricted group with the least rights and privileges To operate and configure all but the most basic features of the DX8100 you must be assigned a user account other than Guest If you have not been assigned a user account contact your system administrator before proceeding For information about the rights and permissions of the user groups refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 210 NOTE The Guest user account does not have access to the setup features of the DX8100 Only users with Administrator and Power User accounts are allowed access to setup functions This section includes the following topics e Local DX8100 Login e Remote DX8100 Login on page 19 LOCAL DX8100 LOGIN If you are logging into the DX8100 for the first time refer to the first time login instructions in the DX8100 Installation manual This section includes the following topics e Logging in to a Local DX8100 e Log
18. Ze From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected In the drop down box select the type of schedule you want to change Options are as follows e All Days e Weekdays e Weekends e Custom Mode Select the schedule profile from the drop down box Using your mouse assign new recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule Refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 145 for instructions Click Save C2630M C 7 09 8 9 Click Apply Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen O View Year View Qe O ud New J Save Delete ir Apply Once Per Month Once Per Year Start 07 2005 End Record Mode JE Normal MM Motion Back July 2005 Next aupa e JE Alarm PP arm Pos Figure 126 Month View Page Deleting an Existing Schedule Profile To delete a schedule profile 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected In the drop down box select the type of schedule you want to change Options are as follows e All days e Weekdays e Weekends e
19. a Selecta camera from the drop down box You can also select a camera from the Site Tree by clicking on it b For the camera you want to enable verify that the Disable check box is not selected c For the remaining cameras in the group click the Disable check box to disable the respective camera Repeat step 2 for Groups 2 3 and 4 if applicable Click Apply Click the Schedule button i The Schedule page is displayed Verify that the enabled camera from each group is displayed in the Site Tree Month View Year iew fan days Maximum IPS Recording New E Deere ao G Once Fer Month Once Per Year Stat 04 2007 a 04 2007 FF Finish on End Date JE Alam Farmros Figure 132 Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording 161 162 7 Click the Frame Rate configuration button The Frame Rate Configuration screen is displayed Frame Rate Configuration BL UE UE US ESE LS Figure 133 Frame Rate Configuration Screen 8 Do the following a Using the ALL frame rate settings slider set the frame rate to 30 ips The recording rate for each enabled camera is changed to 30 ips b For the ALL resolution setting from the drop down box select 704 x 480 from the drop down box The resolution for each enabled camera is set to 704 x 480 c Click OK 9 Click Apply at the Schedule page and verify that each enabled camera listed in the Site Tree is con
20. buttons Page Up and Page Down These keys provide the same functionality in the on screen display and the preset and pattern modes as the PTZ keypad zoom and buttons Page Up zooms in Page Down zooms out Up and Down Arrows These keys provide the following functionality e On screen display preset and pattern modes The up arrow key raises the camera and the down arrow key lowers the camera The keys perform the same actions as the mouse to move the camera e Remote camera programming mode The arrow keys navigate up and down the camera menu choices The keys perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad focus and buttons Left and Right Arrows These keys provide the same actions as the mouse for moving the camera The left arrow key pans the camera to the left and the right arrow key pans the camera to the right and These keys perform similar actions as using the mouse to change the speed of camera movement When pressed once the plus key increases the camera s pan tilt speed when pressed once the minus key decreases the pan tilt speed Each time the plus key is pressed the pan tilt speed is increased toward maximum speed each time the minus key is pressed the pan tilt speed is decreased toward minimum speed To use the keyboard and keys to control camera pan tilt speed 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button l 2 Select a PTZ enabled camera from the Site Tr
21. d From the Min and Sec drop down boxes select the amount of time the sequence instance will remain on the monitor e Click Add The instance is added to the Sequence Table 4 Do one of the following e Repeat step 3 for each additional sequence instance you want to add to the sequence list e Ifyou want to apply the custom setting without saving click Apply and skip steps 5 9 5 Click Save The Save Profile dialog box opens 6 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence 7 Click OK 8 Inthe Sequence Table click Apply C2630M C 7 09 9 Click Apply in the External Output page 3b He Manual Camera Mapping Mode Panel Division Selection Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Ch 1 Ch 2 Sequence No 2 E Override monitor output in response to this type of event Motion alarm override dwell time O 90448504 Sequence Table Apply e Delete Alarm input bed 1 zi 1 60 Seconf Figure 175 External Monitor Loading an Existing Sequence List To load an existing sequence list Manual Mapping 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a Click the button to select the Manual Camera Mappin
22. 14 53 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 44 35 14 54 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 45 35 E January 2008 Ej 14 55 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 46 35 Sun Mon Tuewed Thu Fri Sat 14 56 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 51 25 12345 14 57 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 44 35 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 45 MOTHERBOARD L Temperaturel 45 35 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 44 35 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 15 01 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 27 28 23 30 31 15 02 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 15 03 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel Go to today 15 04 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 15 05 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 20 09 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 20 10 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 20 11 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 50 35 Figure 80 System Health Log 3 To display logged events do the following a In the calendar click the left and right arrow buttons to select a month a Click the date 4 To navigation to the data you want to view do the following e Click Go to today to display information about the current date e Click Go to to advance to subsequent pages 5 Click OK to exit the System Health Log C2630M C 7 09 Setting Up the DX8100 Only a single user with Administrator or Power User access is allowed to access a DX8100 s Setup mode at one time When connecte
23. 145 5 Click Apply _ Record Mode JE Normal I Motion JE Alarm P ATM Pos 1 E Apply H Figure 119 Filling In Recording Blocks in a Schedule Grid Clearing a Scheduled Recording The DX8100 Schedule feature allows you to do the following e Forone or multiple channels clear the scheduled recording times for a specific record mode You can select one channel or you can drag and select a group of channels For example you can select and drag the recording times for channel 1 32 However the system does not allow you to select random channels from the list For example you are not allowed to select channel 1 2 and 4 excluding camera 3 e For one or multiple channels you can clear the scheduled recording times for all record modes simultaneously e You can select and clear recording times periods in increments of 30 minutes to 24 hours This section describes how to clear a scheduled recording and includes the following sections e Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode on page 146 e Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes on page 147 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode To clear the scheduled recording times for a specific record mode for one or more channels 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click a record mode check box to select the specific r
24. 5 Click Apply r Motion Detection Link Settings Camera Channel camera 9 y Camera Name famerat Figure 106 Event Relay Link Settings Motion Detection Link Settings Section C2630M C 7 09 Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to an alarm event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button ee 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 In the Alarm Link Settings section do the following a Select an alarm channel from the Alarm Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected alarm You can also drag relays onto alarms in the Site Tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply r Alar Link Settings Alarm Channel ALARMO1 y y Alarm Name fAlarmo1 r Linked Relay Setting O ee Ces Cre J Car Cre J Cre Cro Can C Cra Cana Cs mne mz mne Cm ra an 5252 Figure 107 Event Relay Link Settings Alarm Link Settings Section Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to an ATM POS event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button ee 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 In the ATM POS Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address
25. Adjust the parameters in the camera settings section Click OK C2630M C 7 09 8 Click Apply OOO ROO RON CON No Camera 1 Settings Figure 128 Custom Camera Settings Panel Examples of Custom Camera Settings The DX8100 allows you to configure customized camera settings for the following recording modes e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS Figure 129 shows camera settings for the supported modes Normal Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution ezo x240 Frame Rate 30 Images Second Image Quality NORMAL X Instant Recording Enable X Frame Rate Configuration Configure Relays C2630M C 7 09 Motion Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution ezo x240 Frame Rate During Motion 30 ImagestSecond Pre Motion Frame Rate E ImagestSecond X Pre Motion Image Quality BEST v Motion Image Quality BesT X Pre Motion 30 Seconds X Post Motion 60 Seconds X Alarm Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution ezo Xx 240 Frame Rate During Alarm eo Images Second Pre Alarm Frame Rate so ImagesiSecond X Pre Alarm Image Quality BEST X Alarm Image Quality Jest Pre Alarm 30 Seconds 54 Post Alarm so Seconds 54 J Follow Event Figure 129 Examples of Custom Camera Settings ATM POS Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution 320 x 240 Frame Rate During Event fao Images Second P
26. Click J gt if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode 3 Click 6 The Export Video dialog box opens 4 From the Export Format area select the Enable deinterlacing filter check box Export Format av C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF VV Audio Record Real Time Image Count J 13 Interval Continuous y Nate deinterlacing filter Figure 65 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter from the Export Video Dialog Box MAPPING AND DISCONNECTING A NETWORK DRIVE You can export sections of prerecorded video to a network drive The DX8100 allows you to map to or disconnect from a network drive In this case you must use the IP address of the target drive The DX8100 allows you to use the host name of the target device To do so you must enable NetBIOS option in the Windows environment You need to know what letters are already assigned to drives and the path to the folder you want to map This section describes how to map to and disconnect from a network drive including the following topics e Mapping a Network Drive e Disconnecting a Network Drive MAPPING A NETWORK DRIVE To map a network drive 1 Make sure the HVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking the Live button or the Export button Foy 2 Click the Forward button if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode Click the Export button 1S The Export Video dialog box opens 3 Click Map NetDrv
27. Monitor S tup oi e A Ge a ee Pe en 228 Setting Up Gamera Mappings a tee weir ae Mies fds Rok IASI O O tlie ola a 229 Conitiguring Display Override aii A iz 235 Using the External Monitor Option 2 5 necsattaceuenstiy 4iitihgeneaigsu ea Made a lake de bene ele ne maaan Gain bids 235 Emergency Notification Setup teen ey Yee cael aici yale ally SY nae es eda oe wk Ea egw t 235 Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setup 20 0202 n nnn teense 235 Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified 2 0 0 0 ncn nee 236 Changing Client Emergency Agent Properties 2 20 02 00 nnn rr 236 Deleting Glients trom the Notification ti A de Lad Seek Weel ete ed th eee eae 237 Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents 20 0 0 0 00 ccc een eben teen ees 237 Setting Server Event Transmission TIME 20 0 0 een aaa teen eee 237 C2630M C 7 09 Emergency E Maill Notification Setup 8 4 eee ol neh ta see iia anna 238 Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup 20 0202 e eee ee 238 Configuring Emergency E mail Notification ooooooooococooooooo corr 238 Setting Up thestime Period a a 0s vauch A Vee satan SA OS te et 241 Setting Up E Mail Notification Groups a a A da 243 Sending E mail NGtifiCatl OAS cscs is A Ad rates 248 Administering and Maintaining the DX8100 ooo 250 Updating the DX8100 Server and Client Applications oooooococoocococo coreo 250 Updating DX8100 Configuration ta oh eda pee de 251 RECO
28. Motion Activated Relay Settings ii a ep eee 64 AM Alarm Activated Relay Settinds 0 ccaceen SA a dad dadattondvun ia 165 AN ATM POS Activated Relay SettindS vusaro rd AEN Gade A A Beeb eae yeaa een aa tees 66 AO Video Loss Activated Relay Settings oooooooooooooo o 167 AP TCP IP Ports Used iby the DX8100 2 7 sf o vil ees Shela 170 AQ DX8100 Multicast Requirements and Operation 20 0 enn EEEren 171 AR Parts of the PortDevice Rages Lecce Paes lids oa hea all LOE Oa PA ee he PAs Sok ie lla 178 AS DX8100 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards 2 0 0 coco rr 178 AT COM1 Port Properties vans kale sra wat aa E AE n hall acta Went iaa 79 AU Parts ofthe Data Format Page acca ee exes ogden n NE pau eaves SYR EE age EW ee ad A eee a eae ears 188 AV Transaction Start and End Parameters 0 00 06 ccc cece ce clone e sees a eed eae ben beugbeebeeceseueubnbauans 188 AW Action Codes 3 0 eer cana AEE als Se eh Ace Pet eh te A ee a ae E E te acm EY 192 AXA ATM POS Exception Moditiersia tenuis e E eo tee a Wilh Ae oo da Mes Ee eased 95 AY KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features 0 0 0 rr 199 AZ KBDSOOA Shit Key Features ceo cs na ohn th luv eatin 200 BA Partsof the Backup Schedul Page lt ii sand Cea eee eh ty oaks ey Vor oP A E E e 202 BB Parts OF the Usar PAGES cdi das ered AIDE Mic ancl ua Age AOS AREA 209 BG Default User Group Access Rights cutres Seid dca lls a li td ott hap ads cla 210 BD Default
29. PIXEL VIDEO SEARCH The DX8100 allows a user to automatically search any 24 hour period of recorded video for changes in screen pixels This feature can be configured to identify motion events even when motion detection has not been enabled on a camera The DX8100 allows sharing of time range search settings between the Thumbnail and Pixel search mode If you initiate a Thumbnail search you can select a preview clip and initiate a Pixel search The Pixel search mode is based on the same time criteria as the preview Thumbnail clip This section describes how to search video by changes in screen pixels and includes the following topics e Searching Video Based on Changes in Screen Pixels on page 93 e Viewing a Video Thumbnail on page 95 SEARCHING VIDEO BASED ON CHANGES IN SCREEN PIXELS DX8100 pixel video search is accomplished in two steps e Searching recorded video for changes in screen pixels After the search has been completed the DX8100 displays a series of thumbnails below the search grid Each thumbnail contains the first image of recorded video for the specified date and time range period NOTE A pixel search might not detect obvious movement e Viewing the thumbnails For information about how to view the video thumbnail refer to Viewing a Video Thumbnail on page 95 To search video by analyzing changes in screen pixels 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button ak 2 On the Search control click the Pixel
30. Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options This section describes the complete process for configuring DX8100 ATM POS device communication options For additional information about each phase of the configuration process refer to the following topics Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 190 Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 196 Recording ATM POS Events on page 197 To select the device mode and set up the ATM POS communications options i 2 4 C2630M C 7 09 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed Do one of the following e Single Mode In the Communication Port drop down box select a port COM1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 or Port 4 e Multi Mode In the Communication Port drop down box select COM1 If you select COM1 the Interface Mode option is unavailable and is set to RS 232C by default In the device drop down box select ATM POS and configure the port settings for Interface mode the default setting is RS232C for COM1 Baud Rate Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits m Communication Port Configuration Communication Port The selected device is used by this port Garmros X Configure Install Interface Mode Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Figure 145 Multi Mode Communication Port Settings In
31. The Map Network Drive dialog box opens asking for a drive letter and path 4 In the Drive drop down box select a drive letter that is not being used 5 Type the path in the Folder drop down box For example type WP_address_of_servenfolder_name 6 Optional Click the Reconnect at logon box if you do not want the mapped drive to remain connected each time you logon C2630M C 7 09 101 7 Click Finish The newly mapped drive is added as a remote drive and is displayed in the Device area The mapped drive can now be accessed just like a local drive x r Device r Time Range E 6 Optical disk drives E G CD R RW O1 10442004 06 00 00 10 14 2004 06 30 00 Front Entrance O TEAC CD WS52E O2 10142004 0300 00 10 14 2004 10 00 00 NorhEntance E DVD R RW O3 10442004 11 3018 1014 2004 1200 18 East Entrance i o eco O4 10142004 14 00 18 10142004 15 00 18 South Entrance B JS a O5 104142004 17 0018 10 14 2004 18 00 18 West Entrance E Natinstaled Os 104142004 20 0018 10 14 2004 22 00 18 Lobby E E Removal drive O i Delete Iter File Name Apply r Export Format G avi C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF Refresh Create folder V Audio Record IV Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous z _Discomnect NetDrv NetDrv T Enable deinterlacing filter Export Cancel Figure 66 Export Video Dialog Box DISCONNECTING A NETWORK DRIVE To disconnect a network drive 1 On the D
32. choose View gt Extended View UNDERSTANDING VIEW PANES AND PANELS This section describes the DX8100 viewing area The viewing area is organized into panes and panels much like a window contains panes Video from each camera is displayed in its own viewing pane This section includes the following topics e Working with View Panes and Panels e Configuring View Panels on page 31 e Navigating View Panels on page 31 WORKING WITH VIEW PANES AND PANELS The DX8100 displays video from each camera in its own viewing pane e View pane A view pane is a division of a view panel Each view pane contains only a single camera channel Up to 36 view panes can fit in a single view panel e View panel A view panel is made up of the entire DX8100 viewing area View panels are divided into multiple panes Each panel can display from one to 36 individual cameras 30 C2630M C 7 09 Figure 4 shows how the DX8100 viewing area is structured PARE l CE TEFSEN 8 ll U TANS Figure 4 View Panes and Panel for 4 Division Display Table J describes the view pane and panel as shown in Figure 4 Table J View Panes Panel Item Description rJ Shows a view pane for a four division display Shows the view panel which contains view panes CONFIGURING VIEW PANELS The DX8100 can display up to 36 cameras simultaneously in a single panel To select a view panel division ie On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live
33. one pane equals one panel through which to cycle Similarly if you select the 4 division display format e Four panes one camera channel per pane are displayed in the panel e Inthis case 7 hidden panels four cameras channels per panel or 4 x 7 28 panels remain to be displayed Figure 5 shows how the DX8100 cycles through view panels depending on the display format Figure 5 Example of Single 4 9 and 16 Division View Panels Table K describes how the DX8100 view panes and panels are organized Table K How View Panels are Organized Display Type Grouping Number al Mumbor a View Panes View Panels Single 1 32 1 32 4 Division 1 8 4 8 9 Division 1 4 9 4 16 Division 1 2 16 2 25 Division 1 2 25 2 36 Division 1 1 36 1 6 10 13 Division e 1 5 Division 1 6 6 e 2 8 Division 1 4 10 e 1412 Division 1 4 13 C2630M C 7 09 Pressing one of the view panel division buttons sets the number of visible channels displayed in the panel Figure 6 shows the view panel identifier Panel 1 8 S02C02 Camera2 07 14 2005 e 13 47 foo al 00 01 02 03 04 ZE 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 J E UE JE ES TEA TOE E ET 9 A O A N A E Figure 6 View Panel Identifier Table L describes how the DX8100 view panes and panels shown in Figure 6 are organi
34. 100 Web clients either internally within an organization or externally through the Internet DX8100 FEATURES The DX8100 version 2 0 release includes new features IP camera recording DX8100 servers Refer to the following list for additional features external JBOD and remote client connection to as many as 200 Up to 480 400 images per second ips Recording Rate at CIF e Local and remote administration live search and playback viewing Dynamically adjustable frame rate and image quality for motion alarm and pre alarm recording e Scheduled backup Pre and post alarm recording up to 60 seconds up to 15 minutes with optional 512 mb ram upgrade 2 Standard audio channels with live audio over the network e Export and import system configurations e Multilevel password and user configuration 8 16 24 32 alarm inputs and 8 16 24 relay outputs e Automatic image watermarking User definable PTZ presets patterns and preset tours Online help e Multilingual support English French German Italian Polish Portuguese Russian and Spanish e Standard DVD R burner writes to CD R and DVD R media Thumbnail pixel smart search ATM POS search modes e External storage RAID 5 option Instant playback Network up to five DX8100 DX8000s server e NTP time server compatible e Optional KBD300A keyboard support for camera selection and PTZ control 5 Simultaneous connections per server
35. 240 Frame Rate 1 fps Recording Mode Normal Recording Pre Alamm None Post Alaim None Linked Alarm 4 IP Camera Status Linked Relay None IP Camera Properties Audo Installed Enable r Motion Detection Selected Channel emeret 3 local Camere Number of Blocks 2020 Nee ee Sensitivity m 00 peras me A e ee o a Protocol coce PTZ LockingAutotimeowt fose y PTZ Adjustment Test Panl PanR TRU Tit D fi PA T Disable Dip Swich Address Noe _ ven Fife laa Dast n esos p Cuaterk Value vice l y AA T a TE 0 Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time a 22 o sae PAS ent PA es ee ely p App to Al Cameras 127 0 128 0 FZ Protocol F Motion Detection Saturation H F Camera Securty F Audio Settings 127 0 128 0 T Picture Adjustment T Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras Conc tw C2630M C 7 09 Figure 82 Camera Page 117 MOTION DETECTION SETUP Up to five motion detection profiles can be defined for each camera When the DX8100 is set to record motion detection any motion sensed in the selected zone will be recorded on that channel Motion detection can also be used to trigger relays PTZ presets and the recording of multiple cameras Refer to Schedule Setup on page 143 and Link Setup on page 132 for more information To define motion detection profiles for the selected camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Came
36. 3 pp Sp Eee Camera 11 Camera 12 HD Camera 13 E Camera 14 HD Camera 15 ore 13 2006 06 43454M Ready Pix I Adan Total corded 2 D 4 Hi 10 M4 Figure 118 Schedule Page 143 144 Table AE describes the parts of the Schedule page Table AE Parts of the Schedule Page Item Part Description Schedule Type Drop down Box Selects the type of schedule Options are as follows e All days Seven days a week e Weekdays Monday through Friday with the exception of any day assigned in Custom mode e Weekends Saturday and Sunday with the exception of any day assigned in Custom mode e Custom Mode Any day such as a holiday Recording Schedule Profile Allows you to do the following e Select and apply an existing schedule profile e Create and save a new profile e Change an existing profile e Delete an existing profile Calendar Displays current schedule profile in accordance with the schedule type selected All Days Weekdays Weekends or Custom Mode Start and End Date Markers Sets the start and end dates for a custom schedule Record Mode Selects a recording mode to be applied to a camera Options are as follows e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS Channel Scheduling Panel Allows the assignment of recording modes across individual camera channels over a 24 hour period Camera Settings Panel Allows custom settings to be applied to
37. 31 2008 14 21 29 Admin Logout 10 80 2 254 htrumbo On Connect 01 31 2008 15 02 06 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 On Disconnect 01 31 2008 14 57 27 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 On Connect 01 31 2008 14 28 31 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 On Disconnect 01 31 2008 14 21 29 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 User Change 01 30 2008 18 23 11 Admin Login Success 10 80 2 254 htrumbo On Connect 01 30 2008 18 22 25 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 56 42 Admin Channel 3 Video Loss Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 52 00 Admin Channel 6 Video Loss Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 52 00 Admin Channel 8 Video Loss Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 47 21 Admin Channel 4 Video Loss Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 47 21 Admin Channel 7 Video Loss Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 39 50 Admin Channel 5 Video Loss Video Recovery 01 29 2008 16 13 04 Admin Channel 8 Video Recovery Video Recovery 01 29 2008 16 13 04 Admin Channel 6 Video Recovery Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 13 00 Admin Channel 6 Video Loss Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 13 00 Admin Channel 8 Video Loss Video Recovery 01 29 2008 16 12 59 Admin Channel 8 Video Recovery z f Figure 76 User ID Log Events Figure 77 shows the log events that occurred for System On Off Type Date Mime use Description System On 01 29 2008 16 04 38 Guest System Off 01 29 2008 16 01 59 Admin System On 01 28 2008 06 57 15 Guest System Off 01 28 2008 06 31 28 Admin System On 01 28 2008 00 04 27 Gues
38. ATM POS device do one of the following In the DX8100 Site Tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name box In this case the Device Name box is deselected Set the date and time range for the search In the Data Information section do the following a b In the Action Code drop down box select an action code Click the check box to select Action Code The Action Code drop down box is available For information about action codes refer to Using Action Codes on page 192 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name When the Device Name box is enabled type the ATM POS device name in the box Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid transactions containing the line item are displayed in the POS Search Table In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window F Data Overlay Enable Start for 76 2006 1323 03 03 End or 15 2006 gt 15 foo 4 for Sj 4 Transaction Information I Device Name Emos 3b I Transaction Number m Data Information Transaction with Exceotion Only Line Item D M Action Code CH oD F Exception Code EN Start Search l Stop Search 6 Figure 57 Searching Transactions by Action Code C2630M C 7 09
39. Access the Network page to set up the DHCP options For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 To configure the HVR to acquire a dynamic IP address through DHCP 1 In the Network page click the check box labeled Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP 2 Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 169 170 Setting Up a Static IP Address The DX8100 allows you to set up a static IP address This information can be obtained from your network administrator Access the Network page to set up the static IP address For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 To set up a static IP address 1 In the Network page verify that the Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP check box is not selected 2 Inthe IP Address box enter a unique IP address for example 10 10 0 170 The last three digits must be different for each recorder for example 171 172 173 and so forth 3 In the Subnet Mask box enter the subnet mask for example 255 0 0 0 is the default 4 In the Default Gateway box enter the gateway address the IP address of the default router on your immediate network segment 5 Click Apply SETTING UP TCP IP AND BANDWIDTH THROTTLE The DX8100 uses the TCP IP networking protocol to communicate over LAN and WAN networks TCP IP uses logical network ports to organize data transmissions and to ensure that data pa
40. American Dynamics e Phillips TC8560 TC700 Series e LGE v1 0 You must configure one of the RS 422 RS 485 PTZ ports for Spectra for Coaxitron to function For more information refer to Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 180 C2630M C 7 09 g Do the following 1 2 In the PTZ Locking Auto timeout drop d own box select an appropriate timeout value Timeout values can be set between five and 60 seconds The default value is 10 seconds Because the DX8100 Series HVR is des igned to operate in a networked environment it is possible that multiple users may attempt to simultaneously control the PTZ features of a single camera To minimize potential conflicts only one user at a time is allowed to control the PTZ features of a camera PTZ control is made available on a first come first served basis Once a user gains control of a camera s PTZ feature device have been left idle for the amou drop down box To perform a PTZ test click Pan L left commands h Set the selected camera address as follows 1 2 s all other users are locked out All other users must wait until the controls for that nt of time configured for that camera as specified in the PTZ Locking Auto timeout Pan R right Tilt U up and Tilt D down to verify that the camera responds to PTZ In the Dip Switch Address drop down box select an address from the available addresses If the selected
41. Camera Security Levels ooo 210 BE DX8100 Activities and Windows OS Log FileS oooooooooocooocoococrr rr 222 C2630M C 7 09 Server Operation Configuration You are reading DX8100 Series hybrid video recorder HVR version 2 0 documentation The information in this manual describes how to configure and use the DX8100 system in your security application For a brief description of the DX8100 server and client applications refer to Welcome to the DX8100 Series HVR Welcome to the DX8100 Series HVR The DX8100 Series HVR features IP camera recording external JBOD just a bunch of disks storage remote client connectivity to as many as 200 HVR DVR servers dual monitor display multimode recording for up to 16 ATM POS devices or single mode recording for up to 4 ATM POS devices system health status and configuration multi event recording continuous motion detection alarm and scheduled recording The DX8100 is a high performance computer based easy to operate HVR and client application system Models range from an 8 channel single 250 GB hard disk drive HDD unit to a 32 channel unit with up to 6 TB of internal storage An external JBOD unit adds as much as 6 TB increasing DX8100 storage capacity up to 12 TB DX8100 software runs on two platforms e The DX8100 HVR server software runs on the DX8100 Series HVR e The DX8100 Client Application software runs on a personal computer and allows you to log on and operate the DX8100 HVR
42. Click the Search button al The HVR switches to the Search mode 2 Click the Export Button The Export Video dialog box opens refer to Figure 2 3 Verify that the JBOD drive is displayed in the Device list Export Yideo r Device O OPTICAL DISK DRIVES E 6 CD R AW CO TSSTCORP CDDYDW TS H6 E O DVD R RW CO TSSTCORP CDDYDW TS H6 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVES E Remote drive E O 2 MCLOVISFS1APUBLICAPF B Removable drive S IG 2 0 H Refresh Create folder Map NetDry Disconnect NetDrv Figure 2 Export Video Dialog Box 20 C2630M C 7 09 Working with Dual Monitors DX8100 version 1 2 and later units include a standard dual display card that provides additional viewing of up to 72 video channels simultaneously VGA output This feature allows you to display video from selected cameras on the extended monitor while at the same time displaying video from selected cameras on the primary monitor The primary monitor remains available for other tasks such as viewing and controlling PTZ cameras and monitoring video from cameras displayed on the extended monitor Up to 36 cameras can be displayed on each monitor Video from any connected server can be displayed on the monitors Composite output The dual display card provides a composite video BNC output that allows video to be displayed on a composite monitor The monitor can be located up to 1 500 feet 457 meters away from the server NOTE I
43. DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Background Color gt Disable Background to remove background field INSTANT RECORDING This section describes the instant recording mode Users with Power User access and higher can configure the DX8100 for recording video both instantly and in accordance with a preset schedule The Instant Recording mode is enabled from the Schedule page Instant recording is activated from the main window by double clicking the Instant Recording icon If the HVR is not in the normal recording mode you can use the instant recording mode to manually start and stop a video recording session instantly For information about adding the Instant Recording icon to the OSD refer to Adding nstant Recording to OSD on page 48 This section includes the following topics e Enabling and Disabling Instant Recording e Adding Instant Recording to OSD on page 48 e Starting and Stopping Instant Recording on page 48 ENABLING AND DISABLING INSTANT RECORDING This section describes how to enable and disable the instant recording mode and includes the following topics e Enabling Instant Recording e Disabling Instant Recording For more information about instant recording refer to nstant Recording on page 47 C2630M C 7 09 47 Enabling Instant Recording To enable the Instant Recording mode 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box c
44. Don t Show or Show 9 Click OK C2630M C 7 09 10 Atthe Advanced page do one of the following e Click Apply to confirm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box e Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page Table AX ATM POS Exception Modifiers Modifier Description None Value is not used and is disabled gt Greater than Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is greater than the value entered in the Value box lt Less than Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is less than the value entered in the Value box Equal to Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is equal to the value entered in the Value field Not equal to Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is not equal to the value entered in the Value field Editing an ATM POS Exception To edi 1 2 n the Excep tan ATM POS exception n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 n the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab For information about the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 ion T
45. EXISTING BACKUP SCHEDULE To delete an existing schedule 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Backup button amp The Backup schedule page is displayed 3 In the Backup schedule table click the backup schedule you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click Apply INITIATING AN INSTANT BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8100 allows you to schedule an instant backup time setting options are displayed when you select instant backup In this case you are given quick access to select the backup device day and time channel record type and recording category Once you establish the backup schedule you can view the estimated backup size before starting the actual backup process The DX8100 provides initial default settings You can save time by accepting the following defaults e Backup time range The current day and time you initiated the instant backup routine e Channel record type All channels e Categories All Recording To perform an instant backup 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Backup button 4 The Backup schedule page is displayed 3 In the Backup page do the following a Click Instant Backup The Backup Now dialog box opens b Click the selection check box for the device you want to receive the instant backup data 4 Do one
46. Exporting a Sequence of Still Images 2 2 ooo 107 Finalizing an Export Process lapiedra Cee a he SASL aa lis dal 108 Stopping an Export While in Process 2 2 2 0 b EEEE EEEE 108 Working with DX8100 backed up Viden aaar dee tec A a dams eget arab 109 Logs and Health Statuss sadi a tices cca Wa Ait cre MA Solna GUA Nore ale A all lor Waele e ada Bed 10 Viewing Logs from the Application WindoW ooo 110 Viewing system Health Status sha cra rra dao 112 Working with System Health Status Vie W ceanii eies nner T E beeen 12 Working with System Health Log View 2 20 02 b nnn te eee 13 Sering WP the Dx Usas pai ida 14 Accessingithe Set p Mode 00 cad a a dd e a ie 114 Understanding the Setup Dialog BOX aii A aida 15 Camera Setup e a ache ak N ae Taro 16 Basic Camera Setup ar A A A A ed e MERA eRe ag EE 16 Motion Detection Setupue 2c escasos date dee alalitaly 18 AU A E io a 19 Contiguring Video Loss Detection A A A as 121 Applying Settings to Almera A a da ad ddai 122 IPCamera Seta o o a Oca 122 Configuring the DX8100 to Record IP Camera Video ooooooooocococoro corro oro rr rr 123 Understanding the DX8100 Resource Meter o ooocoococcococcccoccc cocer 129 Configuring Analog and IP Cameras for Optimal Hybrid Video Recording 0oooooooocococococoooororo eee eee 130 A EVAR ao AG oy ote won alae borat hate Wet ale occ ed aye Sek EMA Pa E pate bce 132 Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings 2 2 0
47. I Audio Disable Input Device fine in a Left Channel Camera05 y Right Channel Vv Camerad6 Aux volume es Cancel Figure 88 AUX Audio Settings Dialog Box C2630M C 7 09 Setting Up the Expanded Audio Options To set up the expanded audio option 1 de Do the following a Install the optional DX8108 AUD DX8116 AUD audio card if necessary For information about installing the optional DX8108 AUD DX8116 AUD audio card refer to the DX8100 8 16 Channel Audio Card Installation manual b Connect an audio input device microphone to the numbered DX8108 AUD DX8116 AUD audio card input for the camera channel being configured for live audio recording c To hear live audio at the local server connect head phones to the DX8100 audio output connector On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel you want to configure for live audio recording In the Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not selected Click Apply Verify that you can hear sound from the DX8100 audio output For information about listening to live audio refer to Listening to Live Audio at the Server on page 49 CONFIGURING VIDEO LOSS DETECTION You can configure the DX8100 to monitor each camera for t
48. Index A access levels Administrator 18 logging into DX8100 18 logging out of DX8100 18 user 18 accounts access levels 18 access levels definition of 210 Administrator 18 built in user accounts 209 Guest 18 activating remote sites 217 active remote cameras locating 217 address DHCP 169 static IP 169 administrator accessing the setup mode 114 setup options 114 alarm event emergency notification 145 recording mode setting up 145 alarm inputs linking a single alarm input to multiple cameras 39 linking multiple alarms to one camera 39 removing a linked alarm input from a camera 40 setting up alarm input selecting 133 alarm output type selecting 133 basic operating properties 133 creating custom name for 133 supported 132 area viewing pane 24 30 panel 24 30 ATM POS communications connection running diagnostics 196 connection verifying 196 viewing ATM POS data 197 ATM POS device data format assigning to an ATM POS device 190 creating 189 deleting 190 editing 189 overview 186 Data Format page overview 187 device filter custom 189 dynamic link library DLL files 200 multimode 180 protocols installing 200 updating 200 single mode 180 C2630M C 7 09 ATM POS event ATM POS address selecting 135 ATM POS recording mode setting up 145 linking relay to 135 recording 197 ATM POS exceptions assigning to an ATM POS device 196 creating 193 deleting 195 editing 195 exception action codes defi
49. Inthe Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name When the Device Name box is enabled type the ATM POS device name in the box Set the date and time range you want to search for the transaction number In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Transaction Number The Transaction Number box is available In the Transaction Number box type the transaction number Click Start Search If the channel date time and transaction number are valid the POS transaction is displayed in the POS Search Table In the POS Search Table click a transaction entry The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 87 88 9 On the playback controls click the Forward button The video recorded for the transaction is displayed in the Video window Playback Start for 10 2006 for 3 0 foo End for 10 2006 fos 05 foo Transaction Information Device Name ATM POSO1 Y Transaction Number 24 m Data Information TF Transaction with Exception Only T Line Item I Action Code IP Exception Gade 01 10 2006 09 04 39 562 a Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 24 z Device Name Transaction Number _ DATE 1 10 2006 TIME 9 5 0 T BONE 459 SUB TOTAL 459 TAX 0 37 TOTAL 4 96 Figure 53 Searching an POS Event by Transaction Number SEARCHING FOR ALL TRANSACTIONS WITH EXCE
50. Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 52 Z ZN Figure 21 Mouse Wheel Zoom C2630M C 7 09 51 USING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS TO OPERATE PTZ AND LENS FUNCTIONS Users with PTZ access rights Standard User by default and higher can use a computer keyboard to operate PTZ and lens functions of cameras that support such features PTZ and lens functions can be controlled in Live mode using the keyboard Table P describes the keyboard buttons that you use to control PTZ and lens functions Table P Standard Keyboard Functions for Controlling PTZ and Lens Functions Key Description Insert and Delete These keys provide the following functionality e On screen display preset and pattern modes Insert increases focus and Delete decreases focus performing the same actions as the focus control on the PTZ keypad e Remote camera programming mode Insert and Delete perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad focus and buttons navigating up and down the camera menu choices Home and End These keys provide the following functionality e On screen display preset and pattern modes The Home key opens the iris and the End key closes the iris performing the same actions as the PTZ keypad iris and buttons e Remote camera programming mode The Home key selects an option from the camera s on screen menu The End key cancels an option or exit a menu These keys perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad iris and
51. PROPERTIES The system must be powered on and you must be logged in as a Power User or Administrator to configure communication port settings Refer to the instructions that came with your peripheral device for correct settings This section describes how to set up port and device communication properties including the following topics e Understanding the Port Device Page e Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 179 e Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 180 e Installing or Updating Device Protocols on page 200 UNDERSTANDING THE PORT DEVICE PAGE This section describes the Port Device page Figure 144 shows the parts of the Port Device page Network DNSAWINS Port Device NTP The selected device is used by this port O wwe J O Interface Mode AOL Baud Rate Figure 144 Port Device Page C2630M C 7 09 177 178 Table AR describes the parts of the Port Device page Table AR Parts of the Port Device Page Item Part Description Port Communications port drop down box where you select the port for connecting a device to the DX8100 The available choices are as follows e COM1 Uses RS 232 serial data standard e Port 1 to 4 Uses either RS 422 or RS 485 serial data standard Device Attached device drop down box where the type of device is selected to be interfaced to the DX8100 through the communication port Co
52. Panes 2 200 000 0 ccc EEEE EEEE EEEE n nnn ees 42 Setting Up FAVONteS ii A bine a A Petals Pave E ad 43 Adding a Camera View to Favorites 20 0 n nner b bbe e tenes 43 Organizing Favorites in Folders i255 026622 oda paee am de dda bb EE E ds EE en DA E EEE ERE a Ai hia p ide 44 C2630M C 7 09 3 Live View On Screen Display OSO e a e a dee ad lo del bdo 46 Customizing the On Screen Display OSO s io a aaa 47 INStant RECOrdINO v ea ao cosita Gen e a e de da A 47 Enabling and Disabling Instant Recording oooooooooo oo 47 Adding Instant Recording to US No 48 Starting and Stopping Instant RECOFdIMO vota axes EE RES I pea Sta Raz 48 kisteningito Live Audio atthe Seve ataca sare solid sts li a ds ria is tri 49 Operating ihe On Screen PZ Controls iaa a eare aa A acy A a Aw A a a 50 Operatingine PLZ COMIC te td ai doi at 50 Adjusting the Gamera bens 2 0 tra las dlls ide na baad ro it dg urna las lle abad allel 51 Adjusting the Camera Zoom isror ni i nn een vi bbb tence eee 51 Using Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions 0 00 0 0 occ ccc cet e eens 52 A A NR O O 53 Programmingia Presets 5 se sue cdas ne eS lsh a da Be lo a a e e Mbt Ag fo oot eta th tee ro e dae 53 AAEE Re AEE ath WS ware aA nee Sigh Rte had Ae E ng EE a te ace A es 54 Clearingra Presa tina o E Secale LU hate tain UA A A oe alata 55 PIZ Patterns x AA INS kava anes Bee a LGA ATR PR eae ad Meee ae eee 55 Programmin
53. Reusing the Search Time Range on page 78 e Index Video Search on page 79 e Thumbnail Video Search on page 80 e POS Search on page 82 e Pixel Video Search on page 93 e Working with Special View and Search Methods on page 96 SEARCH WINDOW The search window facilitates access to the search capabilities of the DX8100 Available search methods include index thumbnail POS and pixel Each search method allows users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher to locate video data instantly using criteria such as time of day or changes in window pixels As in Playback mode digital zoom export and print features are available in Search mode For more information refer to Operating Playback Digital Zoom on page 73 Exporting Video on page 97 and Printing Images on page 68 Figure 47 shows the parts of the DX8100 window in Search mode Figure 47 DX8100 HVR Search Mode Window C2630M C 7 09 71 Table X describes the parts of the DX8100 window in the Search mode Table X Parts ofthe DX8100 Window in Search Mode Item Part Description Index Search Allows users to search motion and alarm events listed in the event index panel Thumbnail Search Allows users to visually search video that has been recorded over a 24 hour period Video is presented as a series of thumbnail images Each thumbnail represents the first image recorded during a specified period of time Thumbnails ca
54. Site Tree Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs To link a relay output to an alarm input 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EX 2 Inthe Site Tree click the plus sign next to to expand the Alarm tree if needed Relays can also be linked to cameras and alarms on the Link settings page For more information refer to Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings on page 132 3 Click the plus sign next to F to expand the Relay tree if needed 4 Drag a relay output onto an alarm input in the Site Tree REMOVING LINKS This section describes how to remove links and includes the following sections e Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera on page 40 e Removing a Linked Relay Output from a Camera on page 40 e Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input on page 41 Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera To remove an alarm link from a camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EX 2 In the Site Tree click the plus sign next to the camera from which you want to remove an alarm input 3 Left click and drag the alarm outside the Site Tree panel and then release the mouse button 4 Repeat the above process for each alarm you want to remove Removing a Linked Relay Output from a Camera To remove a relay link from a camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button Ea 2 Inthe Site Tree click the plus sign next to the camera from which you want to remove the relay outp
55. String Allows you to enter an end of line string Monetary Format Includes the following options e Monetary Unit Box for entering the monetary symbol e Thousand Separator Symbol used in transaction data to separate number by thousands e Decimal Separator Symbol used in transaction data to separate dollars and cents O Time Format Allows you to set the following options to match those in the transaction data e Date Selects the date format Month Type Selects the month format e Time Selects the time format e Time Period Selects the time period 12 or 24 hour O Character Format Allows you to specify a character filter e Special Device Character Not available at this time e Custom Device Filter Contains the character filter e Add Moves the character filter into the Custom Device Filter table e Delete Deletes the selected filter in the Custom Device Filter table e Control Code Contains a selection of control codes for creating a desired filter e Special Character Contains a selection of characters for creating a desired filter e Range Not applicable Table AV describes the transaction start and end parameters Table AV Transaction Start and End Parameters Value Description None First part of transaction field is not used CR Carriage return character 13 in ASCII LF Line feed character 10 in ASCII FF Form feed character 12 in ASCII D
56. TOUR To deactivate a preset tour do one of the following e Use the mouse to move the on screen PTZ control e Activate a PTZ preset C2630M C 7 09 65 USING THE KBD300A KEYBOARD 66 The KBD300A allows you to operate certain DX8100 live view display functions and control camera PTZ operations from a keyboard rather than a mouse When connected to the DX8100 server the KBD300A supports two modes the Standard mode and the Shift mode The Shift mode is entered by pressing the Shift button and is indicated by a lit LED For information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual This section describes the KBD300A operational features and is organized as follows e KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features e KBD3004 SHIFT Key Mode Features on page 67 For information about connecting the KBD300A to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100 Installation manual For information about configuring DX8100 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 198 KBD300A STANDARD MODE OPERATIONAL FEATURES The KBD300A Standard mode allows you to control certain DX8100 operation features from the keyboard This section describes the KBD300A Standard mode features functions The Standard mode only works in the DX8100 view pane You can program camera presets and patterns operate the camera PTZ features and assign cameras to panes For detailed in
57. Table Al DX8100 Server Maximum IPS Recording sel o NTSC IPS PAL IPS Total Per Camera Total Per Camera CIF 240 30 200 25 DX8108 2CIF 120 15 100 12 ACIF 60 7 50 6 CIF 480 30 400 25 DX8116 2CIF 240 15 200 12 ACIF 120 7 100 6 CIF 360 15 300 12 DX8124 2CIF 180 6 150 6 ACIF 90 3 75 3 CIF 480 15 400 12 DX8132 2CIF 240 6 200 6 ACIF 120 3 100 3 Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording Table AJ describes how the DX8100 organizes cameras channels into groups of four cameras per group To achieve the maximum recording rate and resolution 30 ips at 4CIF NTSC or 25 ips at 4CIF PAL enable one camera from each group while the other three cameras in the group are disabled For information about the various recording rates and resolutions refer to Understanding DX8100 Server Maximum IPS Recording Table AJ DX8100 Camera Grouping Model Group Assigned Camera DX8108 1 1 4 2 5 8 DX8116 1 4 5 8 9 12 Be w N 13 16 C2630M C 7 09 To set up the DX8100 to record at the maximum rate and resolution 1 C2630M C 7 09 Do one of the following e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page e If the Setup dialog box is already open click the Camera button a The Camera page is displayed In the Camera Properties section for Group 1 do the following
58. The sound feature is enabled 4 Verify that you can hear live audio from an audio monitoring device connected to the DX8100 server s audio output C2630M C 7 09 49 OPERATING THE ON SCREEN PTZ CONTROLS 50 Users with PTZ access rights Standard User by default and higher can operate PTZ lens functions of cameras that support such features PTZ functions can be controlled on the screen in Live mode using the mouse PTZ control is available for cameras that support PTZ functions using Pelco s P D or Coaxitron protocols It is also available for supported third party dome cameras For more information about configuring PTZ ports refer to Setting Up COM Port Properties on page 179 and Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 180 In addition the PTZ option must be enabled and a protocol must be assigned to the camera channel For more information refer to Camera Setup on page 116 This section describes how to use the PTZ controls and includes the following topics e Operating the PTZ Controls e Adjusting the Camera Lens on page 51 e Adjusting the Camera Lens on page 51 e Adjusting the Camera Zoom on page 51 e Using Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 52 OPERATING THE PTZ CONTROLS To operate the on screen PTZ controls 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EE 2 Select a PTZ enabled camera from the Site Tree 3 Place the mouse pointer in the middle of the camera s
59. Transaction with Exception Only The Exception Code check box is available 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid and if transactions with exceptions were recorded during the time range the transactions are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window C2630M C 7 09 8 On the playback controls click the Forward button The video recorded for the transaction is displayed in the Video window Playback Start or 10 2006 03 00 00 End 01 10 2006 10 0 03 Transaction Information I Device Name TM7POS01 3b I Transaction Number y Data Information Y Transaction with Exception Only O J Line Item I Action Code El J Exception Code 01 10 2006 09 10 41 718 y Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 4 Ch Device Name Trans Date Time Excep DATE 1 10 2005 TIME 9 11 5 2 ATM POSO1 46 2006 1 10 9 8 51 Yes 2 ATM POSO1 47 2006 1 10 9 9 10 Yes HOTDOGS amp PK 1 89 2 ATM POSOL 48 2006 1 10 9 9 21 Yes ora ae e 2 ATMIPOS01 2 2006 1 10 9 10 47 Yes E a 2 ATM POSOL 4 2006 1 10 9 11 5 Yes TOTAL 1088 2 ATM POSO1 5 2006 1 10 9 11 17 Yes 2 ATM POSO1 7 2006 1 10 9 11 34 Yes 2 ATM POSO1 8 2006 1 10 9 11 47 Yes 2 ATM POSO1 9 2006 1 10 9 12 3 Yes y 2 ATM POSO1 10 2006 1 10 9 12 16 Yes aA 4 Fig
60. Users access to the DX8100 s setup functions However only Administrators can define user names and passwords for new users To access the Setup Mode click the Setup button on the DX8100 toolbar The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page To access a Setup page click a setup button in the DX8100 Setup dialog box The selected setup page appears For information about the Setup dialog refer to Understanding the Setup Dialog Box on page 115 114 C2630M C 7 09 UNDERSTANDING THE SETUP DIALOG BOX The Setup dialog box opens in the DX8100 view panel to the default Camera page You can only view video in the Camera page You must exit the Setup dialog box to access the DX8100 functions in the main window Figure 81 shows the parts of the Setup dialog Motion Zone r Channel Information Name Camera 1 Camera 1 Zonet Resolution 320 x 240 Frame Rate 1 fps Go e Recording Mode Normal Recording inkang Pre Alarm ie a Linked Alarm 1 Linked Relay None Audio Installed Enable r Camera Properties r Motion Detection Selected Channel Camerad1 I Disable Number of Blocks Camera Name E Camera Security None e i Protocol PELCO C y PTZ Locking Auto timeout 10 Sec Y PTZ Adjustment Test Panl Pana Titu Tito Audio Settings d fa e e eae a Audio Channel F Disable UE None zj Vi PS Video Loss Detection Picture Adjustment Video Lo
61. YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Do the following a Inthe Emergency Agent Setup section select a client from the list b Click Edit The Agent Setup dialog box opens c Enter a new name for the client Client names can be up to 63 characters long and can include spaces but not special characters d Enter a new IP address for the client e If necessary enter a port number in the Agent Port box The default port number is 9004 Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change the Emergency Agent port number from its default of 9004 Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical Click OK Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen C2630M C 7 09 DELETING CLIENTS FROM THE NOTIFICATION LIST To delete a client from the emergency notification list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Do the following a Inthe Emergency Agent Setup section select a client from the list b Click Delete The selected client is deleted 4 Click Apply LINKING CAMERAS TO CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENTS After clients have been added cameras must be configured to notify individual client
62. a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alarm ATM POS Video Loss Alarm Input Relay Output Activation Period AlarmO1 RelayOl 3 Seconds Mant ha ea Al y Disable a Alarm04 Alarm05 No Link T Alarm06 No Link y Ino Link y Alarm08 No Link YU No Link v xl To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt Alarm gt in the linking setup ms Figure 137 Linking Relays to Alarms Table AM describes the available alarm activated options Table AM Alarm Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when the alarm is triggered Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment the alarm is triggered 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the alarm has been triggered C2630M C 7 09 165 166 Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output To configure an ATM POS activated relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the ATM POS tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an ATM POS a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a
63. be up to 32 characters in length and can include spaces but not special characters 5 Click OK 6 Click Close 7 Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 243 244 Modifying an E mail Group Name To modify a group name 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b n the Group Name table select a group c Click Edit Group The Manage Groups dialog box opens d Edit the existing name or enter a new name for the group Click OK Click Close Click Apply Deleting an E mail Group To delete a group 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b In the Group Name table select a group c Click Delete Click Close Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 Adding Members to an E mail Group Up to 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group To add e mail addresses to a group 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Se
64. ca cc er 00 09 ca ca e es 65 62 es cs co en ca Figure 112 Event Recording Link Settings ATM POS Record Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to a video loss event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Video Loss Record Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording in response to a video loss event 5 Click Apply Video Loss Channel CAMERA y Camera Name Camera 1 r Enable Record on Source Video Loss Event EE S co ca ca cs 8 9 9 0 0 0 02 02 02 05 6 Earn ed ee a Figure 113 Event Recording Link Settings Video Loss Record Link Settings Section C2630M C 7 09 LINKING PTZ PRESETS AND PATTERNS TO EXTERNAL EVENTS The DX8100 can be configured in such a way that motion alarms ATM POS transactions and video loss events detected by one camera will result in the repositioning of another Similarly alarm inputs can be set to trigger camera positioning presets Only a single preset or pattern can be linked to a camera This section describes how to link PTZ prese
65. camera views that show the delivery gate entrance for buildings 1 4 7 and 12 during the hours of 06 00 to 07 30 and another camera view that displays the front lobby of buildings 1 through 16 at 08 00 This section describes the following topics e Adding a Camera View to Favorites e Organizing Favorites in Folders ADDING A CAMERA VIEW TO FAVORITES You can create multiple camera views to monitor various site locations For example you could create a folder named Day Shift for displaying camera views during normal working hours and Night Shift for displaying various camera views after work and during the night hours For information about organizing favorites into folders refer to Organizing Favorites in Folders To add a camera view to favorites 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click Favorite gt Add to Favorites The Add to Favorites dialog box opens 2 Enter the camera view name in the Name box 3 Click OK The camera view is added to the favorites and the Add to Favorites dialog box closes 4 To view the new entry from the DX8100 menu bar click Favorites The new entry appears in the Favorites list File Edit View Export Favorite Help Add to Favorites Organize Favorites PAR Building 6 Day Shift Figure 11 Favorites Menu List C2630M C 7 09 43 44 ORGANIZING FAVORITES IN FOLDERS As your list of favorites grows you can keep them organized by creating folders You can organize your camera views by site
66. can remove a USB device within the DX8100 environment In this case you do not have to exit to the Windows environment AN WARNING Improperly removing a USB drive can cause data to be lost or corrupted To remove the USB flash drive from the DX8100 1 Click gt File Unplug Eject Hardware The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box opens 2 Select the USB flash drive in the Hardware devices list 3 Click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog box opens 4 Select the USB device 5 Click OK 6 Wait for the DX8100 to respond with a message stating that it is safe to remove the USB device from the DX8100 Removing a USB flash drive before the DX8100 acknowledges that it is safe to do so might result in lost or corrupted data 7 Remove the USB flash drive C2630M C 7 09 ENABLING THE DEINTERLACING FILTER Images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second might move or tear The DX8100 provides a global option for enabling deinterlacing filtering to enhance the exported image for 4CIF recorded channels In this case the exported image is converted to 2CIF resolution This setting is effective for all channels and cannot be set for enabling individual channels For more information about viewing video in the deinterlaced mode refer to Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode on page 96 To enable the deinterlacing filter 1 Make sure the HVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking the Live button or the Export button Foy 2
67. cate atti ot teenie e a cecil eel o Ailes Ss o AS 201 Add Backup Schedule DOBLA Aza 203 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule ceca tr a iaa a 204 Instant Record Backup Now Di log BoX 20 des 206 Us nt o O od a e thi mt he e dl ea e Vale dde Med 208 Add New User Dialogi BOX ooo e ee ee eee 212 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address n n n nuunuu nnana naaa EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 215 Adding a site with a Dynamic IPAddress geiiar aie a leat dd A ie sed a ad 216 Finalizing ite Scotia Aas i 217 Exporting HVA SettIngS gt e ed ls een as clado e ed al 220 Import DX8100 Server Configuration ooooooooo b bce tenet eens 221 ogiView Dialog Box sienna A Ne he hei ot eal wale kal 222 Window Log Viewer Dialog BOX coo A ea ees Mee SA Sead aoe x oa HE eae EEE EASE 223 System Setup MB ae aides axe adatom a RO nd a aaa a aanas 225 Data Retention Time Limit Entered Manually oooooooooooooo oo 227 External Monitor Automatic Map Ngk e a a e o e A dl o a 229 Ext rnal Monitor Manual Mappings oi oz 231 Loading aM Dping Sequence ctra tc ai da bata 232 Modify a Mapping Sequence A ed la 233 Delete a Mapping Sequence 2 4 2 0 cee teen ca ogee ewe a e aaa a 234 Basic E mail Notification Setups eramos ri dada da al rd add 239 EMail estee cta e e O e e ln nl A O de a 240 A Us o E a o da 245 Remove User trom E Mail Group ii is AA DA cia aa 246 Modify Member Attnibutes 0 co cido bos wu adds dlls copa los de a
68. channels must be disabled to assign an IP camera NOTE For information about the supported resources for configuring analog and IP cameras refer to DX8100 Series HVR Version 2 0 Release Notes e Disabling an analog or IP camera results in the following conditions Frees up system CPU and memory resources Video from the disabled channel is no longer available for recording Settings specific to the disabled camera are preserved The IP camera is not removed from the IP Camera Properties dialog box For information about disabling a camera refer to Disabling an Analog Camera on page 130 or Disabling an IP Camera on page 130 For information about restoring a camera refer to Restoring a Disabled Analog or IP Camera on page 131 For information about DX8100 supported analog and IP camera capacity refer to DX8100 Series HVR Version 2 0 Release Notes To access this document go to http www Pelco com and navigate to the Hybrid Video Recorders page C2630M C 7 09 123 124 Searching for IP Cameras NOTE The scan utility is a DX8100 server based feature and discovers IP cameras within the DX8100 network The scan utility is not available in the Client application 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click IP Camera Properties The IP Camera Properties dialog box appears 3 To search for IP cameras connected to the network e Using the IP Camera Proper
69. cn El 5b Exception Code BANANA Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 556 DATE 1 13 2006 TIME 7 26 19 2 ATMIPOSO1 556 2006 1 13 7 26 19 ATM POSO1 557 1 13 7 26 29 ATM POSO1 560 1 13 7 26 59 ATM POSOL 561 13 7 27 9 BAKED CHIPS 3 48 FROZEN CORN 1 89 0 89 RAL 46 26 ATM POSO1 563 13 7 27 33 TAX 0 50 g ATM POS01 572 13 7 28 59 TOTAL 6 76 ATM POS01 13 13 7 43 54 Figure 56 Transactions that Contain a Unique Line Item SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS BY ACTION CODE The DX8100 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions by action code To use an action code to search transaction data the action code must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the action code is defined the action code will not find the data structure within the transaction data The search criteria is based on the following e Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data e Date time The date and time window within which the transaction s were recorded e Action code The special two character filter that defines a specific transaction event To search for transactions by action code 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button ta 2 On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed POS Search C2630M C 7 09 91 92 To select a
70. da a td lid diia 113 Parts of the DX8100 Setup Dialog BOX 115 Gamera Page Aire A A AA 117 LOW Sensitivity LEVE lisie reena do dada aras 118 HighSensitivity Setting Level lia a a Sold did lod 118 AdeguatesSensitivity Level asee A A A AA EE eA ey ods a 118 Camera Motion Detection SP ekee r a vas A A A A A N eaa 19 Audio Option Not Installed erreren ina A A A E E A E E TE ES CAS 120 AUX Audio Settings Dialog BOX soda darla a a aaraa 120 Video LOss Detectiony 0 A A A A PAR e 122 DX8100 Scan UtlResults she a a E A O A A ias 124 Manually Entering lP Camera Data oia cali da rd has een dba iad dag a sd acid 125 Manually Entering IP Camera Data 125 Automated Assignment of an IP a A di eh wee eens 125 Entering the User Name Password and Stream ooo 26 Pelco PAO General Tab trotar ct and Me s bade tehacd ea ptuohie lt tds dde aliada 126 MiewingP C mera Setldgs cir tt A wee Bs A A tos 128 DX8100 System Resources Warning Dialog Box 2 2 2 ooo 28 DX8100 Resource Meter nasrne eae anes pee woe haven ANE Shey kg adn sa 129 DX8100 System Resources Warning Dialog Box 2 2 enn nbn e eee 130 Disabling an IP Gamera A A i ee SA oa 130 P Camera Status Disable a SAA a teh le OER fala Vos hii a ano 131 P Camera Not Registered Dialogs os ok cade nieecs aie heures eaten onthe nd avec Mabie ceeds E SEOANE 131 P Camera in Site Tree and Status Disabled 0 0 rr 131 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Relay Settings Section 2 0 0 0 ncn
71. ds E ET A RE Bn die ie EEE gale AA E Me RE eae 165 Linking Relays OA TI POS ccna A A esa 166 Linking Relays to VideO LOSS 22 2 vieweetdhd gees ahd ie id aid 167 Network Setup Page tt DA E A AS 169 NIP Se rveriList DialOG BOX suo e o Hs fon gamle ke A oa dais 173 Addy Edit NTP Server Dialog BOXi cetod 10 0402 nad lea al ti td dale da tds ad 173 Editing NIP Time Se oa a a A A es Sed A Va Pe das ts 174 ANA A 2 hI le he A aide tf oh et halal Gh oie a alt 177 Multi Mode Communication Port SettigS oooooooooocoooocoro n nen nnn b tbe nett e ee 181 Default Data Format List Pages sion 280 05 old diese plik i aes ee d id dled id Se iS etd atlas Sete seed lel 182 Modified ER 650 Data Format Dialog Box irere enie renra oo 182 DatasFOrmat Listeastecce e E Satna Ns e Wet A cola Moon Rnd as dav ol 183 Assigning the Data Format ATM POS Devices 022 0 c0c ccc beac eke coved bese eed cece sdb ewebuesesbbeseeuiauentes 184 EventsRecording Link Settings PUE iaa taa std 185 Schedule Setup Page A E A osas 186 Datarkormat Page a a cs IRE ES no WARE bs E e An dr AIR a in a 187 Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device oooocococcococorr rr 191 Advanced RAGE tati a a a a ade ai 193 Exceptions Dialog BOX iir ol Leo ab 194 Assigning an Exception to an ATM POS Device 2 2 cnet ett e ene ees 196 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection 0 0 00 0 rr 197 Recording ATM POS Transaction 198 Backup Gonriguration screens fetus
72. e The DX8100 Web Client establishes multicast connections with DX8100 servers in its own VLAN e The network must support Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP e The number of DX8100 Web Client connections is unlimited Operation e Initially the DX8100 Web Client uses the IP address of the target DX8100 server using the TCP port to establish a connection to the DX8100 After the connection is established the session switches from using TCP to using User Data Protocol UDP e Since the Web Client connection is using UDP the user does not have to log in or out of the DX8100 server The Web Client displays the connection status connected or disconnect e The PTZ feature is not available e The Web Client displays only the camera name in the Site Tree All other camera recording details such as the recording mode resolution recording rate and so forth are not displayed e The camera name and DX8100 server information is not updated until a new connection to the DX8100 is initiated e The Web Client monitors the UDP socket every 10 seconds to ensure that live data is being received If live data is not received within 30 seconds the Web Client will disconnect from the DX8100 server after two minutes and automatically reconnect to the DX8100 Enabling Multicasting The recommended multicasting IP range is from 224 0 1 1 to 224 0 1 253 To enable multicasting 1 In the Network page click the check box labeled Enabl
73. for transactions that contain a unique line item 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button ak 2 On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed 90 POS Search C2630M C 7 09 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following e In the DX8100 Site Tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name box In this case the Device Name box is deselected e Inthe Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name When the Device Name box is enabled type the ATM POS device name in the box 4 Set the date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Line Item The Line Item box is available b Type the name of the line item in the box 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid transactions containing the line item are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Start 07 13 2068 2 07 3 25 0 End for 13 2006 073 07 3 0 3 Transaction Information I Device Name JATM PO0S01 je T Transaction Number m Data Information I Transaction with Exception Only D Line Item CHIPS I Action Code
74. gt System Health View view Export Favorite Help OSD Log Resolution Cycle Views Setup Extended View Index View n Health View Status View Log View rvv v Display deinterlaced image Figure 78 System Health View Submenu 2 On the submenu select Status View The System Health dialog box opens High Lima CPU Tempe CNI 807 wci 178000 F FeeSpees n AeH ier PN SMART Irion HOD Modet 5 1 775000005 Hgh HOD Terpamse CUSCO wey 176000 F Nenat Information UPS Intonation Link Speed 100 0 Mbps Denda Utica ARD Mbps Sening SMART Update Inteewat 1 te z System Upstate Intreval ED Sec a E Figure 79 System Health Dialog Box 3 To set a threshold for a device function do the following a Click the box for the device function b Enter the value you want c Click Apply d Click Close to exit the dialog box C2630M C 7 09 WORKING WITH SYSTEM HEALTH LOG VIEW The System Health Log allows you to view a history of the events that have occurred A calendar function allows you to use a date range to display health status events To access the System Health Log 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click View gt System Health View 2 On the submenu select Log View The System Health Log opens System Health Log x System Health Check 14 51 45 MOTHERBOARD J Temperaturel 50 35 01 31 2008 14 52 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperature 45 35
75. includes the following topics C2630M C 7 09 Using Action Codes Creating an ATM POS Exception on page 193 Editing an ATM POS Exception on page 195 Deleting an ATM POS Exception on page 195 Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device on page 196 191 Using Action Codes To use an action code to search transaction data the action code must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the action code is defined the action code will not find the data structure within the transaction data Table AW The following table describes the ATM POS action codes Table AW Action Codes Code Description Code Description AL ALL CODES item or merchandise sold normally GR GAS REFUND refund of unused portion of gasoline prepayment AM AMOUNT TENDERED cash amount tendered IM INFORMATION MESSAGES displays message fields as is CC CREDIT CARD amount tendered with credit card IT TEM SALE TRANSACTION displays message fields CD CASH DROP safe drop LO LOTTERY PAYMENT lottery pay out CG CHARGE ACCT amount added to charge account LS LOTTERY lottery sale balance CH CHANGE change due to customer MT Not included CK CHECK amount tendered with check NS NO SALE no sale CL CLERK NAME and or number or CLERK LOGIN NT NEG TAX negative tax CM MFR COUPON manufacturer coupon re
76. indicates alarm recording e Yellow indicates ATM POS recording e Purple indicates video loss recording e Black on white background indicates instant recording 2 Instant Recording Starts stops instant recording if enabled Changes from silver to blue to indicate that instant recording is activated This section describes how to start and stop instant recording and includes the following topics e Starting Instant Recording e Stopping Instant Recording Starting Instant Recording To start instant recording e Double click the Instant Recording icon located in the lower right corner of the view pane The Instant Recording icon changes from silver to blue indicating that instant recording is activated If video recording is enabled verify that REC is black and highlighted white If video recording is not enabled REC is not displayed or will show another recording mode color Stopping Instant Recording To deactivate instant recording e Inthe view pane double click the Instant Recording icon The instant recording icon changes from blue to silver indicating that instant recording is de activated LISTENING TO LIVE AUDIO AT THE SERVER 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EX 2 Drag a camera that is configured to record live audio from the Site Tree onto a view pane NOTE Live audio recording is not supported for IP cameras 3 On the playback control click the Mute on off button A
77. indicates instant recording Site Designator Camera Designator Lists the number and name of the current site Lists the number and name of the current camera On Screen PTZ Control Facilitates mouse control of PTZ functions Refer to Operating the On Screen PTZ Controls on page 50 99000 Instant Recording Starts stops instant recording if enabled 46 C2630M C 7 09 CUSTOMIZING THE ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD Users with Guest User access and higher can add and delete on screen display items To customize the on screen display 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD and then select the items you want to add to or delete from the OSD Items include e Site Name e Camera Name e Video Recording e Audio Recording e PTZ e Instant Recording e POS e Select All displays all items in each pane e Background Color File Edit view Export Favorite Help g 05D g v Site Name Log w Camera Name Resolution v Video Recording E X lt Dx Cycle Views Setup gt y Audio Recording Er Extended View v PTZ v Index View v Instant Recording System Health View v POS Display deinterlaced image ace y Camera 5 Background Color gt Figure 16 HVR OSD Menu Options 2 Do one of the following e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Background Color gt Set Color to add a contrasting background field behind each OSD display item e From the
78. letters as well as the path to the folder to which you want to map To map a network drive 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click the Backup button amp The Backup schedule page is displayed Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens Click Map a network drive The Map Network Drive dialog box opens asking for a drive letter and path In the Drive drop down box select an available drive letter Type the path in the Folder drop down box for example VP_address_of_server folder_name Optional Click the Reconnect at logon box if you do not want the mapped drive to remain connected each time you log on Click Finish The newly mapped drive is added as a remote drive and is displayed in the Device area of the Export Video dialog box The mapped drive can now be accessed just like a local drive DISCONNECTING FROM A NETWORK DRIVE To disconnect from a network drive if 2 206 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click the Backup button amp The Backup schedule page is displayed Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens Click Disconnect mapped drive The Disconnect Network Drive dialog box opens Select the network drive
79. lost or forgotten Admin password 1 From the DX8100 menu choose File gt Password Recovery The Password Recovery dialog box appears Password Recovery x a MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Date Time Tuesday February 24 2004 12 39 59 Crack key O OK Cancel Figure 188 Password Recovery Dialog Box 2 Contact Pelco Product Support with the following information a MAC address as it appears in the Password Recovery dialog box b Current date for your location as it appears in the Password Recovery dialog box c Any additional information requested by Pelco Product Support 3 Enter the new password you obtained from Pelco Product Support in the field provided 4 Click OK PERFORMING PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 252 The DX8100 filter should be cleaned periodically to ensure proper ventilation and cooling of the DX8100 The filter is easily accessible through DX8100 front panel To remove and cleanse the filter 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut Down dialog box opens 2 Select Shut down 3 Click OK 4 Open the DX8100 front panel 5 Reach behind the front panel and pull out the filter assembly 5 C2630M C 7 09 6 Remove the filter 6 J lt A SS o eS sees Se eS ee Ses MMMM Me ESO OSOS SSIS BOSS POROTOS SSIS 2S2 225 oo 95950 SOY SORE SS SY SRY lt S seca sane SS Se o 29 neues OSS Ae e SO RRR 22
80. name user name and so forth For example you could create a folder named Day Shift for displaying camera views for the day shift Creating a Favorites Folder To create a favorites folder 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click Favorite gt Organize Favorites The Organize Favorites dialog box opens Favorites note EH Building 6 Day shift fA Building 6 Evening Shift Create Folder Rename Move to Folder Delete Folder amp File Note Figure 12 Organize Favorites Dialog Box 2 Click Create Folder A new folder is added to the favorites area 3 To name the folder do one of the following a f the new folder name is already selected type the name of the folder or b If the new folder name is not selected 1 Click the new folder 2 Type the name of the folder The new folder is listed in the Favorites area of the Organize Favorites dialog box and in the Favorites menu C2630M C 7 09 Moving Existing Favorites to a Folder To move an existing favorite to a folder 1 Create a favorites folder refer to Creating a Favorites Folder on page 44 2 From the DX8100 menu bar click Favorite gt Organize Favorites The Organize Favorites dialog box opens A list of the current favorites and folders is displayed in the favorites area Organize Favorites xl Favorites note FB Building 6 Day Shift FB Building 6 Evening shift Create Folder Rename Move to Folder Delete
81. on page 240 Enabling or Disabling E mail Notification To enable or disable emergency e mail notification 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Emergency E mail Notification page do one of the following e Click the Enable Notification button to enable e mail notification e Click the Disable Notification button to disable e mail notification C2630M C 7 09 Setting Up the E mail Server Set up the e mail server in the Emergency E Mail Notification page For information about accessing the Emergency E Mail Notification page refer Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup on page 238 To set up the e mail server le 2 3 4 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Enter a name in the Full Name box You should enter a name that reflects the DX8100 server sending the notification for example DX8100 First Floor Lobby Names can be up to 31 characters long and can include spaces but not special characters Enter your e mail address in the E mail Address box Enter the address of your local SMTP mail server Obtain this info
82. rate per second the viewed image might move or tear The View menu s Deinterlaced Image option is used to enhance the image during a search activity To search video using the deinterlaced option 1 On the menu bar click View gt Display deinterlaced image 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button al The DX8100 is placed in the Search mode REUSING THE SEARCH TIME RANGE The DX8100 allows sharing of time range search settings between the Thumbnail and Pixel search mode If you initiate a Thumbnail search you can select a preview clip and initiate a Pixel search The Pixel search mode is based on the same time criteria as the preview Thumbnail clip 78 C2630M C 7 09 INDEX VIDEO SEARCH Index search allows a user to search video by events such as motion detection or alarm activation Events are listed chronologically and by type To ensure the proper camera channel is selected check the camera information box above the playback timeline or verify that the desired view panel is framed with a thin red outline Index video can also be displayed in full screen view For information about displaying playback video in full screen view refer to Displaying Index Search Video in Full Screen View on page 30 To search video by motion or alarm events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button ak On the DX8100 Search control click the Search button O On the DX8100 toolbar click a view panel division button
83. secondary stream O Camera31 PELCO 192168286 49152 MPEG4 admin admin Primary O Camera32 PELCO 192 168 1 11 49152 MPEG4 X smsan ose Figure 94 Entering the User Name Password and Stream 8 Repeat step 2 to 7 to associate additional IP cameras with other camera channels 9 Click OK The channel assignments are saved and the Camera page appears 10 Optional To adjust IP camera settings refer to Configuring IP Camera Settings Otherwise refer to Customizing IP Camera Display Settings on page 127 Configuring IP Camera Settings For Pelco IP cameras use the IP Camera Properties dialog box the Web browser running on the DX8100 Client computer or the Device Utility For Axis IP cameras use the Web based Axis interface For information about configuring Axis camera settings refer to the Axis documentation that came with the camera Using the IP Cameras Properties Dialog to Configure IP Cameras 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click IP Camera Properties The IP Camera Properties dialog box appears 3 Click a check box to select an IP camera channel The Show Setup button is available 4 Click Show Setup The IP Camera Properties setup content area appears and the Web browser accesses the IP camera s Settings page PELCO ar BETA Live Settings Help Logoutadmin IP Camera IXE20DN AAKMHC9 View Mode O B T IP Camera IXE20DN AAKMHC9 x E Primar
84. setup table is displayed n the Data Format column do the following a In the Device ID column click the check box to select an ATM POS device b Double click the Data Format cell for the selected ATM POS device The Data Format cell drop down box is displayed c Click in the Data Format cell to display the available data formats d Select the data format you want to assign to the ATM POS device nthe Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 nthe Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 C2630M C 7 09 Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions An exception is a predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data Exceptions are configured on the Advanced page e Doone of the following e Click Apply to confirm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box e Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page Available ATM POS Device De ATM POS Name ATM POS Data Formit Protocol 1 ATM POSO1 1 ER 650 v POS GENERAL O2 ATM P0OS02 2 None E None O3 ATM POSO3 3 fo None O4 ATM Poso4 4 None i O5 ATM Poso5 5 None None O6 ATM POSO6 6 None None O7 aTm POSo7 7 None None Os atm Posos 8 None None O9 ATM POSO9 9 None None O10 ATM POS10 10 None None O11 AtTM POs11 11 None None O12
85. standard audio inputs are disabled To set up the standard audio options 1 Connect the audio input source to the DX8100 For information about connecting an audio source to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100 Installation manual 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 3 In the Channel Information area verify that expanded audio option is not installed This is indicated by the label Audio Not Installed r Channel Information Name Camera 5 Camera 5 Camera Type Local Camera Resolution 640 x 240 Frame Rate 4 fps Recording Mode Normal Recording Pre Alarm None Post Alarm None Linked Alarm 5 Linked Relay 5 Audio Not Installed Figure 87 Audio Option Not Installed 4 Inthe Audio Settings area click Advanced gt gt The AUX Audio Settings dialog box opens 5 In the AUX Audio Settings dialog box do the following a Click to deselect the Audio Disable check box b Inthe Input Device drop down box select Mic single channel only or Line in two standard channels c Click the Left Channel check box and in the drop down box select an associated camera d Click the Right Channel check box and in the drop down box select an associated camera e Optional Left click the Aux volume control and drag left to decrease the audio input level or to the right to increase the audio input level f Click OK g Click Apply x AUX Audio Channel
86. the DX8100 and includes the following topics e Starting the DX8100 e Shutting Down the DX8100 For information about logging in to the DX8100 refer to Logging In to the DX8100 Application on page 18 STARTING THE DX8100 To start the DX8100 1 Once the system is installed open the front panel of the HVR and press the power switch Figure 1 Front Panel and Power Switch 2 Wait while the unit starts this may take several minutes SHUTTING DOWN THE DX8100 You must have Power User or Administrator access to shut down For information about users security levels refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 210 To shut down 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut Down dialog box opens 2 Select Shut down 3 Click OK 16 C2630M C 7 09 DX8100 DOCUMENTATION You can print selected technical documentation free directly from the Internet To access technical documentation 1 Go to www pelco com products The Pelco Products Web page is displayed 2 Scroll to the Control Site Equipment section and click Video Recorders The HVR Web page is displayed 3 Scroll to the DX8100 and locate the specific document you want to view or print You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader to open search and or print the document Go to www adobe com to download a free copy of Acrobat Reader C2630M C 7 09 Logging In to the DX8100 Application
87. the interval you want to search Click the Forward button J gt to view video Double clicking a thumbnail image will enlarge the image and begin playback pa aa mmm lt enh dt Ra A Figure 49 DX8100 HVR Thumbnail Search Screen 81 POS SEARCH The DX8100 allows a user to search any 24 hour period of recorded POS video and data To record ATM POS video and data the ATM POS 82 devices and DX8100 must first be connected and configured as follows e Connect the ATM POS devices to the DX8100 e Setup camera to ATM POS device linking e Configure the DX8100 ATM POS settings for each attached ATM POS device e Start an ATM POS transmittal and verify that the DX8100 is receiving the ATM POS video and data For information about setting up the DX8100 for ATM POS applications refer to the following sections e Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events on page 135 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 137 e Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events on page 141 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 196 e Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 180 This section describes how to use the POS search feature and includes the following topics e Understanding the POS Search View e Searching and Displaying POS Data by Device Name on page 85 e Searching by POS Transaction Number on page 87 e Searching for All Transactions with Exceptions on p
88. this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to configure preset tours and includes the following topics e Programming a Preset Tour e Activating a Preset Tour on page 65 e Deactivating a Preset Tour on page 65 PROGRAMMING A PRESET TOUR This section describes how to program a preset tour and includes the following topics e Accessing a Preset Tour Group e Adding Presets to a Tour on page 63 e Deleting Presets from a Tour on page 64 Accessing a Preset Tour Group To access the Preset tour group dialog box 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button 2 On the PTZ keypad click the Set button and then click the Pgm button Porn The Preset tour group dialog box opens 3 Select the preset tour 1 4 that you want to program from the drop down box 4 Do one of the following e Toadd presets to a tour refer to Adding Presets to a Tour on page 63 e Todelete presets from a tour refer to Deleting Presets from a Tour on page 64 Preset tour group x Available presets Number Name DwellTime Sec 4 Preset01 2 Preset02 Preset03 2 Preset04 2 Preset05 2 Preset 2 Add to Group Preset Tour Group v 01 EY Joooo0o Delete Save Apply Figure 33 Preset Tour Dialog Box 62 C2630M C 7 09 Adding Pre
89. to a Camera Channel on page 124 Assigning an IP Camera to a Camera Channel The DX8100 allows you to select the video format and recording stream The MPEG4 codec video format setting allows you to select the primary or secondary stream The MJPEG codec setting only supports the primary stream e Pelco IP cameras 1P110 IP3701 Spectra IP and Spectra Mini IP These cameras record as follows Primary stream 4CIF 30 ips Secondary stream CIF 15 ips e Pelco IX and IXE Series network cameras with Sarix technology The resolution frame rate and bit rate can be adjusted e Axis Communications Axis 211 or Axis 232D Frame rates are selectable from 1 to 30 ips resolutions are selectable from 640x480 480x360 320x240 240x810 or 160x120 C2630M C 7 09 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click IP Camera Properties The IP Camera Properties dialog box appears 3 To assign an IP camera to a camera channel do one of the following e Manual assignment 1 Click a check box to select a camera 2 Click the Manufacturer drop down box and select a manufacturer The port number compression method and video stream settings automatically appear in the camera row IP Camera Properties E Camera32 49152 MPEG4 Primary Figure 91 Manually Entering IP Camera Data 3 Click the IP drop down box and enter the camera s IP address O Camera
90. transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data For information about exceptions refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 O Start and Stop Start Initiates a search event Stop Ends a search event O POS Search Table Lists the data discovered in response to the POS options selected for the transaction and data information e Channel number From 1 16 e Device name By default ATM POS01 to ATM POS16 The device name can be changed e Transaction number Number assigned by the ATM POS device to the transaction data e Date Time Date and time transaction is recorded e Exception Yes if an exception filter is active for the transaction data has an exception No if the transaction does not have an exception filter The transaction and data information are based on the ATM POS configuration settings derived from the following e Data format e ATM POS exceptions e Exception action codes For information about setting up ATM POS transaction and data options refer to Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 180 C2630M C 7 09 Table Y Parts ofthe POS Search View 2 of 2 Item Part Description Q Data Window Area where recorded transaction data is displayed O Data Overlay Box The function is not supported at this time O Video Window Area where live and playback recorded video is viewed Playback video is started at the d
91. updates are automatically distributed to clients on the same network when the client applications are started Remote DX8100 servers can be updated from a local HVR using the DX8100 Software Upgrade utility To start the update process 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Software Upgrade EN File Edit View Export Favorite User Log in User Log out Password Recovery do Unplug Eject Hardware Multiple Configuration Upload Exit Figure 186 Software Upgrade Server Console 2 The Select Upgrade Package dialog box opens 3 Click Browse The Open dialog box opens 4 Select the update file 5 Click Open The Select Upgrade Package dialog box becomes active 6 Click Next The Select Server dialog box opens and displays a list of all connected DX8100s including the local HVR Updates to the local server and all connected remote servers can be initiated from this dialog box 7 To update a local or remote HVR server e Local server Select the site name of your system from the Select Server list Remote server Select the remote server from the Select Server list and then click Connect 8 Click Next and wait for the DX8100 Upgrade utility to copy the necessary files to the selected HVR 9 At the completion of the update process a dialog box will appear prompting you to update another server if desired e Click Yes to select another server to update e Click No to finish the update process and reboot
92. video 29 See pane panel NS or WINS services setting up 172 documentation printed 17 Dome communications ports settingup 180 ual display card 34 dwell time 26 DX8100 command descriptions 25 exiting application 25 overview of application window 22 DX8100 application logging into 18 DX8100 application window panels 30 panes 30 DX8100 settingup 114 dynamic IP address remote site 214 dynamic link library DLL files installing 200 dynamic link library DLL files updating 200 Oo a E e mail notification overview 248 sending to groups 249 sending to individuals 248 video loss event sending in response to 121 255 e mail server 238 emergency agent notification 121 accessing Emergency Agent Setup page 235 camera linking to client emergency agents 237 clients adding 236 changing emergency agent properties 236 deleting from notification list 237 Emergency Agent Client utility required 235 overview 235 port 170 server event transmission time setting 237 emergency e mail notification accessing Emergency E mail Notification page 238 alarm 238 alarm events sent in response to 242 e mail groups 238 e mail server configuring 239 enabling disabling 238 group adding 243 adding members 245 deleting 244 deleting members from group 246 modifying 244 modifying member attributes 247 overview 243 local area network LAN 238 motion events sent in response to 242 overview 238 setting up 238 testing configura
93. with a valid user name and password for that site To log in to a remote site 1 In the DX8100 main window select a remote DX8100 Series HVR site from the Site Tree 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt User Log in You can also log in to a remote site by right clicking its site name and then selecting User Log In from the shortcut menu 3 Enter a user name and password for the remote site C2630M C 7 09 19 LOGGING OUT OF A REMOTE SITE Logging out of the local or a remote HVR does not disconnect you from that system Logging out will return you to the Guest account To disconnect from a remote server refer to Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 19 You can only log out of one server at a time If you are logged into multiple servers you must log out of each server individually You can also log out of a local or remote HVR by right clicking its site name in the Site Tree and then selecting User Log out from the shortcut menu To log out of a local or remote HVR site e From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt User Log out Working with an External JBOD Device A WARNING The DX8100 includes the external JBOD drives as part of the Pelco database PDB If you manually back up video data to the JBOD device the backed up data will be overwritten For information about configuring and connecting an external JBOD device to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100 Installation manual VERIFYING AVAILABLE JBOD DRIVES 1
94. you want to disconnect Click OK The drive is disconnected and removed from the Export Video dialog box s Device area C2630M C 7 09 SELECTING A BACKUP MEDIA DEVICE You can back up video to a local or remote network device Depending on your system configuration backup devices may include an optical drive such as a CD R or DVD R an external drive or a network drive The DX8100 does not support exporting or backing up to CD RW and DVD RW disks but it does support exporting or backing up to CD R and DVD R disks To select the type of backup device you want to use 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Backup button amp The Backup schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens 4 Click the plus sign beside a backup device in the device list 5 Select the check box of the device you want to use 6 Make sure that the backup media selected is inserted in the drive and the drive is ready If your DX8100 is connected to a network that supports shared folders and drives you can map a network drive by right clicking the Network Drive icon in the device list To map a network drive select Add Network Drive from the shortcut menu and follow the on screen directions To remove a drive mapping right click the Network Drive icon and select Remove Network Drive VIEW
95. you want to keep the changes you made to options and parameters on the Camera page you must click Apply If you attempt to leave the Camera page the system will display a message box prompting you to apply not apply or cancel the changes To apply camera configuration options to all attached cameras 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Perform the camera configuration 3 In the Apply to All Cameras section select the check boxes for one or more of the settings you want to apply to all cameras Protocol Camera Security Picture Adjustment Motion Detection Audio Settings and Video Loss 4 Click Apply to All Cameras 5 Click Apply IP CAMERA SETUP This section describes how to configure IP cameras and is organized into the following sections e Configuring the DX8100 to Record IP Camera Video on page 123 e Disabling an IP Camera on page 130 e Deleting an IP Camera on page 131 e Restoring a Disabled Analog or IP Camera on page 131 For information about the supported IP cameras refer to the DX8100 Series HVR Version 2 0 Release Notes To access this document go to http www Pelco com and navigate to the Hybrid Video Recorders page 122 C2630M C 7 09 CONFIGURING THE DX8100 TO RECORD IP CAMERA VIDEO The DX8100 allows you to assign an IP camera to a designated channel Initially camera channels above the DX8100 standard analog channels are not displayed in the Si
96. 0 0 000 cece nent ett EATE 132 Linking Relay Outputs to Ext malEVentS cees wanes acetate ced Sao ta atte Miwcntaray bis te 134 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to External Events 20 0000 c cece ccc nett tenn ees 136 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to External Events 0 00 nee ene e beeen een eens 39 Schedule Separa o a ee dne ee cn etd td EAA E MAGE ro A Va O AS ty al 143 Accessing the Schedule id a dance A any eek Soe ta e ao 143 Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode 0 0 nent e tenet e ene e ee 145 Creating Yearly Recording Schedules stas ii Beasts astra be aides Vell eee dah beg eth vlad i ea as oe 147 Creating Monthly or Multiple Day Recording Schedules ooooooooooococococococooco eearri 149 Editing schedule skei wick ne ok st ads Seles A hg alll det Se e te loa Sukie Se bed a 152 Working with Custom Camera Settings ooooooooooooo ooo 154 Contiguring the Frame Rat ss CES wh ela advo 156 Setting Up Advanced Relay Output ooo 163 Setting Up Network Properties cc taa ds AA datos 168 Configuring the DX8100 for Network Access ooooooooocococor rr 168 Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle 00 0 nbn tenn eee 170 C2630M C 7 09 5 Working with MullICaS NO a a td e o le e a a 170 Accessing Network Informati n diia 71 Setting Up DNS WINS coran ra a a sal 172 Working with lime Synchronizationsscj 0 wack Jae mod seen A ee ee ae eo 172 Setting Up Port and Device Comm
97. 00 Series HVRs O System Click the System button to set up additional system options Ext Monitor Click the Ext Monitor button to configure an additional display monitor This button appears only if the optional display card has been installed Notification Click the Notification button to configure emergency agent and e mail notification options C2630M C 7 09 115 CAMERA SETUP Up to 32 video cameras can be connected to the unit Only an Administrator or Power User can configure cameras 116 This section describes how to setup the camera and includes the following topics Basic Camera Setup Motion Detection Setup on page 118 Audio Setup on page 119 Configuring Video Loss Detection on page 121 Applying Settings to All Cameras on page 122 P Camera Setup on page 122 BASIC CAMERA SETUP This section describes how to set up an analog camera For information about setting up an IP camera refer to P Camera Setup on page 122 To set up camera picture and PTZ options i Do one of the following e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page e If the Setup dialog box is already open click the Camera button Can The Camera page is displayed In the Camera Properties section do the following a b C Select a camera from the Selected Channel drop down box Alternately you can click a camera in the Site Tree to select it Verify t
98. 09 163 164 7 Click Exit i x Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay Oy fput Activation Period Camera01 Relay 01 y 3 Seconds y Camera02 Relay 03 Y 13 Seconds Camera03 No Link X D CameraD4 CameraQ5 No Link CameraQ6 No Link Y No Link Camera No Link Y No Link Camera08 No Link Y No Link To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt motion gt in the linking setup m Figure 136 Linking Relays to Motion Detection Table AL describes the available motion activated relay settings Table AL Motion Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when motion is detected Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment that motion is detected 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after motion has been detected C2630M C 7 09 Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output To configure an alarm relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Schedule button fi The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the Alarm tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an alarm a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select
99. 0M C 7 09 29 Displaying Playback Video in Full Screen View To display playback video in full screen view 1 Select the playback mode For information about working in the playback mode refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 68 2 Select a window division 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Full Screen button Playback video is displayed in full screen view To display the DX8100 main window from the full screen view e Right click in the DX8100 window Displaying Index Search Video in Full Screen View To display index search video in full screen view 1 Select the index search mode For information about working in the index search mode refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 68 2 Click the Reverse playback button J to begin viewing video 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Full Screen button E Index search video is displayed in full screen view To display the DX8100 main window from the full screen view e Right click in the DX8100 window SWITCHING BETWEEN STANDARD AND EXTENDED PANEL VIEWS The DX8100 features a viewing area that can be expanded to fill a larger portion of the main window Extended view expands the viewable panel containing camera panes but hides the timeline PTZ digital zoom and playback controls To use the timeline PTZ digital zoom and playback controls you must take the DX8100 out of extended view To switch back and forth between standard and extended view e From the DX8100 menu bar
100. 1 Modifying User Properties cz ooo a eee eee Pee aw A bo ene 212 Changing User Passwords csi cs a A babe ba ots ile Rance aaa 213 Changing a Users Group AMOO il A QA esac AE tagger 213 Weleting Existing USES ts a a A e A A as 213 SETMOMOGIA TIMCOUE ct dais lio ld tdo Ll ro padi dd as debo 213 Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User oooooccoccococcocco coco 214 MM A A A a 214 Addinga Mer A Da RAS 214 FindingActiveRemote Camera Sens teieni Mads att eta lali pala oe Be dp doe ico coi betta dial 217 Activating Remote Sites ao AA Mawes ta 217 Modifying a Remote Siten ad a a a dia aaa 218 System Un A A A A E A ASA ATA 218 Accessing the System Page NAS nNsa 219 Working with the Export Feature e 219 Working with thelmport Features ben tn cotton e dni 220 UsingsSystem LOGS ii E E watts dice Mia E ae Ad ead Mea EE OEE AE 222 Selecting the Language 0 0 6 E EE EEEE EEEE EEEE 224 Settingsthe System Times hesiekin pie A a A a o a a Ea R a EEA 224 selecting the Video FORMAL atras it a a E RATE nlp eA a ds 226 Working withiCtrl Alt Del FUNCTION 345 2 aaan a delice lla o PAs At al dd tala 226 setting Up Auto Reborn aa dadas 227 Specifying the Data Retention Time Limit sasse error ee See Wachee save dle gee Beenie oka ah th ees advo 227 Working with Online Helps cesses 2 tcan sities OE A Weeds Sua uaa ale A BE Eee ee eS 228 External Monitor Setup at ad cated Qo eee batt sash Wand acu Mea ek eke betes ali 228 Accessing the External
101. 108 MUX option is required The DX8124 model HVR has two capture cards installed an 8 channel and a 16 channel capture card In this case the DX8108 MUX and DX8116 MUX option are required e ifa 16 channel capture card is installed the DX8116 MUX option is required The DX8132 model HVR has two 16 channel capture cards installed In this case two DX8116 MUX options are required To view live video in the DX8100 main window e On the DX8100 toolbar click Live This section includes the following topics e Assigning and Removing Cameras from View Panes e Live View On Screen Display OSD on page 46 e Customizing the On Screen Display OSD on page 47 ASSIGNING AND REMOVING CAMERAS FROM VIEW PANES The DX8100 allows you to quickly move cameras to and remove cameras from a view pane To assign a camera to the view pane 1 Drag a camera from the Site Tree onto a view pane 2 Repeat the process in step 1 for up to 36 cameras and up to five different DX8100 sites To remove a camera from a view pane e Right click in the view pane and drag the camera to the Site Tree pane For information about the DX8100 view pane and panels refer to the following topics e Working with View Panes and Panels on page 30 e Configuring View Panels on page 31 e Navigating View Panels on page 31 42 C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP FAVORITES The DX8100 Favorites menu allows you to organize and save camera views For example you might want to display
102. 2 3 4 C2630M C 7 09 From the Site Tree drag the camera channel you want to search onto one of the view panels Click the view panel of the channel you want to search From the drop down box on the playback timeline select the day you want playback to begin Select the event type you want to view from the event type drop down box Only events recorded for the selected camera are listed in the index A sensor event is identical to an alarm event Options are as follows All None Motion Alarm in ATM POS Video Loss Select an event from the index Verify that the Select all check box is selected Deselecting the Select all check box will disable playback for all view panels except the channel being searched The DX8100 allows you to view playback on multiple cameras in addition to the camera being searched This feature is valuable if you want to examine a variety of views recorded at the time a certain event was detected 79 10 On the playback control click the Forward button Jr to begin viewing NM i 04 42 04 04 42 34 04 44 49 EEES netas Proc 100 01 02 03 04 05 05 07 08 09 10 11 121314151 171819212234 LILICACA pe ee ee a ee me AI TAT O li A Ree EA Figure 48 DX8100 HVR Index Search Screen THUMBNAIL VIDEO SEARCH Thumbnail search allows users to visually search video that has been recorded over a 24 hour period Video is presented as a series of thumbna
103. 2 00 000 ch02 082406_095100_ 5 5 DvD R AW 3 08 24 2006 08 39 00 000 08 24 2006 09 09 00 000 chO5 082406 083900 gg HA 4 0824 2006 09 51 00 000 08 24 2006 10 12 00 000 chO5 O82406_095100_ e RAS 08242006 101200000 08 24 2006 10 13 00 000 chO5 O82406_101200_ E 2 Remote drive NOT INSTALLED Removable drive 3 NOT INSTALLED Delete Item File name Apply a Export Format llamo CaASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF Refresh F Audio Record FF RealTime imageCount 1 interval Continuous z sebagi Disconnect NeDiv Enable deintesacing fiter Cancel Figure 64 Selecting the Export Device and Time Ranges INSERTING AND REMOVING A USB FLASH DRIVE 100 The DX8100 supports both USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 flash drives To ensure data is not lost or corrupted when exporting data to a USB flash drive follow the steps listed in Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 100 This section describes how to insert and remove a USB device and includes the following topics e nstalling a USB Flash Drive on page 100 e Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 100 INSTALLING A USB FLASH DRIVE This section describes how to install a USB flash drive To install a USB flash drive into the DX8100 1 Insert the USB drive into the USB 2 0 port on the HVR s front panel 2 Wait five seconds while the DX8100 recognizes and automatically installs the device REMOVING A USB FLASH DRIVE You
104. 200 ch01 101304_140000__101304_144106 ch01 101304_160000__101304_160500 Figure 69 Default File Names C2630M C 7 09 The default filename is constructed from the information displayed in the Start Day Start Time End Day and End Time columns To assign a custom file name for a time range 1 Verify that the check box of the row you want to rename is selected 2 Enter a file name for the file you want to export Export file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions 3 Click Apply The Apply button updates the Name field C2630M C 7 09 SS x r Device m Time Range 9 Optical disk drives gt StatDay StatTime EndDay End Time 9 CD R RW O1 10132004 08 00 00 1013 2004 08 02 00 ch01 101304_080000__101304 O TEAC CD W552E O2 10432004 1015 00 10413 2004 10 16 00 chotJt01304_101500_101304 9 DVD R RW O3 10432004 1300 00 10132004 13 0200 f chot 101304 130000101304 7 a oo O4 10 13 2004 14 00 00 10 13 2004 14 41 06 ch01 101304_140000_101304 T P Rene dne O5 10432004 16 00 00 1013 2004 16 05 00 chotJt01304_160000_101304 O g1510 0 1 145public users Ms 10132004 17 00 00 1013 2004 17 05 00 Security Lobby Removal drive Of File Name Security Lobby Apply 4 gt r Export Format J E avi C ASF Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF Refresh Create folder IV Audio Record Y Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y Map NetD
105. 2004 1015 00 1013 2004 10 16 00 East Entrance S DVD R RW O3 1043 2004 1300 00 10 13 2004 13 0200 West Entrance Not installed 1013 2004 14 00 00 1013 2004 14 41 08 Security Entrance E E Hard disk drives E 2 Remote drive G o g 10 0 1 14 public users B 63 Removal drive 0 I Delete Item File Name Security Entrance Apply D Export Format av C ASF C Native C BMP JPEG Cc TIF Refresh Greate folder IV Audio Record Y Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y Map NetDrv Disconnect NetDry MECE Export Cancel Figure 67 Exporting Selected Video C2630M C 7 09 103 104 CHANGING A BOOKMARKED TIME RANGE To change a bookmarked time range or create a new time range to be exported 1 Select the desired row in the Time Range table 2 Double click the Start Day field and then use the spinner buttons to set the start date for the export The start days and times cannot be set later than end days and times 3 Double click the Start Time field and then use the spinner buttons to set the start time for the export 4 Double click the End Day field and then use the spinner buttons to set the end date for the export 5 Double click the End Time field and then use the spinner buttons to set the end time for the export 6 Select the check box next to each time range you would like to export
106. 24 is not be deleted it is just not available for viewing lf the Administrator sets the retention time to unlimited or to a time later than the current retention time limit all video data if the retention time is set to Unlimited or data within the newly set retention time limit can be viewed To set the data retention time limit 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button C The System page is displayed 3 In the Data Retention Time Limit area select a retention time limit from the drop down list Data Retention Time Limit Time Limit day s Unlimited Figure 173 Data Retention Time Limit Entered Manually 4 Click Apply The Shut Down dialog box opens prompting you to restart the DX8100 5 Do one of the following e To restart the DX8100 to use the new settings click Yes The DX8100 restarts e To cancel the new settings click No The current time limit setting is restored and the system does not restart C2630M C 7 09 227 WORKING WITH ONLINE HELP The DX8100 server includes an online Help system By default the Help system is disabled and not available for viewing The Admin user has authority to configure the DX8100 to display or not display online Help When Help is enabled all user groups can open and view the Help system NOTE There is a security risk when Help is enabled A guest user can gain access to the
107. 29 O Camera30 O Camera31 Camera32 PELCO 49152 MPEG4 Primary soan e Figure 92 Manually Entering IP Camera Data e Automated assignment 1 Click Scan Available IP devices appear in the Scan table 2 Click a supported IP camera 3 Click the Add button gi The Connect dialog box opens 4 In the Connect drop down box click a camera 5 Click Apply The selected camera is assigned to the designated camera channel O Camera25 O Camera26 O Camera27 O Camera28 O Camera29 O Camera30 Camera31 O Camera32 PELCO 192 168 111 49152 MPEG4 Primary Show Setup Delete OK Cancel Scan Figure 93 Automated Assignment of an IP Camera 192 168 2 86 IXSODN PELCO C2630M C 7 09 125 4 Optional MPEG 4 is the default codec Double click the Codec drop down box to select a different compression 5 Double click the User box and enter the user name 6 Double click the Password box and enter the password 7 The DX8100 allows you to select the IP camera stream that the unit uses to record video e Stream 1 Primary is the default stream It supports a higher resolution and image rate e Stream 2 Stream 2 supports a lower resolution and image rate NOTE For information about supported resolution and image rates refer to DX8700 Series HVR Release Notes To access this document go to http www Pelco com and navigate to the Hybrid Video Recorders page Double click the Stream drop down box to select the
108. 4 343 e A Lon BA A cs anng car aise Pu E Figure 59 Thumbnail Images Marking Pixel Changes 2 To locate playback at the start of the first image click Reverse playback button INCA The video scene is played back and displayed in reverse 3 Click the Pause button u to pause the video playback when the beginning of the first recorded is reached 4 Click the Forward button gt Playback starts and the video scene is displayed 5 Click the Clear button to remove the thumbnail results C2630M C 7 09 95 WORKING WITH SPECIAL VIEW AND SEARCH METHODS 96 The DX8100 allows you to do the following e View video in the deinterlaced mode e View live and playback video simultaneously e View search export and print backed up video You must use the DX8100 Client application to view search export and print backed up video For more information refer to the DX8100 Client Application manual This section describes how to use special view and search methods and includes the following topics e Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode e Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously VIEWING VIDEO IN THE DEINTERLACED MODE Images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second might move or tear In this case you can use the View menu s Deinterlaced Image option to enhance the displayed image In the deinterlaced mode the DX8100 converts the recorded image and displays it at 2CIF resolution The proces
109. 44 yearly recording schedule creating 147 screen resolution 26 search mode 29 sharing of time range search 78 sensitivity motion 118 server sites connecting to DX8100 server sites 214 server e mail 238 Setup dialog box 114 259 setup mode accessing 114 alarm properties setting up 133 See also alarm inputs camera setup 116 154 See also camera commands listing of 115 Backup Camera Ext Monitor Linking Network Notification Schedule Site System User data backup 201 Ext monitor setup 228 how to open Setup dialog box 29 motion sensitivity setting 118 multiple cameras alarm events linking cameras to record 137 ATM POS events linking cameras to record 137 motion events linking cameras to record 136 video loss events linking cameras to record 138 network properties accessing DX8100 network configuration details 171 base port setting up 170 DHCP setting up 169 DNS or WINS services setting up 172 overview 168 port and device communications properties 177 site name assigning 168 TCP IP and bandwidth throttle setting up 170 network setup static IP address entering 170 overview 114 PTZ presets and patterns alarm events linking to 140 ATM POS events linkingto 141 linking to external events 139 motion events linking to 139 PTZ test 117 video loss events linking to 142 relay output advanced alarm activated configuring 165 advanced ATM POS activated configuring 166 advanced motion activated configuring 1
110. 50 system administrator obtaining user account 18 system configuration language 16 language setting 15 printer adding 15 time setting 15 system ID 168 C2630M C 7 09 system setup accessing the System page 219 Ctrl Alt Del key enabling 226 using 226 Edit menu exporting from 220 importing from 221 export feature 219 HVR settings exporting 219 importing 220 import feature 220 anguage 224 selecting 224 supported languages 224 og files exporting 224 overview 222 viewing a log file 222 overview 218 system time standard and daylight saving time 225 video format selecting 226 system time 15 T TCP IP ports default 170 hird party domes 50 180 protocols supported 53 55 58 116 itle bar 24 oolbar 24 28 our preset 53 62 ransaction format 188 parameters 188 ransaction filter predefined 84 89 191 U upgrade policy hardware 15 software 15 user security level 208 accessing user setup page 208 Administrator 16 114 210 dwell time changing 33 DX8100 accessing 114 Guest user account 18 pan tilt and zoom control operating 50 Power User 16 47 114 210 Restricted User 26 33 209 210 Standard User account 24 26 210 user access levels 210 user accounts adding new users 211 existing users deleting 213 C2630M C 7 09 log in timeout setting 213 modifying 212 password changing 213 user s group affiliation changing 213 user accounts default 209 user name and passw
111. 6 fo Lelee et JcJ cz ca Jl 2 0 c2 csc Lez csc ew cz ATM POS Address atmos z ATM POS Name pmo r Enable Record Live on Source ATM POS Event ca C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 cis C16 c25 cas c27 c28 c29 cao car c32 le e e17 cre cre czo c21 coz cza r Video Lass Record Link Settings Video Loss Channel cAMeRact Camera Name Camera 1 r Enable Record on Source Video Loss Event Per Lelle Le Jes Jes Jer Jee J eee Ler ee Lea Lee es Las e Lere c18 c20 cer e22 c2s 1 c2s cos cas cor coo ces cso Lcs sz Cancel Apply Figure 150 Event Recording Link Settings Page 11 In the ATM POS Record Link Settings section do the following a Inthe ATM POS Address drop down box select an ATM POS address Each ATM POS address corresponds to a unique Regcom box device ID Each device ID must be assigned to a specific HVR camera channel b In the Enable Record Live on Source ATM POS Event section click a camera to link the camera to the ATM POS address c Click Apply 12 Click the Schedule button C The Schedule setup page is displayed C2630M C 7 09 185 186 13 Create an ATM POS schedule for the camera you linked to the ATM POS address
112. 63 advanced video loss activated configuring 167 alarm event external linking to 135 ATM POS event external linking to 135 motion event external linking to 134 See also relays video loss event external linking to 136 relay properties setting up 133 See also relays schedule setup frame rate basic configuring 157 frame rate configuring 156 record mode 143 145 system setup 218 260 user access 208 setup pages Backup page 201 Camera page 115 Ext Monitor page 228 Linking page 132 Network page default Network page 168 DNS WINS page 172 Schedule page 143 Site page 214 System page 218 User page 208 shortcut keys PC keyboard 52 Home and End Insert and Delete Left and Right Arrow Page Up and Page Down Plus and Minus Up and Down arrow using to operate PTZ and lens functions 51 52 shortcut menus local site shortcut menu 38 relay shortcut menu 38 remote site shortcut menu 38 site designator 46 sitename 168 site tree all cameras assigning from 39 how organized 24 local expanding and collapsing 38 overview 37 remote expanding and collapsing 38 single camera assigning from 39 software DX8100 HVR server using 15 upgrading 15 software upgrade port 170 standard audio inputs 119 standard view mode 51 static IP address adding remote site with static IP address 214 assigning 169 170 remote site 214 status bar 24 stop bits 180 181 synchronization loss of 121 system administration 2
113. 701 Camera 29 Sarix IXSO Camera 30 lt IP110 Camera 31 Camera Properties e Spectrad 1P Camera 32 Selected Channel CameraZ6 Disable 5 Alarm ATM POS Camera Name Spectra41P Cameras oo Figure 103 IP Camera in Site Tree and Status Disabled 2 Inthe Camera page click Cancel The IP camera status changes to Network Camera in the extended Selected Channel drop down box The IP camera is not deleted from the IP Camera Properties dialog box Restoring a Disabled Analog or IP Camera A disabled analog or IP camera can be restored For information about configuring an IP camera refer to Assigning an IP Camera to a Camera Channel on page 124 NOTE An IP camera that was deleted in the IP Camera Properties dialog box cannot be restored a deleted IP camera must be reconfigured C2630M C 7 09 131 Analog Camera 1 From the Selected Channel drop down box select an analog camera The camera name is displayed in the Camera Name box 2 From the extended Selected Channel drop down box select Local Camera 3 Click Apply The camera name is displayed in the Site Tree and video is displayed in the Camera page preview window IP Camera NOTE An IP camera must be configured and assigned to a camera channel in the IP Camera Properties dialog box before it can be assigned as a network camera 1 From the Selected Channel drop down box select an IP camera The camera name is displayed in the Camera Name box 2 From the extend
114. 8100 Log View Windows OS Log View System On Off Success System Failure Error Export Warning Backup Information Network Connection Audit_Sucess Login ID List with Time Audit_Failure Video Loss Audit_Failure Viewing a Log File To view a log file 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 0 The System page is displayed 3 In the Log Information section select a log file from the Choose drop down box 4 Do one of the following a To view DX8100 logs click View The Log View dialog box opens Figure 170 shows the Log View dialog box Penod Stat Date End Date Ch Figure 170 Log View Dialog Box or b To view OS log information do the following 222 C2630M C 7 09 1 Click OS Log View The Window Log Viewer opens 2 Click a button to select a category Window Log Viewer xj 08 01 2005 08 01 2005 07 27 2005 07 27 2005 07 25 2005 07 22 2005 07 22 2005 07 21 2005 07 18 2005 07 14 2005 07 14 2005 07 13 2005 07 11 2005 07 11 2005 07 11 2005 07 11 2005 07 06 2005 07 06 2005 07 01 2005 NA 28 2NN5 Figure 171 Window Log Viewer Dialog Box 5 Do one of the following C2630M C 7 09 Click OK to close the log dialog box Click Clear to erase the log C Success E Error C Warning C Information Audit_Success C Audit Failure 223 Exporting Log Information
115. ATE Date field TIME Time field TEXT Ten selected another field appears to let you enter a text string up to 20 characters that defines the start of the transaction C2630M C 7 09 Using Custom Device Filters The DX8100 allows you to use a custom device filter to remove unwanted characters from the data input port These characters may be printer commands or some other type of device control overhead Each entered line of text in the Custom Device Filter table defines a separate character filter A filter can be a combination of exact characters to match character ranges to match and character counts Incoming characters matching any of the character filters will be discarded Use the Control Code drop down box Special Character drop down box and Range box to create the desired filter Then click the Add button to transfer the created filter to the Custom Device Filter table Creating a New Data Format Create the data format based on information contained in the ATM POS transaction For example a sales receipt provides detailed transaction information The data format values determine how data from ATM or POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transaction Every field format must match that of the ATM or POS device especially the month format To create a data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Dev
116. ATM P0S12 12 None None O13 ATM POS13 13 None None O14 ATM POS14 14 None None O15 ATM POS15 15 None None O16 ATM POS16 16 None None WARNING If a device is set to the single mode only one device can be assigned to the connection port Figure 153 Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data The DX8100 allows you to configure unique exceptions for each ATM POS device from the following ATM POS device selection drop down box Use the Advanced tab to configure exceptions Entries are case sensitive For each defined data device ATM device or POS terminal you can Exception table that contains the name and effect of each exception you create Action code drop down box that contains exception action codes User mapping table where you create the string for the action code specify up to 31 data exceptions A field left blank is not used in the exception Any fields containing values must all be found or satisfied before a data device exception is generated Each data device can trigger the DX8100 to record at special rates and for a special length of time as determined in the Record On Data Exceptions screen This section describes how to work with exceptions and
117. Allows you to configure a user to log on to the DX8100 automatically BUILT IN USER ACCOUNTS There are two built in user accounts that come pre configured with the DX8100 which cannot be deleted or changed e Guest The Guest acco unt provides limited access to the system The Guest user can view live video but cannot play back recorded video or access system configuration functions The Guest account automatically becomes active when the system is first started and each time a user logs out The Guest user is not a member of any group however a Guest retains all of the rights and privileges of the Restricted Users group including the abi lity to view low security cameras If you do not want video from a low security level camera to be viewed by the Guest user set the security level for that camera to medium or higher e Admin The Admin acc settings add and modi cannot be removed C2630M C 7 09 ount has full access to the system The Admin user can view live and playback video access all configuration y users and can perform searches and backups The Admin user is a member of the Administrators group and 209 DEFINITION OF USER ACCESS LEVELS There are four predefined user access levels or groups User access levels range from the Administrator group to the Restricted group By default the system starts up with a default Guest account The Admin user can assign automatic login for a specified user For informat
118. C 7 09 Working with Special View and Search Methods oooooooocococooo oo 96 Viewing Video In the Deinterlaced Mode 00000 a eset eae eee 96 Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously 20 0 0 annann nananana EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 96 Exporting WIGGOlz sense ens oie ti eet eet Mutt A es nk RE TA a oo eh SCD Pein aside See eed aap 97 Exporting Bookmarked Video REGIONS E sc fe A Alden wet ba Ret Ede Merde bane har RS 97 Creating BOOKMARKS mess ana seria a ade iso asian RR Ite Sep eae dee aca 97 Clearing Bookmarks cda o all ee ee A SN le des tdo dies lala 98 Bookmarking and Exporting Multiple Channels 2 20 00 00 rr 99 Inserting and Removing a USB Flash Drive 2 0 00 ooo 100 Installing a USB Flash Drive neres ei cann na a e a a a eal E a AE PER E sa E PERLE 100 Rem ving a USB Flash Drive ese hirietan ei shad deo area dds dad Gals lin e c a dada 100 Enabling the Deinterlacing MA oa PAE KLA 101 Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive o ooooooooooooo o 101 Mapping a Network Drive s lt 2 3 le de temtaenesues EEA AN S EE E y E OE eee ee 101 Disconnecting aNetwork DIVE acc nara tl le RAN 102 Performing thetEXpont A E a Sd 102 Starting Export Procesal A A A A as 102 Changing a Bookmarked Time Rangt eo koi cial tt ra e ds ld eed tl td abla 04 Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name 2 2 0 0 enn cnn tenn tence eee 104 selecting the Export Format A eae oat oe ce ideo ea ate ap 106
119. Camera Properties section a Select an IP camera from the Selected Channel drop down box b Verify that the IP cameras is set to Network Camera in the related Selected Channel drop down box c Optional To disable an IP camera refer to Disabling an IP Camera on page 130 To disable an IP camera refer to Disabling an IP Camera on page 130 d Enter an optional new name in the Camera Name box Camera names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters The Camera Name box cannot be left blank or have any spaces If a valid name is not entered in the Camera Name box when you click Apply the previous name is displayed e Select the appropriate PTZ protocol setting Select No PTZ if the selected IP camera does not support PTZ select Network Camera PTZ if the IP camera supports PTZ 3 Select an appropriate timeout value 4 Adjust picture properties by moving the sliders for Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation As you adjust the picture properties of a camera on the local HVR changes are reflected immediately in the viewing area near the top of the screen Changes made to cameras at a remote site do not appear in the viewing area until you click Apply 5 Click Default to return all picture property settings to the normal state 6 Click Apply The IP camera is added to the Site Tree C2630M C 7 09 127 7 Verify that the IP camera resolution is displayed in the Site Tree and Channel Inform
120. Custom Mode In the drop down box select a profile that is different from the one you want to delete This step is necessary because you cannot delete a schedule profile that is currently active Click Apply In the drop down box select the profile you want to delete Click Delete 153 154 9 Click Apply Q Month View Year View l D days Back July 2005 Next 1 2 fells New Save Delete ME Apply Orce Per Month Ghee Per Year Start oz 2005 End oz 2005 El ELE IZ Finish on End Date Figure 127 Month View Page WORKING WITH CUSTOM CAMERA SETTINGS This section describes how to configure customized camera settings and includes the following topics Configuring Custom Camera Settings Examples of Custom Camera Settings on page 155 Configuring Custom Camera Settings Each camera can be configured with custom recording settings To customize camera settings for normal motion alarm or ATM POS recording 1 2 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button The Schedule page is displayed Click the plus sign next to a camera in the Site Tree Select a recording mode from one of the following options e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens
121. D300A Communication Settings This section describes how to configure the KBD300A communication settings The KBD300A is interfaced to the DX8100 using Port 1 to Port 4 These ports support connectivity to the DX8100 using the RS 422 data communication standard A user supplied RJ 45 cable is required For information about using the KBD300A refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 66 To configure the KBD300A communication settings 1 Connect the KBD300A to the DX8100 to a RS 422 RJ 45 port 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Network button The Network page is displayed 3 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 4 In the Communication Port drop down box select the Port to which the KBD300A is connected 5 In the device drop down box select KBD300A Pelco 6 Configure the following port settings e Interface mode RS 422 e Baud rate 9600 e Parity ODD e Data bits 8 e Stop bits 1 7 Click Apply KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features Table AY describes the KBD300A Standard Mode operational features Table AY KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features Control Action Joystick Controls the camera s PTZ operation Number PRESET short Moves camera to the programmed preset position Number PRESET long Programs the current camera position to the de
122. DNS WINS info from DHCP check box e Ifyou are using static IP addressing provide the following information in the appropriate fields This information can be obtained from your network administrator 1 Primary DNS server IP address 2 Secondary DNS server IP address 3 Primary WINS server IP address 4 Secondary WINS server IP address 3 Click Apply to update the configuration WORKING WITH TIME SYNCHRONIZATION The DX8100 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP which allows the DX8100 to access Network Time Protocol NTP servers to synchronize DX8100 clocks The DX8100 allows you to manually or automatically synchronize its time to an NTP time server Additionally the DX8100 server can provide time synchronization for the other DX8100 network There can be only one NTP time server in the DX8100 network This section describes how to synchronize the DX8100 clock and is organized into the following topics e Adding an NTP Time Server on page 173 e Editing an NTP Time Server on page 174 e Deleting an NTP Server on page 175 e Comparing the DX8100 and NTP Server Time on page 175 e Manually Synchronizing the DX8100 Time on page 175 e Setting Up Automatic Time Synchronization on page 176 e Enabling Database Overwrite on page 176 C2630M C 7 09 Adding an NTP Time Server To add an NTP time server 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the S
123. Daylight Saving Time The DX8100 ensures that no data is lost when the system clock is changed to reflect Daylight Saving Time or Standard Time The DX8100 follows the Windows operating system clock changes and is configured by default to automatically recognize Daylight Saving and Standard Time changes When the DX8100 encounters a time change it will record data for the transition time period twice For example when the system clock is set back one hour from 2 00 AM to 1 00 AM there will appear two periods on the playback time line that represent the transition hour C2630M C 7 09 225 SELECTING THE VIDEO FORMAT To select the appropriate video signal format for your location 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 9 The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Video Format section click NTSC or PAL to select the format 4 Click Apply WORKING WITH CTRL ALT DEL FUNCTION This section describes how to use the DX8100 Ctrl Alt Del key combination and includes the following topics e Enabling Ctrl Alt Del e Using Ctrl Alt Del Enabling Ctrl Alt Del Enabling the Ctrl Alt Del key combination allows you to open the Windows Task Manager dialog box to perform system administration tasks To complete the procedure you must be logged on to the DX8100 as an administrator or power user The DX8100 keyboard is remapped To see which keys replace the Ctrl and Alt key
124. ETUP 214 This section describes how to connect to a remote site and includes the following topics e Adding a Remote Site e Finding Active Remote Cameras on page 217 e Activating Remote Sites on page 217 e Editing a Remote Site on page 218 e Deleting a Remote Site on page 218 ADDING A REMOTE SITE Up to 100 remote DX8100 HVR server sites can be added to the local server s site list Up to four remote HVR sites can be accessed from a single DX8100 a total of five sites including the local HVR can be active on a single network segment Up to 16 cameras can be viewed from and managed for each remote site of which 32 cameras can be simultaneously assigned to view panels Once a site has been added to the site list it can be managed and viewed just as the local HVR NOTE Only those with Power User or greater permissions can configure the access rights of remote HVRs Once a remote site has been added all viewing searching and setup functions of that site can be accessed from the local DX8100 To access the features of a remote site users must possess a valid user account with the appropriate access rights for that site This section describes how to add a site with a static IP or dynamic IP address and includes the following topics e Adding a Site with a Static IP Address e Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address on page 216 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address To add a remote HVR site when the IP address is known 1 On t
125. Extended View This section describes how to program activate and clear patterns and access the programming features of remote cameras This section includes the following topics e Programming a Pattern e Activating a Pattern on page 57 e Clearing a Pattern on page 57 e Accessing Programming Features of Remote Cameras on page 58 C2630M C 7 09 55 56 PROGRAMMING A PATTERN This section describes how to program a pattern Certain PTZ devices such as Pelco s Spectra series domes will display an on screen message stating the amount of remaining memory available for pattern programming Start Programming a Pattern To program a pattern 1 On the PTZ keypad toolbar click the Live button EN 2 Drag a camera from the Site Tree onto a view panel 3 On the PTZ keypad click the Set button to enter programming mode 4 Using the PTZ keypad select a number for the pattern 1 4 5 Click the Pattern button Pattern i 6 Move the camera through a series of movements using the on screen PTZ and focus controls Figure 26 Programming a Pattern Stop Programming a Pattern To stop programming a pattern 1 On the PTZ keypad click the Pattern button Pattern i Se 2 Click the Set button El C2630M C 7 09 ACTIVATING A PATTERN When activated a pattern will repeat indefinitely until it is cleared another pattern is set or the on screen PTZ control is moved To activate a pattern 1 On the PTZ k
126. Folder amp File Note Figure 13 Organize Favorites Dialog Box and List of Favorites Folders 3 Inthe favorites area click a favorite 4 Click Move to Folder The Move to Folder dialog box opens Move to Folder B ve Favorites Building 6 Camera Views Building 6 Camera Views Figure 14 Move to Folders Dialog Box 5 Select a destination folder 6 Click OK The favorite is moved under the destination folder C2630M C 7 09 45 LIVE VIEW ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD The DX8100 s OSD consists of camera and site information that is superimposed on each view pane Each display item in the OSD can be customized for both live and playback viewing Figure 15 shows the parts of the Live View OSD pane Figure 15 Live View OSD Pane Table N describes the parts of the Live View OSD pane Table N Parts of the Live View OSD Pane Item Part Description 1 PTZ Indicates that the PTZ control is enabled 2 G Indicates that audio recording is enabled The DX81 00 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio may not be of the same quality as live audio O REC Indicates camera recording mode and status A blinking REC indicator signifies event recording e Green indicates normal recording e Blue indicates motion recording e Red indicates alarm recording Yellow indicates ATM POS recording Purple indicates video loss recording Black on white background
127. Format on page 189 e Deleting a Data Format on page 190 C2630M C 7 09 Understanding the Data Format Page The DX8100 allows you to create a device data format for each ATM POS device You can assign a unique name to each device data format template Figure 152 shows the parts of the Data Format page Access the Data Format page from the Port Device page For information about accessing the Data Format page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 For information about the Port Device tab refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 177 Control Character NUL D Control Character LF 10 Control Character CR 13 Figure 152 Data Format Page C2630M C 7 09 187 Table AU describes the parts of the Data Format page Table AU Parts ofthe Data Format Page Item Command Description O Data Format Name Box where a specific name for the data format template is created 2 Transaction Format Includes the following options e Transaction Number Allows a transaction symbol to be entered e Transaction Start Selects the control character for indicating the start of a transmission e Transaction End Selects the control character for indicating the end of a transmission e The end of text string Decimal Specifies the type of control character that marks the end of a transaction line Decimal 13 represents the ASCII CR control character e User
128. ING BACKED UP VIDEO You must use the DX8100 Client application to view backed up video For more information about viewing backed up video refer to the section titled Viewing and Searching Backed Up Video in the Client online Help or Client Applications manual C2630M C 7 09 207 USER SETUP The User page allows an Administrator Admin to add delete and change the properties of users Admin has full permission to configure all of the DX8100 features and it is the only user level that can change permissions for all lower level users Users are subdivided into groups and each group is granted a particular level of access A lower level user cannot have a larger set of permission than a higher level user This section describes how to configure users and includes the following topics e Accessing the User Page e Built in User Accounts on page 209 e Definition of User Access Levels on page 210 e Definition of Camera Security Access on page 210 e Adding New Users on page 211 e Modifying User Properties on page 212 e Changing User Passwords on page 213 e Changing a Users Group Affiliation on page 213 e Deleting Existing Users on page 213 e Setting Login Timeout on page 213 e Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User on page 214 ACCESSING THE USER PAGE To access the User page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar ick the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the User button The User page is displaye
129. M C 7 09 Setting a starting Bookmark o a a ed 98 REMOVIDOS aos 98 Book Marking Multiple Time REGION sensat gnre diaraair A e ei atte 99 Selecting lime Range tor DUPlICAI xi A A a A 99 selecting the Export Device andilime Ranges it a a taa Daria 100 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter from the Export Video Dialog Box 2 0 6 ccc nent tenet enn e ene 101 Export Video Dialog BO a vat data miei Gt Ne oe Nits a Mi ma eee eae ae cee tee 20h eds 102 Exporting selected Vidor ci A a a A ead A Seer tise ahead 103 EX OM PIMC AIG Oeste cacashe sags tansy a ln tees sudan tana een spat a he iad Dae Pease RS leet cates cl 104 Default FileName Stan ira Aaa p oid bos oll ea oe da See nde dlls baila 104 Renaming Export Time Ranges 0 oaaae aE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE deed tedden ees 105 Sul Mage Export Formals sneen a ballin gabe tases A obec uals tee psy 107 Real Time Versus Non Real Time Export 108 Accessing Log Commands from the Application Window 2 2 0 0 0c ence tenes 110 log View Dialog BOX C2630 MB sss A eel wok Peed ee PRS eared La 110 Period start and End Dats ranie ian enaa LA Seal nie Be A oo aa Mins MAREE eo By 110 UserID log EVENTS cio Axe et beer ha deer oar de A AS a abe 111 System On Off Log torio nocilla seein te thlaeati ds aabhitemenhiwed dies aia 111 System Health Views SUDMENU s 00e sete ke A A da Rela GA ols a ee 112 System Health Dialog BOX 112 System Health linia ata ta
130. Month View Year View at days Back January 2008 Next ajajaj Bee New Save Delete Apply Once Per Month Once Per Year Start Joi 2008 End Joi 2008 W Finish on End Date Eb Eb Record Mode JE Normal JE Motion JE Alam IV atmvpos Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 151 Schedule Setup Page For information about verifying that the ATM POS configuration is set up correctly refer to Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 196 Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format The DX8100 allows you to create a data format for each ATM POS device You can assign a unique name to each data format The data format values determine how data from ATM or POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transaction Every field format must match that of the ATM or POS device especially the month format Access the Network page to configure the data format For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 For information about the Port Device tab refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 177 This section describes how to create a data format template and includes the following topics e Understanding the Data Format Page e Creating a New Data Format on page 189 e Editing a Data
131. NTP server URL or IP address Accept the default NPT server port number or enter a port number 5 Click OK The DX8100 attempts to locate the NTP server If successful the NTP server is added to the NTP Server List The DX8100 displays th e message NTP server not found if the server cannot be located Editing an NTP Time Server To edit an NTP time server 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Network button E The Network page is displayed 3 Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In Cl n Cl M Local Time Aug 23 2006 12 54 59 Update Time zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US Canada Tijuana NTP Server 0 pool ntp ora 81 91 70 122 y Add Edit Delete Difference Check the difference Synchronize Clock immediately I Auto start Z Synchronize when system starts I Synchronize time in intervals h m E 4 2 3 F DB Overwrite M Enable NTP Service Last attempt status Auto synchronized 12 24 29 PM 08 23 2006 Figure 143 Editing an NTP Time Server the NTP Server drop down box select an NTP server ick Add Edit Delete The NTP Server List dialog box opens the Server List select a server ick Edit The Add Edit NTP Server dialog box opens ake the desired change ick OK ick Apply C2630M C 7 09 Deleting an NTP Server To delete an NTP time server 1
132. OPERATION CONFIGURATION by Schneider Electric DX81 00 Series Hybrid Video Recorder Server Application Software C2630M C 7 09 Contents Server Operation Configuration Welcome tothe DX8100 Series VR a a iaa de 13 DX8100 Client Emergency Agent 13 DX8100 Vie Wer ers aiit i cid id cl dado al liado ida 13 DX8100 Mobile Client A A aaa 13 DXB100WebiClldt cas A dida 14 DX8100 Features can A anagnd web niu A A A ees 14 Getting Started with DAB 100 AVE SOW Are ad es 15 Upgrade Poly stas pri are az 15 Software US cosa a a ed e ia di 15 Hardware Upgrades ooo 16 Starting and Shutting Down the DX8100 ooo 16 Starting the DCI A ca E e Pi Ad 16 shutting Down the DXBIDO sei tessa ti di di taa tia aude bs 16 DX8100 DOCUMENTATION a 17 Logging Into the DX8100 Application sica a eedend ates shodedewsd eRe aes eb ade oes 18 Local DXBTOOLOJIN aser age er Pn eee 18 OJO O aL O ii A a da 18 Logging Out of the Local DX8100 ooo 18 Exiting to the Windows Operating System 2 0 2 cor 19 Remote DX8100 LOGIN cia a a a a 19 Connecting to Remote Site its a cd ii quite ails a dd E E daci n 19 Disconnecting from a Remote Site 2 ened bbb tence ees 19 logging IN toa Remot Site a dto dicte aa odds didas 19 Logging Out f a Remote Site o A a boa aides es 20 Working with an External JBOD Device 20 Verifying Available JBOD Drives ooo 20 Working witht Dual MONTOS ecos Jat Serene er ele A Si denen 21 Installing the Dia
133. OX ronisin A dd aa BG 73 Playback Digital Zoom Cin ais al E a EA ne leanne db bind 74 ZOOM In Using MOUSE 4 cda aa oaa i Id ade SARS d a al nido Moda le lolas 15 Zoom OutUsing MOUS A A AA A a Rates 75 Panining Zoomed Video with the MOUSE t sis tsi Aaa eos celts eee Lace ae des tees be A do ta haat eh wey pe 76 DX8100 HVR S arch Mode WINdOW sumi it A ae da He E re cette 77 DX81O0 HVA Index Search Screens 23 2 ei ta ti Mie A aia Ie dit 80 DX8100 AVR Thumbhall Search A a ao E LAA 81 POS SEC IM ean ea o Ahn 8 Solna SER a WAR AAS A Ee rE oa lila A eo AN A MARE aaa 83 POS Transaction searchby Device Names oia e E acca tan emate EE Maen AGA 86 Display a POS Transaction Search by Device Name 87 Searching an POS Event by Transaction Number 88 Searching for Transaction with Exception Only Events 2 20 00 00 rr 89 Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exception Filters 2 2 annuun nnee EEEa EEEE EEEE E EEEE 90 Transactions that Contain a Unique Line led ooo 91 Searching Transactions byAction Code s sss otc oA odes yeah eet eae ees e Oley Mea aides Wahid a a ah ees os 92 Pixel Search cies nd causo a Cae 94 Thumbnail Images Marking Pixel Changes 95 C2630M C 7 09 A A A A A a S a 00000000O0DOO 0O O COCO O COCO COCO 00 00 00 OO 09 00 DA 00 09 Y A Y Y A Y AU A A A OO O OOOO O ODO OOO OOO Y 50dymR ON HK TDAANANDOBP WN gt TDA ANANDAOAFPWNHH TDAANDOFP WN gt TAO ANANFPWN gt O sa NN O WOON OO PWN C2630
134. On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 In the Alarm Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an Alarm channel from the Alarm Channel drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording when the source alarm is triggered 5 Click Apply Alarm Record Link Settings Alarm Channel ALARMI Alarm Name Alarmo1 Enable Record on Source Alarm Event Q Fe eco cs e e Lee eneee acc cece cc ee csc co on el Figure 111 Event Recording Link Settings Alarm Record Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to an ATM POS event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 In the ATM POS Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS address drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording in response to an ATM POS event C2630M C 7 09 137 138 5 Click Apply ATM POS Record Link Settings ATM POS Address ATM POSO1 gt ATM POS Name ATM POSO1 O ee ac fe co
135. PTIONS The DX8100 allows you to search for transactions that meet conditions defined by one or more exceptions In this case you must configure your search criteria based on the following e Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data e Date time The date and time window within which the transactions were recorded To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data To search for only POS events by transaction with exception 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button a 2 On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed POS Search 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following e In the DX8100 Site Tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name box In this case the Device Name box is deselected e Inthe Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name When the Device Name box is enabled type the ATM POS device name in the box 4 Set the date and time range for the search 5 Inthe Data Information section click the check box to select
136. Resolution System Failure Cycle Views Setup gt Export Extended View Backup Index View Network Connection System Health View gt Login ID list with time Video Loss Display deinterlaced image Figure 73 Accessing Log Commands from the Application Window 2 From the submenu click a command The Log View dialog box opens If there are no log events for the specific log command you selected the Log View message box is displayed Penrod Stat Date Ce ae End Dale 01 31 2008 A There are no entire EX q E Figure 74 Log View Dialog Box_C2630MB 3 Click OK 4 Inthe Period section do the following a Click the Start Date drop down arrow and then select a start date b Click the End Date drop down arrow and then select an end date Period Start Date 01 31 2008 y End Date XJ January 2008 5 Sun Mon TuewedThu Fri Sat 123405 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 27 28 29 30 31 C User Goto today Figure 75 Period Start and End Dates 110 C2630M C 7 09 5 Do one of the following e Search by user ID Click User and type the user s login ID in the text entry box e Search by system state Click System State and then click the drop down arrow to select a log 6 Click Start Update If the system logged events for search criteria those events are displayed in the Log View window Figure 76 shows all the events that occurred for user ID Admin User Change 01
137. S device to a COM port and set up COM port properties For information refer to Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 179 b Select the ATM POS device mode For information refer to Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options on page 181 c Create a data format for the ATM POS device For information refer to Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 186 d Assign the data format to the ATM POS device For information refer to Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 190 e Set up ATM POS exceptions For information refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 f Assign the exception to the ATM POS device For information refer to Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device on page 196 g Verify the ATM POS communication connection For information refer to Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 196 C2630M C 7 09 197 198 2 Setup a camera to record the ATM POS events a Setup the designated ATM b Configure the ATM POS lin POS camera for scheduled ATM POS recording settings c Configure the ATM POS record link settings d Optional Configure the ATM POS PTZ link settings 3 In the DX8100 application window do the following a Assign a camera to a view pane b Assign the ATM POS device to the camera designated to record ATM POS events 4 Verify the following a The POS record indicator is yellow and flashing b The ATM POS recor
138. Search button i 3 Select a camera from the Site Tree 4 From the drop down box select the date on which you want to begin your search 5 Select the start and end times to define your search range 6 Using your mouse highlight the areas on the grid that you want to search for pixel changes e Hold down the eft mouse button and drag to select areas e Hold down the right mouse button and drag to clear areas 7 Adjust the pixel sensitivity threshold Moving the slider to the left decreases sensitivity and moving it to the right increases sensitivity 8 Click Start Wait for the progress line on the status bar to return to Ready C2630M C 7 09 93 94 9 Use the icon to show and hide the pixel grid for a clearer view in the search screen Figure 58 Pixel Search Screen C2630M C 7 09 VIEWING A VIDEO THUMBNAIL After the search has been completed a series of thumbnails appear on the screen below the search grid Each thumbnail contains the first image of recorded video for the listed time period e Double clicking a thumbnail will cause it to begin playing e Click the Prev button and the Next button Next to move backward and forward through thumbnails To view a video thumbnail 1 Click a thumbnail The thumbnail s search parameters date and time are displayed below the search grid The thumbnail s search start time is a few seconds ahead of the search start time you entered 08 13 2006 04 42 3
139. Setting Up COM1 Port Properties This section describes how to set up DX8100 network communication and includes the following topics e Configuring the DX8100 for Network Access on page 168 e Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle on page 170 e Working with Multicasting on page 170 e Accessing Network Information on page 171 e Setting Up DNS WINS on page 172 CONFIGURING THE DX8100 FOR NETWORK ACCESS Using the TCP IP protocol up to five DX8100 Series HVRs can be networked for remote viewing and management In addition up to five simultaneous computer Web and mobile clients can connect to each HVR The DX8100 Series HVR supports both static IP addressing and dynamic addressing through DHCP Consult your network administrator for more information about IP address configuration The system must be turned on and connected to a secured private network and you must be logged in with either Power User or Administrator access to configure network software settings You must reboot the HVR for any network configuration changes to take effect This section describes how to setup network access and includes the following topics e Setting Up DX8100 Network Access e Setting Up DHCP on page 169 e Setting Up a Static IP Address on page 170 Setting Up DX8100 Network Access To begin the network setup process 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Networ
140. Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Backup button amp The Backup schedule page is displayed C2630M C 7 09 3 On the Backup schedule page click Add to add a backup schedule The Add Backup Schedule dialog box opens Add Backup Schedule E Device Selection 3 6 CD R RW CO NEC DVD_RW ND 3550A 3 6 DVD A AW CO NEC DVD_RAWND 35504 S HARD DISK DRIVES Remote drive NOT INSTALLED 3 3 Removable drive NOT INSTALLED a y Time Setting Daly Backup Start Time C Weekly Time 12 y as Backup Time Range Channel amp Record Type ERRE pougnon UO0HHAAR ST Mapanetwork dive Disconnect mapped dive Categories Al Recording gt Estimated Backup Size Cancel Figure 160 Add Backup Schedule Dialog Box 4 Inthe Time Setting section to set up the time schedule do one of the following a For daily recording click Daily if it is not selected and do the following 1 Click the Time drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to start 2 Click the Backup Time Range drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to stop or b For weekly recording click Weekly if it is not selected and do the following 1 Under the Backup Start Time click the Day drop down box Select the day of the week In this case each day represents an individual backup schedule for that
141. This section describes how to link cameras to record in response to these events and includes the following topics e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Motion Events on page 136 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events on page 137 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 137 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events on page 138 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Motion Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to motion detection events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 In the Motion Record Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Motion Source Camera drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording when motion is detected by the source camera 136 C2630M C 7 09 5 Click Apply m Motion Record Link Settings Motion Source Camera CAMERA y Camera Name Camera 1 Enable Record on Source Camera Motion cacao ccoo aaa 17 618 cv cao co1 22 c29 c24 c05 c29 622 c29 c29 c50 e cx Figure 110 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to a single alarm input 1
142. Time e Understanding Instant Playback on page 72 STARTING PLAYBACK FROM A SPECIFIC POINT IN TIME To start video playback from a particular point in time 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button Ea 2 Select a camera in the Site Tree You can also select the camera from a view pane if the camera appears in the panel C2630M C 7 09 71 72 3 In the Timeline section do the following a In the Date Selection drop down box select the day you want playback to begin b Use the spinner buttons to select the time 4 On the playback control click the Forward button J to begin viewing EY June 2005 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 Figure 41 Date Selection Drop Down Box UNDERSTANDING INSTANT PLAYBACK The DX8100 s ability to perform instant playback of video is limited by a one minute delay interval The DX8100 has a built in latency of approximately one minute between the time that video is captured and when it is written to the hard disk This delay exists to ensure that video is accurately stored and the HVR s database is updated correctly The delay interval is not affected if the DX8100 is in the alarm or motion record mode In this case the pre alarm or pre motion time period does not become a factor in determining the delay interval To initiate an instant playback e On the playback control click Instant Playback The timeline is
143. To export a system log file 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click System button D The System page is displayed In the Choose drop down box select a log file Click Save As Select the drive and folder in which you want to store the log file Enter a filename for the log information in the space provided Log file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions Alternately you can view log files by clicking View gt Log and then selecting the desired log file Log files can be opened and printed using a text editing program such as Windows Notepad Click Save SELECTING THE LANGUAGE English is the default language for the DX8100 interface although the system supports multiple languages language changes must be configured from both the HVR s operating system and within the DX8100 application To select the appropriate language for your location 1 Z On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button Et The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the System button D The System page is displayed Make sure the HVR operating system s regional and language settings have been properly set up Refer to the installation manual for information about regional setup In the Language section select the following appropriate language from the Select Language drop down box e English e French e German e italian e Polish e Portuguese e Russia
144. VERING aras WO rat AI AE A IES 252 Performing Periodic Maintenance aeie taka oido e ob dr ds a tc lads chides db Med Aai dell Mf 252 C2630M C 7 09 7 List of Illustrations Ne ee ay o YD00U 4 0N O0O00 YN daga daa gYygyn Nn ganan FP HS HSPHHP HPP HPPHPwWBWWWWWWWWWNNNNNNNNNDN gt 00 YD 0N O0Oo00 004 0N 000 YJ0500g 0N_ O0Od000 Jo0dNma20ON OOO Front Panel and Power Witch A A pt ia bs 16 Export VIde0 Dialog BOE a de See aL a e dd O 20 DX8100 HVA Main WINdOW ovio ia a si as LI AS Aa A E AS 23 View Panes and Panel for 4 Division Display oo 31 Example of Single 4 9 and 16 Division View Panels 0 020 000 ooo cece PONES EA DEAETE AS Aaa 32 View Panel dente aude a a tdo da up s lena ace Sale Shoe 33 Channel Mapping for Extended Monitor Page ooo 35 Assigning a Camera toa Panero 35 Displaying the Extended Monitor Division Buttons 2 0 0 enn eee e ened nent tence en ees 36 SITE HINGE SPAMS mman RT RN 37 Favorites MENE ge cem Qc ohh etait eee bu e late tok ate oti Abe Ue 43 Organiz Favorites Dialog Box 3 5 4 hy ee ety wean a hace nutter yee nated SE a oe PEM eet Les 44 Organize Favorites Dialog Box and List of Favorites Folders 0 2 0 0 ccc nett enn ene ee 45 Movesto Folders Dialog BOX a A A A SS EESE 45 Live View OSD Pecado ridad ias 46 EVROSO Menu Options A AA Ss 47 Activating Instant Recording 48 On Screen PTZ CONTON cece csienden cali tad ded oe abcde toh ed CRUE dd adsl 50 On Scr
145. VRs a 6 10 13 Division Displays images as follows e 6 Division 1 5 One larger and five smaller images e 10 Division 2 8 Two larger and eight smaller images e 13 Division 1 12 One larger and 12 smaller images C2630M C 7 09 Table H DX8100 Toolbar Buttons 2 of 2 Button Name Description Cycle Views Turns window cycling on and off Automatically cycles through each view panel ensuring all cameras i get displayed Group permission to change the dwell time is assigned by the Administrator to the following groups Restricted User Group Standard User Group and Power User Group For information about cycle views setup refer to Automatically Cycling Through View Panels on page 33 Full Screen Selects a full screen view The application window is expanded to occupy the entire monitor screen Click the right mouse button to exit full screen view The full screen view is not available in the Thumbnail POS and Pixel search mode External Monitor Opens the external monitor drop down menu For more information refer to External Monitor Setup on page 228 DISPLAYING THE DX8100 WINDOW FROM A PAGE To display the DX8100 main window from a Setup dialog page e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EN DESCRIPTION OF OPERATING MODES The DX8100 Series HVR has four primary operating modes Live Playback Search and Setup Each operating mode is accessed by clicking its corresp
146. Windows file manager through the online Help system To enable disable Help for viewing 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 9 The System page is displayed 3 In the DX8100 Help section do one of the following e Click the Enable DX8100 Help to select Help for viewing e Click the Enable DX8100 Help to deselect Help for viewing 4 Click Apply EXTERNAL MONITOR SETUP 228 The DX8100 includes one capture card which provides a BNC analog monitor output A second optional capture card can be installed to provide two analog monitor outputs The first capture card nearest to the PTZ card is user definable Users with Power User access or higher can assign cameras and configure the capture card analog output options NOTE An external monitor must be connected to the capture card to make use of the analog monitor outputs Refer to the installation manual for instructions on how to connect analog monitors to the capture card This section describes how to setup an external monitor and includes the following topics e Accessing the External Monitor Setup e Setting Up Camera Mapping e Configuring Display Override on page 235 e Using the External Monitor Option on page 235 ACCESSING THE EXTERNAL MONITOR SETUP To access the monitor configuration screen 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page
147. Working in Search Mode on page 77 To zoom using the digital zoom control 1 To place the DX8100 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EX e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button 2 On the playback control click the Forward button J to start video playback 3 Use the Digital Zoom control to zoom and pan video playback Figure 43 Playback Digital Zoom Control Table W describes the parts of the Digital Zoom control Table W Parts of the Digital Zoom Control Item Part Description 1 Zoom In Allows you to magnify the entire pane Click the Zoom In button to magnify to the next preset magnification level x1 6 Zoom Out Allows you to reduce to the previous preset magnification Click the Zoom Out button to reduce to the previous magnification level Pan Left Allows you to move the magnified playback image to the left O Pan Right Allows you to move the magnified playback image to the right O Pan Up Allows you to move the magnified playback image up O Pan Down Allows you to move the magnified playback image down Q Zoom Restore Allows you to return the zoomed image to the original size 74 C2630M C 7 09 Z00M USING THE MOUSE The DX8100 allows you to use the mouse to drag a selection region rectangle around a specific area of a pane and to zoom the selection in and out A small
148. X8100 the number of e mail notifications can be far too many to manage effectively To keep the number of e mails sent by the DX8100 at a manageable level the e mail notification frequency can be adjusted When events have been detected e mail notifications can be sent out in intervals from once per minute up to once every six hours If no events have been detected during the specified frequency interval no notification will be sent Each e mail notification will include information about the first event detected during the interval the last event detected during the interval and a still image in JPEG format of the last event To configure notification frequency f 7A On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Frequency section select the frequency interval from the drop down box Options for sending an e mail notification include once every 1 minute 10 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours Setting the Time of Day To set the time of day during which e mail notifications will be sent 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In th
149. X8100 toolbar click the Search button al The DX8100 is in the Search mode 2 Click the Export button O The Export Video dialog box opens 3 Click Disconnect NetDrv The Disconnect Network Drive dialog box opens 4 Select the network drive that you want to disconnect 5 Click OK The drive is disconnected and removed from the Export Video dialog box Device area PERFORMING THE EXPORT 102 This section describes how to export data and includes the following topics e Starting an Export Process e Changing a Bookmarked Time Range on page 104 e Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name on page 104 e Selecting the Export Format on page 106 e Exporting a Sequence of Still Images on page 107 e Finalizing an Export Process on page 108 e Stopping an Export While in Process on page 108 e Working with DX8100 backed up Video on page 109 STARTING AN EXPORT PROCESS To start the export process 1 Make sure the HVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking the Live button or the Export button al 2 Click the Forward button S if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode 3 Click the Export button The Export Video dialog box opens 4 Click the plus sign next to a drive in the Device list Available devices are indicated by a check box to the left of the device name C2630M C 7 09 5 Select the check box of the desired device If you choose a remote device select the drive and folder path where
150. Z OSD Menu Control n n ccieteinn cane gare carl aand A ewe vad liada dada 59 R KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features 2 2 2 0 n nbn nee enna 66 S KBD300A Shift Key Features ase ig eaves a BR Od at Wade bao ddd ea ev ara ath aa ede Se Sed Se en ea del Sea ee he nadie 67 T Parts lt ot the Playback Controls A en ty liebe crt pee led el sla Dis 69 U Parts of the Playback Speed and Volume Controls ooooooooooocococo corro 70 Vy Parts of the Playback Timeline Control claro caida ld lcd della hale lhe de panda de til 71 W Parts of the Digital ZOom Gontrols sarete 1 sega dates Wa Savers ald a dele ae eats Ua Mores Ga Se pee gk De ee ee 74 X Parts of the DX8100 Window in Search Mode it A wala dale 78 Y sParts of the POS Search Vi Wes is rd A A A ane A A ESTESI 84 Z Bookmark Controls ds a ad adi 97 AA Available Backup Spaces ii A A A AAA E A A as bead 103 AB EXPO FORMATS 2 chet aa a AL NO A ark e IS A A A 06 AG Parts of theDX8100 Set p Dialog BOX n4 atid ta ted ltd dlrs La dde os added abia 115 AD DX8100 Resource Meta ata 129 AE Parts of the Schedule Pagamino e e e a a a E a A A E lice A 144 AF Record Modasi oam etu toma e a ee Eaa SI Drs 145 AG Camera Settings for the Supported Recording Modes 0 nrnna naana anakane EEEE rr 156 ARES LOA VE ea ie Nala 159 AlDXx8100 Server Maximum IRS Records a a O a oa 160 AJ DX8100 Camera Grouping riscos ia A E a A A A A 60 Al Frame Rate Gapachtys dt da aA ea sais 163 AL
151. a relay The shortcut menu opens 2 Click ON to turn on the relay click OFF to turn off the relay Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera The DX8100 allows you to link alarm inputs to a camera e You can link multiple alarm inputs to a single camera e You can also link a single alarm input to multiple cameras The DX8100 allows you to link alarms to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes or onto cameras listed in the Site Tree To link an alarm input to a camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EN 2 In the Site Tree click the plus sign next to the camera to which you want to link alarms 3 Click the plus sign next to the to see the list of alarm inputs 4 Drag an alarm input onto a camera pane or a camera listed in the Site Tree C2630M C 7 09 39 Linking a Relay Output to a Camera The DX8100 allows you to link relays to a camera e You can link multiple relays a single camera e You can also link a single relay to multiple cameras The DX8100 allows you to link relays to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes or onto cameras listed in the Site Tree To link a relay output to a camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button ES 2 Inthe Site Tree click the plus sign next to tha camera to which you want to link relays 3 Click the plus sign next to F to see the list of relay outputs 4 Drag a relay onto a camera pane or a camera listed in the
152. able select an exception Click Edit The Exceptions dialog box opens Edit the exception content Do one of th e following e Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Exceptions dialog box e ClickC ancel to exit the Exception dialog box and not save the changes Deleting an ATM POS Exception To de 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 n the Comm n the select n the Comm n the Excep ete an ATM POS exception n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed unication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 ed device drop down box select an ATM POS device unication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab For information about the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 ion Table select an exception Click Delete The DX8100 message box is displayed n response to the DX8100 message do one of the following e Click Yes to delete the exception Click N o if you do not want to continue with the deletion Click Cancel to discard the delete action 195 196 Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device To assign an exception to an ATM POS device 1 2 n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS d
153. ack timeline is used to select a day and time to begin playback The timeline includes a horizontal slider that can be moved to select playback time over a 24 hour period Time periods containing recorded video are represented as color coded segments of the timeline Figure 40 shows the parts of the timeline color coding scheme Panel 1 8 03 C09 Camera 9 11 27 2003 Y 05 00 55 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 D l I I i i ECE D Figure 40 Playback Timeline Table V describes the parts of the playback timeline control Table V Parts of the Playback Timeline Control Item Part Item Part 1 Currently displayed view panel O Selected second Total number of view windows Increase timeline detail Site number Decrease timeline detail Camera number Alarm recording Selected date Motion detection recording Selected hour Timeline slider 2 O O Camera name Normal recording O O O Selected minute Instant recording PLAYING BACK VIDEO BY TIME This section describes how to play back video by time The time is displayed in 24 hour clock format You can select the time by moving the slider along the timeline This section includes the following topics e Starting Playback from a Specific Point in
154. activated alarm inputs 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Notification Items section do the following a Click the Alarm check box b In the Selected Channels field click once to the right of the word Alarm The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Do one of the following e Click the check box for each channel you want to monitor for alarm detection events e Click Select All to monitor all channels for alarm detection e Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply 242 C2630M C 7 09 Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Video Loss Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever a camera attached to a DX8100 experiences a video loss event To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to video loss events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Notification Items section do the following a Click the Video Loss check box b In the Selected Channels field click once to the right of the words Video Loss The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Doone of the following e Click the chec
155. aded to the selected device If there is an issue a message dialog box opens Click Close to exit the Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box x m Site List Dx8100Lab 10 106 12 213 Configuration File Path ENDX8100ConfigUpdate bak Upload N Close Figure 187 Software Upgrade Server Console 251 RECOVERING A PASSWORD Upon request Pelco can issue a password recovery code that is valid for 24 hours on the machine for which it was issued only To do so the original buyer of the system typically the dealer must contact Pelco Technical Support The serial number and order number or invoice number under which the unit was originally purchased as well as the MAC address and exact date time listed on the password recovery screen must be provided This must be done in writing by fax and the request must be accompanied by a letter from the current owner of the system stating the following information under penalty of perjury e He she is the legal owner of the system e The password for the system was lost e He she is requesting a password reset Pelco will then issue a reset code that can be used for 24 hours with the provided MAC address only If possible Use company letterhead to submit all information the exact time the mac address and so forth detailed on the password recovery including the bulleted information above Fax to 1 888 294 3885 attention DX8100 Password Recovery To recover a
156. age Export Menu Table E describes the DX8100 Export menu commands Table E Export Menu Commands Command Description Interrupt Export Immediately concludes an export process If the Interrupt Export command is executed before the scheduled backup time the system will save the backed up data until the time the Interrupt Export command is executed Cancel Export Immediately cancels the export process and no backed data is retained Favorite Menu Table F describes the DX8100 Menu commands Table F Favorite Menu Commands Command Description Add to Favorites Opens the Add to Favorites dialog box where you can create and store a favorite to a specified folder Organize Favorites Opens the Organize Favorites dialog box where you can do the following e Create a new folder e Rename the folders e Move favorites to a specific folder e Delete a favorite or favorite folder C2630M C 7 09 27 28 Help Menu Table G describes the DX8100 Help menu commands Table G DX8100 Help Menu Commands Command Description DX8100 Help Opens the DX8100 Help system About Provides model and version information for the DX8100 application DX8100 TOOLBAR This section describes the DX8100 toolbar Table H describes the DX8100 toolbar buttons Table H DX8100 Toolbar Buttons 7 of 2 Button Name Descript
157. age 88 e Searching for Transactions That Satisfy Specific Exceptions on page 89 e Searching for Transactions by Line Item on page 90 e Searching for Transactions by Action Code on page 91 UNDERSTANDING THE POS SEARCH VIEW To enter the POS Search mode 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button a 2 On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed POS Search C2630M C 7 09 Figure 50 shows the parts of the POS search view Transaction Information Start Jor 10 2006 00 00 00 3 2 End for 10 2006 ff 00 00 00 F Device Name FF Transaction Number Data Information Tmas I Transaction with Exception Only T Line Item I Action Code Exception Code Data Overlay Enable Figure 50 POS Search View C2630M C 7 09 83 84 Table Y describes the parts of the POS search view Table Y Parts of the POS Search View 1 of 2 Item Part Description 1 Date Date range for which to search the video and data 2 Time Time range based on a 24 hour time period for searching POS events Transaction Information Allows POS search by transaction information options as follows e Device name The ATM POS device linked to a specific camera In this case selecting a camera linked to an ATM POS device automatically inserts the name of the ATM POS device in the Device Name box e Transaction Number A n
158. alarm input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 e To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to alarm input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Click Apply Alam Record Link Settings Alarm Channel ALARMO y Alarm Name falarmo1 CAM Linked PTZ Setting e n Linked Camera Channel Cameraor Unked Camera Preset Not in use C Linked Camera Patten Now 5 Figure 115 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events C2630M C 7 09 Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events To link an ATM POS input to a camera so the detected ATM POS event results in a repositioning of that camera 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the ATM POS Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS Address drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera t
159. all be sent to the customer at no charge upon request 4 lt shall be the customer s responsibility to procure necessary hardware to perform upgrades if required necessary drives such as CD R DVD R or ZIP 5 Pelco cannot guarantee that all future software versions will be backward compatible with earlier hardware platforms C2630M C 7 09 15 HARDWARE UPGRADES Pelco provides hardware options for upgrading the DX8100 memory channel input analog video output audio input capacity and hard disk storage For information about DX8100 upgrade options refer to the DX8100 product specification sheet Hard disk upgrades are available as follows 1 Additional hard drive space cannot be installed in some models To determine if your model can be upgraded refer to the DX8100 Installation manual or contact Pelco s technical support 2 Hard disk upgrades are available through Pelco at established prices and are subject to the usual 24 hour turnaround for service When a larger hard drive is being substituted for a smaller one the smaller drive will be returned to the customer along with the upgraded unit While Pelco will perform all upgrades with the utmost consideration and care Pelco cannot guarantee that any of the data and or video stored on the existing hard drives will not be lost or damaged Pelco is not responsible for damage or loss of data STARTING AND SHUTTING DOWN THE DX8100 This section describes how to start and shut down
160. als The first exported image will be the first frame of the bookmarked region and the last image will be the frame taken at 300 seconds into the bookmarked region To export a sequence of still images 1 Selecta still image format Options are BMP JPEG and TIF 2 Select the number of images 1 999 you want to save in the sequence 3 Select the time interval between each saved image in the sequence Options are as follows C2630M C 7 09 Continuous 0 5 seconds 1 second 2 second 3 second 4 seconds 5 seconds Export Format C Avl C ASF C Native C BMP JPEG C TIF V Audio Record V RealTime Image Count 13 Interval MES Figure 71 Still Image Export Formats 107 108 FINALIZING AN EXPORT PROCESS This section describes how to finalize an export process The following guidelines are applicable e Audio export is available only with DX8100 native AVI and ASF video formats e Real Time setting applies only to DX8100 native AVI and ASF video formats e When the Real Time check box is selected the DX8100 will export video so it can be played back in real time 30 fps for the same length of time as the original recording For example if video was recorded at 1 fps this means the DX8100 will insert 29 null frames for every one frame of actual video Thus one minute of video recorded at 1 fps 60 frames total will play back for one minute at 30 frames per second 60 frames of actual video intersper
161. and and collapse elements and select the display division For detailed information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about configuring DX8100 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 198 Table S describes the KBD300A SHIFT key features specific to the DX8100 server Table S KBD300A Shift Key Features Keyboard Control Action Joystick Activity within the DX8100 Site Tree Up down direction Moves the cursor vertically through each element in the Site Tree An element is a DX8100 site camera within each DX8100 site or Alarm ATM POS and relay within each DX8100 site If an element is expanded the joystick moves the cursor vertically through the objects of that element e Left right direction Right Expands an element to display objects contained under the element Left Collapses an element and hides its objects Select a camera unit at the tree Number CAM Expands the Site Tree and selects the first camera in each DX8100 site For example if there are two sites with one named DX8100 site 1 and the other named DX8100 site 2 e Pressing 1 CAM expands the Site Tree for DX8100 site 1 and selects the first camera It does not assign the selected camera to a view pane or display video e Pressing 2 CAM expands the Site Tree for DX8100 site 2 and selects the first camera It does not
162. assign the selected camera to a view pane or display video F2 F3 ON OFF Cameras are assigned numerically 1 16 to the respectively numbered video These controls display DX8100 video in the following divisions e F2 OFF Single division view e F3 MOM 4 division view e AUX ON 9 division view e AUX OFF 16 division view Repeatedly pressing a button causes the DX8100 to cycle through the display of the remaining panels To place the KBD300A in the shift mode e On the KBD300A keyboard press the SHIFT key The LED indicator should be on C2630M C 7 09 67 Working in Playback Mode Recorded video can be played back one channel at a time on the DX8100 Like live video recorded video is viewed from the camera view panels on the main screen Refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 for information about view panels Only users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher are allowed to view recorded video Playback video can also be displayed in full screen view For information about displaying playback video in full screen view refer to Displaying Playback Video in Full Screen View on page 30 This section describes how to use the Playback mode and includes the following topics e Printing Images e Accessing Playback Mode e Assigning Cameras to View Panels e Playback On Screen Display OSD on page 68 e Playback Controls on page 69 e Playback Timeline on page 71 e Playin
163. ata Format Name Modified ER 650 m Transaction Format Transaction Number Transaction Start Transaction End Find by Symbol No TEXT vj BBQ and More Deli TEXT EZ THANK You The end of text string Decimal 13 User String r Monetary Format 1 2 Control Character LF 10 3 Control Character CA 13 Delete Range Monetary Unit Thousand Separator is Decimal Separator A m Time Format Date LAARA E MM F DD Month Type dan hal Time HH x E gt Mm bd p SEC LSO 12 Hour AM PM x m Character Format Special Device Character zi ie Control Code hoo zl Type Char Custom Device Filter Add Control Character NUL 0 Special Character m Figure 147 Modified ER 650 Data Format Dialog Box C2630M C 7 09 d Using the information from the transaction record or other source set the parameters for the following Data Format sections as applicable e Transaction Format e Monetary Format e Time Format e Character Format e Click OK The new or updated data format appears in the Data Format List Device Configuration p E x General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics m Data Format List This page is where you configure the data format transaction monetary time and character options Data Format Name Modified ER 650 Add Delete IMPORTANT The options and parameters configur
164. ate and time specified for the respective transaction data as shown in the POS Search table The DX8100 playback controls are used to view playback video SEARCHING AND DISPLAYING POS DATA BY DEVICE NAME You can perform a general search for POS transaction data record for a particular ATM POS device and its associated camera Use the date and time and ATM POS device name as the search criteria The search results contain all POS transactions recorded for that device according to the specified date and time Searching POS Data by Device Name To search POS transaction data by ATM POS device name 1 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button al Ne On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed To select a channel in the DX8100 Site Tree click a camera that is linked to an ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name box In this case the Device Name box is deselected Select the date and time for the POS search event as follows a Select the Start date b Select the End date c Select the End time d Select the Start time In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name box is available Verify that the ATM POS device name displayed in the Device Name box is the correct device for the search
165. atic camera mapping 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Auto Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a Select the Auto Camera Mapping Mode button b Select from the screen division options c Select dwell time 1 60 seconds from the drop down box This is the amount of time each window will remain on the monitor d Select the type of event that will be allowed to override the monitor output e Alarm input e Motion detection e Set the dwell time an event will be allowed to override the screen 1 60 seconds 4 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page 3b External Output B Auto Camera Mapping Mode omo AAA Do time 10 y 1 60 Seconds Override monitor output in response to this type of event Motion detection la MotionZalarm override dwell time fio gt 1 60 Seconds Figure 174 External Monitor Automatic Mapping C2630M C 7 09 229 230 Setting Up Manual Camera Mapping Manual camera mapping allows a user to customize the capture card analog output Individual cameras can be assigned to view panels in any combination Each customized screen can be added to a sequence list and assigned a specific amount of dwell time These combinations of customized screens and corresponding dwell times make up sequence instances multiple s
166. ating a Preset on page 54 e Clearing a Preset on page 55 PROGRAMMING A PRESET This section describes how to program a preset The following PTZ operating guidelines apply e Clicking the button places DX8100 in PTZ programming mode e While in PTZ programming mode multiple presets can be programmed until the button is pressed again To program a PTZ preset 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EX 2 Drag a camera from the Site Tree onto a view panel 3 On the PTZ keypad click the Set button ES 4 Using the on screen PTZ controls and PTZ keypad move the camera to the desired position and adjust the zoom setting Figure 22 Creating a Preset C2630M C 7 09 53 54 5 Using the PTZ keypad select a number for the new preset for example select 1 6 Click the Preset button to store the preset in the selected memory location 7 Repeat steps 4 6 for each preset you want to program 8 Click the Set button again to exit programming mode Figure 23 Programming a Preset ACTIVATING A PRESET Double and triple digit presets can be set or activated by pressing the first digit and then the second digit sequentially For example preset 20 can be selected by clicking the number 2 and then the 0 zero on the PTZ keypad To activate a preset 1 On the PTZ keypad click a preset number 1 150 on the keypad 2 Click the Preset button to activate preset The ca
167. ation area gt Cameso Properties Selected Channel Camera Secaty fhe Protocol Nemak ComeroPTZ a PTZ Locking Auto meat 10sec PIZAquimentTer Pet Peni Tau tao OpSnichadtes Pteria _Vew p OmV 127 o 4128 rs Common SutTme PATH End Time EEEE 120 s PS op to Al Cameros NA 127 o 120 0 FP Protood FF Moton Detection E a PHO Camera 31 Saadan ni Comesa Security I Audio Settings 12 PLO Camera 32 127 o 128 FP Pete Adustinert F Video Loss Y Nam i Ao lo Al Cameros Ss oil toca la Figure 96 Viewing IP Camera Settings 8 In the Site Tree click the IP camera The IP camera video is displayed in the Camera page preview window 9 Verify that the CPU orange and Memory blue levels are within the DX8100 Resource Meter s 0 to 100 percent range If either level exceeds 100 percent a warning dialog box appears Click the check box to disable future DX8100 System Resources Warning dialog boxes If the unit is restarted the DX8100 System Resources Warning dialog box is enabled again DX8100 System Resources Warning x Analog and IP camera capacity has exceeded system resources Reduce the number of cameras being recorded or lower their resolution and frame rate J7 Do not show this waming again Figure 97 DX8100 System Resources Warning Dialog Box To configure the analog and IP cameras to bring the CPU or Memory l
168. available serial data standards Table AS DX8100 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards ul Serial Data Standard Supported RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 COM1 V 1 Y Y 2 Y Vv 3 Y Y 4 Y Y C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP ATM POS DEVICE COMMUNICATION PORTS The DX8100 allows you to use both the COM1 RS 232 port and Port 1 to Port 4 RS 422 RS 485 to connect ATM POS devices Typically Port 1 to Port 4 are used to connect the KBD300A and dome devices This section describes how to select and configure the ATM POS device communication port and includes the following topics Setting Up COM1 Port Properties Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options on page 181 Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 186 Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 190 Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 196 Setting Up COM1 Port Properties This topic describes how to set up COM1 communication port properties Access the Network page to configure the communication ports For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 For information about the Port Device page refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 177 Table AT describes the COM1 port properties Table AT COM1 Port Properties Property Selection Interface Mode RS 232 defaul
169. b 4 Do the following a In the To box enter the e mail address of the individual to whom you would like to send e mail notifications b Optional In the CC box enter a second e mail address of a person to whom you would like to send a copy of the notification c Inthe Subject box enter text in the subject line as you would like it to appear in e mail notifications The default subject line is DX8100 Emergency E mail Notification 5 Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup Disable Notification Enable Notification Full name foxsteo Fist Floor Lobby fear 00_first_fr pelco E mail Address com f r None z M2 fd o Group imo r Frequency mai SMTP emtpdomain pelco com 1 Minute Y My E mail Server Requires Authentication 3 Subject 0x3100 Emergency Emai Notification Server address smtp domain pelco com User name etipdockawr Password a Test E mail Notification Figure 184 Sending E mails to Individuals C2630M C 7 09 Sending E mail Notifications to Groups To configure e mail notification to send e mail alerts to a group of individuals 1 N a C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notificat
170. based computer To ensure that the viewer software runs automatically after the disk has been inserted verify that the auto run feature of your computer s optical drive has not been disabled Table AB Export Formats Format Description AVI Saves video sequence as a standard Windows video format ASF Saves video sequence as a standard Windows media file Native Saves video sequence using Pelco s engineered compression format Native format provides increased compression and smaller file sizes BMP Saves a still image file in standard Windows bitmap format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved JPEG Saves a still image file in JPEG format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved TIF Saves a still image file in TIF format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved To select the export format e From the Export Video dialog box select the radio button of the file format you want to export C2630M C 7 09 EXPORTING A SEQUENCE OF STILL IMAGES Still image formats export the first frame of a bookmarked region and then a single frame for each time interval until the number of images specified has been exported For example consider exporting a six hour bookmarked region of video with an image count of 100 and a time interval of 3 seconds The resulting export will include the first frame of the bookmarked region followed by 99 additional images taken at three second interv
171. btn e ee 133 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Alarm Settings Section 00 0 0 ccc cnet n tenes 134 Event Relay Link Settings Motion Detection Link Settings Section 2 0 0 0 occ ccc cect c eens 34 Event Relay Link Settings Alarm Link Settings Section 2 0 0 0 occ ccc n eben eens 35 Event Relay Link Settings ATM POS Link Settings Section 20 0 0 2 0c rr 135 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section 2 20 02 ec n cbt n eee ee 136 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section 20 0 b ete eee 137 Event Recording Link Settings Alarm Record Link Settings Section 0 0 0 0 c cece ccc ccc cee e eens 37 Event Recording Link Settings ATM POS Record Link Settings Section 202 0 0 e ee 138 Event Recording Link Settings Video Loss Record Link Settings Section 2 0 0 0 00 c cee ccc cece ene 138 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Motion Events n naana an cence ccc neces 139 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events 2 2 0 0 eect cent e eee es 140 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events 20 00 0000 ccc ec eea 141 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events 20 0 0 0 ccc cece nee eens 142 Schedule PAGE ss vista Stam a a a E Pale ots Anh e ARAN le ht cha E os Gta he ast ad 143 Filling In Recording Blocks in a Schedule Grid 22 0 cor
172. button EN 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click a view panel division button For information about the view division buttons refer to DX8700 Toolbar on page 28 NAVIGATING VIEW PANELS This section describes how to move between the DX8100 view panes and panels This section includes the following topics C2630M C 7 09 Navigating Between View Panels on page 32 Expanding and Collapsing View Panes on page 33 Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels on page 33 Automatically Cycling Through View Panels on page 33 31 Navigating Between View Panels The DX8100 allows you to monitor up to 36 channels each channel is assigned to one pane within the view panel If the 36 division display format is selected all 36 panes occupy one panel However for single 4 division 9 division 16 division and 25 division display formats the DX8100 displays the panes in multiple panels In this case to view all of the panes you must cycle through multiple panels to display hidden panels e Channel As pertains to video one DX8100 camera port input The term channel is sometimes used interchangeably with camera e Camera One external video device such as a Spectra 11 that provides input video to the DX8100 HVR For example if you select the single division display format one channel video pane fills the entire panel e The pane and panel represent the same amount of viewing area e In this case there will be an additional 31 hidden panels
173. camera s protocol is set to NO PTZ or PELCO C the DIP Swi cannot be set using software ch Address drop down box is unavailable In this case the camera s dip switch setting This option is available for cameras and protocols that support software configured addresses Only one address can be assigned per camera The DX8100 disp To view the camera DIP switch address ays an error message if you attempt to assign the same address to different cameras setting for all attached local cameras click View The DIP Switch Address View dialog box opens The assigned DIP switch se tting for all attached cameras is displayed As you adjust the picture properties of a camera on the local HVR changes will be reflected immediately in the view area near the top of You can click the Hide Show button to clear the view area to get a better look at your picture property changes Refer to step 2 in Motion 3 In the Picture Adjustment section adjust picture properties by moving sliders for Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation the screen Changes made to cameras at a remote site will not appear in the view area until you click Apply 4 Click Default to return all picture property settings to the normal state Detection Setup on page 118 5 Click Apply r Channel Information Name Camera 4 Camera 4 Zonel T Camera Type Local Camera Resolution 352 x
174. cannot exceed the maximum setting of the ALL frame rate slider 7 Click OK 8 Click Apply when you return to the Schedule Setup screen 320x240 gt 11PS cue 320x240 7 11Ps cH19 1 320x240 11PS cH2n 1 320240 11Rs 1IPS cH21 f 320x240 y 11PS 1IPS cH22 220240 11P5 320x240 y 11PS cH23 320x240 y 11P5 320x240 y 11PS CH24 1 7 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 y 11PS 0425 1320240 y 11PS 320x240 y 11PS cH26 14 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 11PS cHa7 320x240 y 11Ps 320x240 11PS cH28 gt 320x240 gt 11PS 320x240 11PS cH23 1 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS CH30 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 11PS cas 320240 11P5 320240 AN 1IPS CH32 A 320240 Y 11PS 640x240 640x480 x Figure 131 Frame Rate Configuration Screen C2630M C 7 09 159 160 Understanding DX8100 Server Maximum IPS Recording The DX8100 can record at frame rates up to 480 IPS NTSC and 400 IPS PAL The total frame rate capacity is distributed among 8 16 24 32 channels depending on the configuration of your unit Resolution and frame rate values can be assigned evenly among all channels or they can be configured independently for individual channel Frame rate values can also be customized according to recording mode normal motion alarm and ATM POS For information about setting up the DX8100 to record at the maximum rate and resolution refer to Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording
175. ckets are delivered to the proper application For example e mail is traditionally delivered through TCP IP port 25 and Web pages through port 80 Table AP describes the ports assigned to direct video and control information into and out of the DX8100 You should keep port numbers set at their default values unless there is a known conflict with your existing network infrastructure Consult your network administrator before changing any port information about the DX8100 Table AP TCP IP Ports Used by the DX8100 Port Number User Changeable Description 9002 Yes Base port for transmission of video audio and interface data 9003 Yes Software upgrades 9004 Yes Emergency agent notifications 9005 No Information port 13900 No Ping port Access the Network page to set up the TCP IP DHCP and bandwidth throttle options For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 Consult your network administrator before assigning or changing port numbers Make sure that the ports are not blocked internally but are protected from external threats by a firewall Client and server ports must be identical To configure the base port and software upgrade port 1 If necessary in the DX8100 Base Port box enter a new base port number 9002 is the default 2 If necessary in the Software Upgrade Port box enter a new software upgrade port 9003 is the default 3 If necessary i
176. cording resolution e Recording frame rate e Recording image quality Alarm Expands and collapses the Alarm tree ATM POS Expands and collapses the ATM POS tree e e Relay Expands and collapses the Relay tree Right clicking a relay opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands e ON Allows you to turn on the relay e OFF Allows you to turn off the relay we Remote site Expands and collapses the remote DX8100 site Right clicking the remote site name opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands e User Log In Opens the User Log In dialog box where you enter your user name and password to log into the remote DX8100 site e User Log Out Logs you out of the remote DX8100 site e Connect Allows you to connect to the remote site e Disconnect Allows you to disconnect from the remote site This section describes how to work with the Site Tree and includes the following topics e Assigning Cameras to View Panes on page 39 e Setting Up Links on page 39 e Removing Links on page 40 C2630M C 7 09 ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANES The DX8100 provides view panes that are organized into view panels The DX8100 includes 36 view panels that can display cameras from up to five connected HVR sites For information about view panels refer to Working with View Panes and Panels on page 30 The DX8100 Series HVR supports triplex operation Triplex operation means
177. credit please call Pelco at 800 289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain an authorization number CA number if returned for credit and R number if returned for repair and designated return location All merchandise returned for credit may be subject to a 20 percent restocking and refurbishing charge Goods returned for repair or credit should be clearly identified with the assigned CA or RA number and freight should be prepaid 12 23 08 BGreen The materials used in the manufacture of this document and its components are compliant to the requirements of Directive 2002 95 EC This equipment contains electrical or electronic components that must be recycled properly to comply with Directive 2002 96 EC of the European Union regarding the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE Contact your local dealer for procedures for recycling this equipment Added new features data retention custom setting full screen button multicasting export and printing of backed up video and MUX analog video output e REVISION HISTORY Manual Date Comments C2630M 9 06 Original version C2630M A 6 07 C2630M B 4 08 Added new features dual display expanded ATM POS and system health check C2630M C 7 09 Added new features External JBOD storage and IP camera support Pelco the Pelco logo Camclosure Digital Sentry Endura Esprit ExSite Genex Intelli M Legacy and Spectra are registered trademarks of Pelco Inc Sarix and Spec
178. cted displays POS if active for the cameras assigned to a view pane e Select all Selects all of the OSD options e Background color Opens a submenu with the following choices Set color Opens the Colors palette for selecting or creating a background color Disable background Disables a background color from being shown Log Opens a submenu with the following choices e System On Off e System failure e Export e Backup e Network connection e Login ID list with time e Video loss Resolution Opens a submenu with the following choices e 1024 x 768 e 1280 x 1024 Cycle Views Setup Opens a submenu with the following choices e Dwell time change Opens a submenu with the following choices for assigning permission to a user group allowing the selected user group to change the dwell time Restricted User Group Standard User Group Power User Group e Dwell time Opens a submenu of dwell times with the following choices 2 Sec 5 Sec 10 Sec 30 Sec 60 Sec Extended View Index View Enlarges the video image displayed in the view pane Opens the Event Index pane C2630M C 7 09 Table D View Menu Commands 2 of 2 Command Description System Health View Opens a submenu with the following choices e Status View e Log View Display Deinterlaced Selects the deinterlace mode for enhancing the display of video images Im
179. d Figure 163 shows the parts of the User page Figure 163 User Page 208 C2630M C 7 09 Table BB describes the parts of the User page Table BB Parts of the User Page Item Part Description 1 User Name Table Lists the authorized users 2 User Buttons Allows you to do the following e Add Opens the Add New User dialog box to create a new user account Remove Deletes the selected user e Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to view and modify user details e Set Password Opens the Set Password dialog box to specify or modify the user s password O User Groups Allows you to create user accounts for the following user groups e Power e Standard e Restricted The DX8100 allows the administrator to configure access rights to any user group for the following functions e Camera security e View live video e Operate PTZ e Playback video e Set PTZ e Access export menu For more information about user groups refer to Definition of User Access Levels and Definition of Camera Security Access on page 210 O User Timeout Allows you to configure the amount of time a user is allowed to remain logged on to the DX8100 system before the system automatically logs out The time period is from 5 60 minutes in increments of 5 minutes The manual setting allows the user to stay logged on to the DX8100 until the user is manually logged off O Auto Login User
180. d symbol flashes blue during an ATM POS event c The ATM POS events are displayed yellow in the time line amp pxa100 Ple Edt View Export Pavorte Help ela lalalala la gt Camera 16 2 pio eee z ATMIPOS amos Amposoz xj Panet 16 32 S01 C16 Camera 16 03 01 2005 10 3 21 aoa a AN TA Lis ss jor nurg 0900 09 30 10 00 1030 11 00 0 AE 4 E ji AR gt 7M 6 jE J a Eep 01 2006 1027 03AM Ready Dink o Admin Total recorded 35 0 12 041 23 MJ Figure 158 Recording ATM POS Transaction SETTING UP THE KBD300A KEYBOARD The KBD300A allows you to operate certain DX8100 live view display functions and control camera PTZ operations from a keyboard rather than a MOUSE When connected to the DX8100 server the KBD300A supports two modes standard and shift mode Shift mode is entered by pressing the Shift button and is indicated by a lit Shift button LED For information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A universal keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about using the KBD300A refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 66 In summary the steps required to set up the KBD300A for operation are as follows e Connect the KBD300A to the DX8100 For information about connecting the KBD300A to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100 Installation manual e Configure the KBD300A communication settings Configuring KB
181. d the number buttons 9 5 and the Preset button Preset Figure 30 PTZ Control Panel 4 To navigate up and down through camera menu choices do one of the following e Use the PTZ OSD Menu controls e Use the on screen PTZ controls or the focus and focus buttons C2630M C 7 09 59 60 To select an option from the camera s on screen menu do one of the following e On the PTZ OSD Menu click Enter e On the keypad click the iris button Click the iris button to cancel an option or select the Exit command You can also use the on screen PTZ controls with your mouse to navigate through camera menus Click and drag the mouse up or down to move between menu options Click the iris button to select the option or to exit a menu when the cursor is pointed at the Exit command a rm AN NDI oO m DON D NDD M lt lt II 4 gt Ae onm Dm lt 4 IAN y Oma MV C a bw PAAA k mue mM ox ts Pe Figure 31 Camera Setup Menu C2630M C 7 09 SENDING AUXILIARY COMMANDS TO A DEVICE The DX8100 auxiliary feature allows you to control external equipment connected to the auxiliary outputs of Spectra domes or Esprit positioning systems The auxiliary function is implemented through the D protocol and P protocol In this case the attached camera and DX8100 must be configured to communicate using one of these protocols The Aux key selects the auxiliary mode Buttons 1 4 s
182. d to a network supporting multiple HVRs and clients users with Administrator access override and block Power Users If two users with the same access level attempt to enter Setup mode simultaneously the DX8100 will allow access to setup features on a first come first served basis Unavailable setup options will be grayed out This section describes the Setup Mode and includes the following topics e Accessing the Setup Mode e Understanding the Setup Dialog Box on page 115 e Camera Setup on page 116 e P Camera Setup on page 122 e Link Setup on page 132 e Schedule Setup on page 143 e Setting Up Network Properties on page 168 e Data Backup Setup on page 201 e User Setup on page 208 e Site Setup on page 214 e System Setup on page 218 e External Monitor Setup on page 228 e Emergency Notification Setup on page 235 e Emergency E Mail Notification Setup on page 238 ACCESSING THE SETUP MODE The Setup Mode is accessed from the DX8100 toolbar by clicking the Setup icon When clicked the Setup icon opens the Setup dialog box in the DX8100 view panel Major configuration categories are displayed on individual tabbed pages Each configuration page contains all of the options and parameters for the respective functions which allows you to customize how the DX8100 operates for your particular application To access a setup page click the icon displayed on the right side of the view panel The Setup dialog box allows Administrators and Power
183. demption OT Description not available CP COUPON store coupon redemption OV OVERRIDE override programmed price displays message ields CR CRITICAL CODES determined by Action Critical PL PRICE LOOKUP displays message fields CX CANCEL cancel entire sale before completion PO PAID OUT pay out cash from register DB DEBIT CARD amount tendered with debit ATM or credit RA RCVD ON ACCT customer payment toward charge account balance DC DRAWER CLOSED no display RF REFUND payment of refund to customer DD DISCOUNT discount entered as absolute amount RT RETURN merchandise returned DO DRAWER OPEN no display ST SUBTOTAL sale subtotal DP DEPOSIT deposit amount paid pending purchase SX TAXABLE AMT taxable subtotal DR DEPOSIT RETURN deposit return Tl CURRENT TIME displays description field DS PCT DISCOUNT discount as percentage of cost or total TK TRANSACTION RECEIPT NUMBER displays description field El EMPLOYEE SIGN ON to register TN Tim Norris publicly viewable EO EMPLOYEE SIGN OFF to register TR NEGATIVE TOTAL negative amount as the total FC COMPLIMENTARY complimentary or on the house TT TOTAL total amount due charge FS FOODSTAMPS amount tendered in food stamps WIC TX TAX tax amount and so forth GA PREPAID GAS gasoline prepayment after pumping VD ERROR CORRECT void of last item entered GP GAS PREPAID gasoline prepayment VX VOID correction of entered item within c
184. dialog box select the IP camera you want to delete 4 Click Delete The IP camera is deleted from the IP Camera Properties dialog box 5 Inthe IP Camera Properties dialog box e To accept the deletion Click OK The IP Camera Properties dialog box closes The IP camera is removed from the Site Tree and its status changes to Disable in the extended Selected Channel drop down box The IP camera retains its customized camera name and display settings Camera Properties Selected Channel Camera26 Disable y Camera Name BpectradiP Camera 26 Figure 101 IP Camera Status Disabled If you select Network Camera in the extended Selected Channel drop down box a DX8100 message appears stating that the IP camera is not registered To register the IP camera you must assign it to a camera channel For information about assigning an IP camera to a camera channel refer to Assigning an IP Camera to a Camera Channel on page 124 Ca pet Selected Channel Camera26 Network Camer The IP camera is not registered Camera Name BpectradiP Camera 26 Camera Security None ly Figure 102 IP Camera Not Registered Dialog e To cancel the deletion 1 Click Cancel The IP Camera Properties dialog box closes The IP camera is not removed from the Site Tree but its status changes to Disable in the extended Selected Channel drop down box Spectra4 IP Camera 26 i Spectra4 IP Camera 27 e Sarix IXSO Camera 28 1P3
185. dress or the address of someone who can verify the receipt of the test e mail in the To box Type DX8100 E mail Notification Test in the Subject box Enter the following server settings if necessary e Server address This address should be the same as the SMTP server address you entered above e Username e Password Click Test E mail Notification Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup Disable Notification g Fulname SriepingAreaDVR SSS E mail Address fihipdockdvi pelco com Q Ta jdoe petco com __AdstoGiow Mad Group Subject 0X8100 Emergency E mail Notification mai SMTP smtpdomaint pelco com o My E mail Server Requires Authentication Server address Jmtp domain pelco com Figure 180 E Mail Test C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP THE TIME PERIOD The DX8100 can be configured to send e mail notifications on a periodic basis such as once every ten minutes This sections describes how to set up the time period and includes the following topics Configuring E Mail Notification Frequency Setting the Time of Day Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Motion Events on page 242 Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Alarm Events on page 242 Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Video Loss Events on page 243 Configuring E Mail Notification Frequency Depending on the volume of motion alarm or video loss events detected by the D
186. e ATM POS Data Format Protocol 1 ATM POSO1 1 Modified ER 650 POS GENERAL O2 ATM POSO2 2 None None O3 ATM POSO3 3 None None Os ATM POS04 4 None None as ATM POSO5 5 None None Os ATM POSOB 6 None None az ATM POSO 7 None None Os ATM POSO8 8 None None Os ATM POSO9 9 None None O10 ATM POS10 10 None None O11 ATM Pos11 11 None None O12 ATM POS12 12 None None O13 ATM POS13 13 None None O14 ATM POS14 14 None None O15 ATM POS15 15 None None O16 ATM POS16 16 None None y WARNING If a device is set to the single mode only one device can be assigned to the connection port Apply xa Cancel Figure 149 Assigning the Data Format ATM POS Devices 9 Click the Linking button 29 The Linking setup page is displayed C2630M C 7 09 10 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab The Event Recording Link Settings page is displayed Relay and Alarm Settings Event Relay Link Settings Event Recording Link Settings Event PTZ Link Settings r Motion Record Link Settings Motion Source Camera cameraot Camera Name Camera 1 p Enable Record on Source Camera Motion Per ce es JC es Jes Jos cr Je Jes J cro foe cra cxa cre crs crs civ cr cns 020 car c22 c23 020 025 cos c27 cae cas cso f csi c m Alarm Record Link Settings Alarm Channel ALARMOT Alarm Name Alarm01 gt Enable Record on Source Alarm Event c7 ce cg C10 C11 C12 f C13 C14 C15 C1
187. e Device Name box is deselected e Inthe Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name When the Device Name box is enabled type the ATM POS device name in the box 4 Set the date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Transaction with Exception Only The Exception Code check box is available b Click the check box to select Exception Code The Exception Code box is available c Type the exception code in the box C2630M C 7 09 89 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid and if transactions with exceptions were recorded during the time range the transactions are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Live Start for 13 2006 03 23 03 End 01 13 2006 y DE 173 00 Transaction Information I Device Name ATM7POSO1 jo I Transaction Number m Data Information Transaction with Exception Only i Line Item I Action Code CH E IV Exception Code BANANA F Data Overlay Enable Start Search i Stop Search 6 TRANSACTION NUMBER 559 j DATE 1 13 2006 TIME 7 26 48 es ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 MILK 1 GALLON 4 57 ATM POSO1 PANCAKE MIX 3 49 ATMJPOSO1 FROZEN MIXED VEG ea ATM POSO1 Bre pT 0 76 ATM POSO1 TOTAL 10 31 ATM POSO1 Figure 55 T
188. e Enqueue time The system s estimated time for backup completion 4 Waiting backup Allows you to do the following information control 3 e Priority up Allows you to move the selected backup schedule to a higher place in the list uttons e Priority down Allows you to move the selected backup schedule to a lower place in the list e Delete Allows you to delete the selected backup schedule O Running backup Lists the backup schedules that are currently running information ACCESSING THE BACKUP CONFIGURATION PAGE For information about the Backup schedule page refer to Data Backup Setup on page 201 To access the Backup page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Backup button amp The Backup schedule page is displayed ADDING A BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8100 allows you to configure the start time and time range for backing up data The backup schedule can be configured to run on a daily basis at a set time and for a specified time range Or you can set up the backup schedule s to run on selected days of the week In this case selecting a weekly backup schedule allows you to customize the start time and time range for each selected day of the week The start date and time cannot be set to begin later than the end date and time To define the time range of the data to be backed up 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the
189. e Frequency section do the following a Click the Start check box to use the spinner buttons or type the earliest time of day you want e mail notifications to be sent for example 7 30 a m b Click the End check box to use the spinner buttons or type the latest time of day you want e mail notifications to be sent for example 6 00 p m Click Apply 241 Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Motion Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever a camera attached to a DX8100 detects motion To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to motion events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Notification Items section do the following a Click the Motion check box b In the Selected Channels field click once to the right of the word Motion The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Doone of the following e Click the check box for each channel you want to monitor for motion detection events e Click Select All to monitor all channels for motion detection e Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Alarm Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever an alarm input is activated To initiate e mail notifications to be sent in response
190. e Multicasting 2 Inthe Multicast Group IP box enter the multicast group IP address 3 Click Apply The DX8100 message dialog box opens prompting you to restart the DX8100 4 Do one of the following e Click Yes to restart the DX8100 e Click No to cancel the restart action If you exit the Network page you are not prompted to apply the previous settings If you open the Network page again the Enable Multicasting check box is selected However the DX8100 must still be restarted to activate the multicasting mode ACCESSING NETWORK INFORMATION Access the Network page to view DX8100 network settings For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 To access network information such as IP and default gateway addresses 1 In the Network page click Network Information The IP Configuration information box appears 2 Click OK to return to the Network page C2630M C 7 09 171 172 SETTING UP DNS WINS The DX8100 allows you to set up DNS or WINS services if your network supports these services Access the Network page to configure DX8100 DNS WINS services For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 To set up DNS WINS 1 In the Network page click the DNS WINS tab The DNS WINS page is displayed 2 Do one of the following e If you are using dynamic IP addressing through a DHCP server click the Obtain
191. eature requires that the password be entered at the Enter Network Password dialog box In this case the DX8100 application will not start until the password is manually entered NOTE The DX8100 will not automatically reboot if there are mapped network drives To enable the Auto Reboot feature 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button Q The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Auto Reboot section click the Enable check box 4 In the Auto Reboot section do the following to specify the day and time to automatically reboot the system a Select the day of the week in the drop down box b In the Hour drop down box select the hour Time is displayed in 24 hour clock format c In the Minute drop down box select the minutes 5 Click Apply SPECIFYING THE DATA RETENTION TIME LIMIT The DX8100 data retention time setting allows the Administrator user to configure a time limit for viewable recorded video The time limit can be entered manually or selected from the drop down menu lists The data retention time is set in increments of one or more days The viewing time limit window starts from the date of recording to the configured time limit For example if the time limit is set for 11 days all video recorded on Aug 24 2006 can be viewed up to and including September 4 2006 The data recorded on Aug 24 cannot be viewed on Sept 5 The video data recorded on Aug
192. ecord mode 4 Right click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels for which you want to clear recording times 5 Release the right mouse button The highlighted recording times are cleared 6 Do one of the following e To accept the change click Apply The selected time period is deleted e To cancel the change click Cancel The deleted recording times are restored Record Mode FA Normal J Motion JE Alam FP ATM POS aa 0 2 3 Cancel Apply Figure 120 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode 146 C2630M C 7 09 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes To clear the scheduled recording times for all record modes 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Schedule button fi The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click a record mode check box to deselect the record mode No record mode is selected 4 Right click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels for which you want to clear recording times 5 Release the right mouse button The highlighted recording times are cleared 6 Do one of the following e To accept the change click Apply The selected time period is deleted e To cancel the change click Cancel The deleted recording times are restored Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Figure 121 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes CREATING YEARLY RECORDING SCHEDULES
193. ect s name c In the Relay Type section click the NO NC button to toggle the default output type for each relay normally open or normally closed 4 Click Apply Bay Relay Settings Relay Channel RELAYO1 y Relay Name A elay01 K m Relay Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No No No No No No no no 3 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 No No No No No No no No 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 No No no no No No No No Figure 104 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Relay Settings Section Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties Most applications will not require you to change relay and alarm settings from their default states To configure basic alarm input operating properties 1 On the DX8100 toolbar the Setup button ki The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button to display the Link page 3 Inthe Alarm Settings section do the following a In the Alarm Channel drop down box select the Alarm you want to configure b In the Alarm Name box enter an optional new name for alarm Alarm names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters You can also rename sites cameras alarms and relays from the Site Tree by slowly clicking twice on each object s name c Inthe Alarm Type section click the NO NC button to toggle the default output type for each alarm normally open or normally closed C2630M C 7 09 133 134 4 Click Apply
194. ed Selected Channel drop down box select Network Camera If an error message appears reassign the IP camera to a camera channel refer to Customizing IP Camera Display Settings on page 127 3 Click Apply The camera name is displayed in the Site Tree and video is displayed in the Camera page preview window LINK SETUP 132 This section describes how to use the Link page to set up the following e Relay and alarm settings e Event relay link settings e Event recording link settings e Event PTZ link settings This section includes the following topics e Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings e Linking Relay Outputs to External Events on page 134 e Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to External Events on page 139 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to External Events on page 136 CONFIGURING BASIC RELAY AND ALARM SETTINGS The DX8100 can support up to 32 alarm inputs and 24 relay outputs Each 8 channel HVR has 8 dry contact alarm inputs and 8 relay terminals each 16 channel HVR has 16 dry contact alarm inputs and 16 relay terminals This section describes how to configure basic relay and alarm settings including the following topics e Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage e Configuring DX8100 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings e Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties e Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties on page 133 Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage T
195. ed at this page determines how data from ATM POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transactions Every field format must match that of the selected ATM POS device especially the month format Apply as Cancel Figure 148 Data Format List 6 In the Device Configuration page do the following a Click the Settings tab The Available ATM POS Device table is displayed b In the Device ID column click an ATM POS device to select it c Double click the Data Format cell for the selected ATM POS device The Data Format cell drop down box is displayed d Click the Data Format cell to display the available data formats e Select the data format you want to assign to the ATM POS device C2630M C 7 09 184 7 Inthe Protocol column do the following a Double click the Protocol cell for the selected ATM POS device The Protocol cell drop down box is displayed b Click the Protocol cell to display the available protocols c Select the protocol you want to assign to the ATM POS device 8 Do one of the following e Click Apply to save your settings without closing the Device Configuration dialog box e Click OK to save your settings and return to the Port Device page Device Configuration 7 x General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics Available ATM POS Device ATM POS Nam
196. ed to an alarm a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay Output Activation Period Relay 04 Y Folow Event No Link y Disable me 1 CameraD4 No Link Camera05 No Link Uno Link CameraDl6 No Link Camera0 No Link Camera08 No Link Camera01 Camera02 Camera03 Y No Link Y No Link Y No Link To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt Wideo Loss gt in the linking setup Figure 139 Linking Relays to Video Loss Table AO describes the available video loss activated relay settings Table AO Video Loss Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when a video loss event occurs Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment the video loss event happens 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the video loss event occurs C2630M C 7 09 167 SETTING UP NETWORK PROPERTIES The DX8100 networking capability allows you to network up to five DX8100s You can configure such networking options as follows e Configuring the DX8100 for Network Access e Setting Up DHCP e Setting Up a Static IP Address e Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle e Setting Up DNS WINS e Working with Time Synchronization on page 172 e
197. ee 3 Click the mouse pointer in the camera s view panel 4 Press and hold the up down and left right arrows to pan tilt the camera 5 Press the plus key one or more times to increase the pan tilt speed Press the minus key one or more times to decrease the pan tilt speed 52 C2630M C 7 09 PTZ PRESETS A preset is a user defined camera position using PTZ and focus commands the camera s auto focus option must be turned off Only cameras that support positioning and programming using D P Coaxitron or supported third party protocols can use this feature The DX8100 Series HVR can address up to 150 PTZ presets 1 150 Preset 95 is reserved for remote camera setup and preset 99 is reserved for camera autoscan mode The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View For information about changing view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 The following PTZ operating guidelines must be observed e To program or clear presets preset tours and patterns the button must be engaged e Jo activate presets tours and patterns the button must be disengaged This section describes how to program activate and clear presets and includes the following topics e Programming a Preset e Activ
198. een PIZ MOVEMOS Uns Saad Sy haa Dal tea oats ti 50 PTZ Keypad with Gamera Lens Controls a gs vec A aay A a wl Wet wth nes Akt 51 Mouse Wheel Zooma me teerronz eee ace che quate lin selena a R doi Gee 51 Creating a Preset as tonsini kos lek a eld A Sl UR ae a da e E ds lle Boe ddd otal ad 53 Programming Presets papai A We Ba oh clade te ewes Sat ee et da oe ee ees 54 ACUIVATING sa PRESET vta dieta tre dt la TBE NP ets ORI Se Weta Bani ie wc tl eh ae A AA danas 54 Clearing Presets ashen wes E Kenmare AA A A A Soi ek Sade ace 2oe Meee ce hie OR Rees 55 Programming a Pattenny Ais ata a eee Cee ein ee Lote ee ne ste NRL mee Roe a th tat ee oak de a cee bd 56 ACtIVaLING a Patterns OS ott ere te ected Man ete igs Meh oe eg LR a eur a OR S tae i ae A 57 Glearing a Pattenn sa a ca A A A A A e O 57 PTZ0SD Menu Controles dotada da ti das ida la dba tal 58 Plz Control Panel nsii ia A tios 59 Camera Setup AAA O ce Miley alle oe Mat eae esa etl Boot Be eae da etka eal dala odie 60 Auxilia Aux BUON il iS oa ant ES di a EA AS AENA iis 61 Preset TOUR Dialogg BOX ico alta a ii dl ds lo idad abia 62 Adding Presea e a NN O Re a o ty a 63 DeletingsPreset MOM OU A a e e a e It bel cate 64 Activating a Pr set OU A e sa 65 Playback OS Dre art e a da is oi 68 Playback O A A A Se 69 Playback Speed and Vol me Control na o do dada 70 Playback Timelines an eran a a A A A Lee A A A A A E E eee en AE 71 Date Selection Drop Down BOX 72 Event Type Drop down B
199. egardless of access level To set login timeout E 2 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the User button a The User page is displayed Select a time limit from the User Timeout drop down box e Time limits range from five minutes to one hour in five minute increments e Selecting Manual from the drop down box will suspend the automatic logout feature A user will remain logged in until the user logs out or another user logs in Click Apply 213 ASSIGNING AUTOMATIC LOGIN PERMISSION TO A USER The DX8100 allows one user to automatically log in to the DX8100 application The administrator must assign automatic login permission to the user Once automatic login permission is assigned to the user the user will be automatically logged in to the DX8100 application In this case the assigned user does not have to enter the user name and password NOTE Automatic login user permission makes the DX8100 more vulnerable because a higher level user is logged in every time To assign automatic login permission 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the User button a The User page is displayed 3 In the Auto Login User drop down selection box select a user 4 Click Apply The next time the DX8100 application is started the assigned user is logged in automatically SITE S
200. el 24 indicators audio 46 camera 46 instant recording 46 on screen PTZ control 46 pan tilt and zoom 46 record 46 C2630M C 7 09 site 46 information port 170 instant recording indicator 46 instant recording mode 47 interface mode 180 181 IP camera analog camera disabling 123 130 assigning toacamerachannel 123 camera channels supported 123 configuring IP camera settings 126 deleting 131 disabling 130 DX8100 network searching for IP camera 124 IP address assigning 124 restoring a disabled camera 131 setting up 122 site assigning to 127 user name and password configuring 124 J JBOD external storage 13 14 20 K keypad 51 L language selecting 15 16 linking alarm input removing from camera 40 alarm inputs linking to cameras 39 link setup options 132 event PTZ link settings event recording link settings event relay link settings relay and alarm settings relays linking to cameras 40 removing 40 setting up 39 inking and event recording setup 132 ive audio 26 46 119 ive audio listening to 121 Live View mode 58 ocal area network LAN 238 ogical network ports 170 ogs files 26 Backup Export Login ID list with time Network Connections System Failure System On Off Video Loss C2630M C 7 09 mapping camera 229 maximum record rate 160 161 menu bar 24 menus Edit 25 File 25 file 24 Help 28 menus shortcut local site 38 relay 38 remote site 38 mode extended view mode s
201. elect which of the camera s auxiliary outputs to operate Buttons 1 4 operate as a toggle on off each time they are clicked For example an Esprit equipped with a wiper uses Aux 1 to control the wiper In this case pressing Aux and then 1 sends a command to the Esprit to operate the wiper You must configure the camera to establish how the camera responds to an auxiliary command For detailed information about how a specific Spectra or Esprit camera system interprets auxiliary commands refer to the documentation that accompanies your Spectra or Esprit camera system To send an auxiliary command 1 On the PTZ keypad click the Set button to enter the programming mode 2 Select the camera in the DX8100 view panel to which you want to send the auxiliary command 3 Click the Aux button Keypad buttons 1 4 are available Figure 32 Auxiliary Aux Button 4 Click a keypad button 1 4 The auxiliary function assigned by camera for the selected button is executed C2630M C 7 09 61 CONFIGURING PRESET TOURS A preset tour allows a camera to move through a programmed sequence of PTZ presets The DX8100 Series HVR can store up to four preset tours While four tours can be programmed only one tour can be activated at a time A preset tour will operate continuously until another PTZ control action is performed At least one PTZ preset must be set in order to create a preset tour The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In
202. electing the Cycle View Dwell Time on page 34 C2630M C 7 09 33 Starting an Automatic Cycle View Mode To start the automatic cycle view mode e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Cycle Views button The Cycle Views icon turns blue indicating that the DX8100 is in the automatic cycle view mode The system will cycle through each panel displaying each panel for the configured cycle view dwell time Stopping an Automatic Cycle View Sequence To stop the automatic cycle view mode e On the DX8100 toolbar click the Cycle Views button 21 The DX8100 stops the automatic cycle view mode Selecting User Groups to Set the Cycle View Dwell Time The DX8100 allows the Administrator to control which user group can change the cycle view dwell time In this case anyone that belongs to a selected user group can change the cycle view dwell time To select a user group to have permission to change the cycle view dwell time 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button 4 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Cycle Views Setup gt Dwell time change 3 From the Dwell time change submenu choose a user group Selecting the Cycle View Dwell Time To configure the cycle period 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EW 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Cycle Views Setup gt Dwell time 3 From the Dwell time submenu choose a time period MAPPING CHANNELS ON THE EXTENDED MONITOR The DX8100 HVR ve
203. equence instances can be combined into a sequence list The resulting list will sequentially display each instance on an external monitor in a continuous loop The sequence will continue uninterrupted until an alarm or motion event overrides the cycle The following information should be noted when using the manual camera mapping feature e Eight channel HVRs offer only the 1 x 1 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 view panel options e Ifyou select more than one screen division each camera channel will cycle through each screen before the next panel division is presented This section describes how to set up manual camera mapping and includes the following topics e Creating Monitor Sequence Instances e Loading an Existing Sequence List on page 231 e Modifying a Sequence Instance in the List on page 232 e Deleting a Sequence Instance from the List on page 233 e Appending an Existing Sequence List on page 234 Creating Monitor Sequence Instances To add a sequence instance to the sequence list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a Select the Manual Camera Mapping Mode button if it is not already selected b Select one of the screen division options c Drag cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel until cameras have been assigned to all panels
204. er To manually synchronize the DX8100 to an external time server le 2 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select an NTP server For information about adding an NTP time server refer to Adding an NTP Time Server on page 173 Click Synchronize Clock Immediately The DX8100 time is synchronized to the NTP time server 175 176 Setting Up Automatic Time Synchronization You can configure the DX8100 to be automatically synchronized to an NTP time server You can also set the synchronization interval from zero to 23 hours and 59 minutes In this case you have to enable the NTP service and synchronize time in intervals options To automatically synchronize the DX8100 to an external time server 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select an NTP server For information about adding an NTP time server refer to Adding an NTP Time Server on page 173 Do the following a To synchronize the DX8100 upon startup click the Auto start Synchronize When System Starts check box b Click the Synchronize Time in Intervals H M check b
205. etup dialog box click Network button E The Network page is displayed 3 Click the NTP tab 4 Do the following a Click Add Edit Delete The NPT Server List dialog box opens NTP Server List E xj Server List s 0 pool ntp org 81 91 70 122 J O north america pool ntp org 70 91 204 1 CE en Figure 141 NTP Server List Dialog Box b Click Add The Add Edit NTP Server dialog box opens Add Edit NTP Server a SNTP Server C DX8100 NTP Server URL Pore o o o CIP 0 0 0 0 Port Number 123 Canet Figure 142 Add Edit NTP Server Dialog Box C2630M C 7 09 173 174 e f To select the NTP server do one of the following e Do nothing and accept the default SNTP Server option button In this case an NTP server is used to provide time synchronization e Click the DX8100 NTP Server option button to select the DX8100 to provide time synchronization for the network To specify the NTP server addressing do one of the following e If the DX8100 NTP Server option is selected the URL option is not available In this case the IP option button is automatically selected and you must provide the DX8100 NTP Server IP address or e Ifthe SNTP Server options is selected you can do nothing and accept the default URL option button In this case you must enter the SNTP Server URL e Click the IP option button and enter the SNTP Server IP address Enter either the
206. etup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed 3 In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens 4 Select the button for the recording resolution and mode you want to configure Options are as follows e 640 e 704 e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS The 640 resolution setting is for the standard VGA format The 704 resolution is for the cropped D1 video NTSC PAL C2630M C 7 09 5 Select resolution values for individual channels from the drop down boxes Table AH describes the available resolution values Setting a resolution value for one recording mode sets the resolution value for all modes For example setting resolution to 640 x 480 in Motion recording mode will change the resolution to 640 x 480 in Normal and Alarm recording modes as well Table AH Resolution Values NTSC PAL Video Format 640 704 640 704 CIF 320 x 240 352 x 240 320 x 288 352 x 288 2CIF 640 x 240 704 x 240 640 x 288 704 x 288 ACIF 640 x 480 704 x 480 640 x 576 704 x 576 6 Do the following a Using the ALL frame rate settings slider set the frame rate for all channels b To set the frame rate for individual channels use the frame rate slider for each channel to select a frame rate from 1 30 ips according to the available capacity for that channel The frame rate of an individual channel
207. evel within range a Optional Click the check box to disable the DX8100 System Resources Warning dialog box b Go to Configuring Analog and IP Cameras for Optimal Hybrid Video Recording on page 130 10 Verify that the IP camera is communicating with the DX8100 Click IP Camera Status The IP Camera Network Status dialog box appears and displays the IP camera s status 11 Click OK 12 Click Apply 13 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button EN The DX8100 application window appears 14 Drag the newly configured IP camera to a camera pane C2630M C 7 09 UNDERSTANDING THE DX8100 RESOURCE METER Zonel CPU TO Memory 63 0 IP Camera Status 49 AS IP Camera 3L0 Figure 98 DX8100 Resource Meter Table AD describes the parts of the DX8100 Resource Meter Table AD DX8100 Resource Meter Item Part Description View Pane Displays the available system resources CPU and Memory resource levels for the DX8100 server The meter range is 0 to 100 percent The CPU and Memory resource levels cannot exceed 100 percent If either level exceeds 100 percent the DX8100 System Resources Warning dialog box appears For information about configuring analog and IP cameras for optimal system resources performance in order to bring the system resources within an acceptable range refer to Configuring Analog and IP Cameras for Optimal Hybrid Video Recording on page 130 NOTE The DX8100 Resource Meter show
208. evice n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab nthe ATM POS Name drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Exception Table click the ID box of the exception you want to assign to the ATM POS device Do one of the following e Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Exceptions dialog box e Click Cancel to exit the Exception dialog box and not save the changes ATM POS Name fiaTmPoso1 JATM POSO1 z r Exception Table Any field containing values must all g _Exception Name Effect be found or satisfied before a data TOTAL DEFINE Don t Show c device exception is generated E Hit Each data device can trigger the Delete DX8000 to record at a special rate and for a special length of time Figure 156 Assigning an Exception to an ATM POS Device Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection To verify that the ATM POS connection is working correctly f Z n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port COM1 or Port 1 to Port 4 n the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Diagnostics tab n the ATM POS Information section select the ATM POS device in the Device ID drop down b
209. eypad click a pattern number 1 4 on the keypad 2 Click the Pattern button Pattern Figure 27 Activating a Pattern CLEARING A PATTERN To clear a pattern 1 On the PTZ keypad click Set button to enter programming mode 2 Select a pattern number 1 4 on the keypad 3 Click the Pattern button Pattern 4 Click the Clr button or 5 Click the Pattern again 6 Click the Set button Set in to exit programming mode ick the Se utton Se again to exit prog g Figure 28 Clearing a Pattern C2630M C 7 09 57 ACCESSING PROGRAMMING FEATURES OF REMOTE CAMERAS You can use the PTZ function to program features of remote cameras such as Pelco s Spectra or Esprit Only cameras that support remote programming through D P Coaxitron or supported third party protocols can use this feature The DX8100 allows you to navigate the remote camera menu system using any of the following e PTZ OSD Menu controls For information about using the PTZ OSD Menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 58 e Keypad controls For information about using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 59 e Keyboard keys For information about using the keyboard keys refer to Using Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 52 The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch be
210. f you upgraded your DX8100 from version 1 1 to 1 2 the dual display feature is supported the dual display card is supported for DX8100 version 1 2 and later INSTALLING THE DUAL DISPLAY CARD A 2 Install the dual display card For information about installing the card refer to the DX8100 dual display card Installation manual Once the display card is installed refer to Configuring the Dual Display Card CONFIGURING THE DUAL DISPLAY CARD To configure the DX8100 to display video on the extended monitor NOTE After you enable the extended monitor for use with the dual display card you must restart the DX8100 to enable the overlay feature on both monitors 1 2 8 9 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut down dialog box opens Click Exit to Windows Click OK The Log On to Windows dialog box opens Enter the Windows password and then click OK The system logs you into the operating system Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and then double click the Display icon The Display Properties dialog box opens Click the Settings tab To enable the extended monitor do the following a On the Settings tab click the monitor icon that represents the extended monitor you want to use in addition to your primary monitor b Click Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor c Inthe Color quality area select Highest 32 bit NOTE If the color mode is set to Medium 16 bit
211. figured to record at 30 ips at 4CIF Figure 134 Maximum Rate and Resolution Recording C2630M C 7 09 Understanding the DX8100 Frame Rate Calculations The DX8100 uses a complex algorithm to calculate the amount of recording resources available for each channel This calculation takes into account factors such as the number of enabled cameras whether uniform or mixed resolution values are used recording type continuous alarm or motion and the frame rate settings of enabled channels The resulting calculations provide the operator with a margin of available frame rate capacity to distribute among the recorder s channels This margin of frame rate capacity or headroom is presented to the user as color filled sections of the frame rate sliders White areas on the slider represent frame rate capacity that is not available to that channel In certain cases adjusting the available frame rates of one channel or resolution type may free up capacity for other channels Figure 135 shows the available and unavailable frame rate capacity cH2 PO 640x240 71Ps Figure 135 Example of Frame Rate Capacity Table AK describes the available and unavailable frame rate capacity Table AK Frame Rate Capacity Item Description O Available frame rate capacity e Unavailable frame rate capacity SETTING UP ADVANCED RELAY OUTPUT Relays work much like switches When triggered relays can activate external devices
212. formation about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about configuring DX8100 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 198 Table R describes the KBD300A Standard mode operational features specific for the DX8100 server Table R KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features Keyboard Control Action Joystick Controls the camera s PTZ operation Number PRESET short Moves camera to the programmed preset position Number PRESET long Programs the current camera position to the desired preset number Number PATTERN long Starts the pattern record mode ACK Stops the pattern record mode Number PATTERN Runs the desired pattern Number AUX ON AUX OFF Turns on off the specified auxiliary output Number MON Assigns the selected camera to the desired view pane The active view pane is highlighted To place the KBD300A in the standard mode e On the KBD300A keyboard press the SHIFT button The LED indicator should not be lit C2630M C 7 09 KBD300A SHIFT Key Mode Features The KBD300A SHIFT key allows you to control certain DX8100 operation features in the Site Tree from the keyboard This section describes the KBD300A SHIFT key features The SHIFT key is effective within the DX8100 Site Tree You can move the cursor to select elements within the Site Tree exp
213. from the ATM POS Address drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected ATM POS address You can also drag relays onto ATM POS devices in the Site Tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply ATM POS Link Settings ATM POS Address amos ATM POS Name JATM POSO1 Linked Relap Seting C Lee e e Ces Cr Ca e Jie Cmo Cen o ts Cers iz tara noo ner R22 ns ma Figure 108 Event Relay Link Settings ATM POS Link Settings Section C2630M C 7 09 135 Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to a video loss event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Video Loss Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected Video Loss Channel 5 Click Apply r Video Loss Link Settings Video Loss Channel CAMERADI yl Camera Name Camera 1 Linked Relay Setting CJ Les JC meme ms Figure 109 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section LINKING CAMERAS TO RECORD IN RESPONSE TO EXTERNAL EVENTS Multiple cameras can be configured to begin recording in response to detected motion alarm ATM POS transaction and video loss events
214. g Back Video by Time on page 71 e Playing Back Video by Event on page 73 e Operating Playback Digital Zoom on page 73 e Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode on page 96 e Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously on page 96 PRINTING IMAGES To print a still image use the playback controls to pause video playback at a specific image Then click the Print button on the DX8100 toolbar ACCESSING PLAYBACK MODE To access the Playback mode click the Live button on the DX8100 toolbar ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANELS To assign a camera to a view panel 1 Drag a camera from the Site Tree onto a camera view pane 2 Repeat this process for up to 36 cameras PLAYBACK ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD 68 Figure 37 Playback OSD C2630M C 7 09 PLAYBACK CONTROLS Use the playback controls to start playback control direction and adjust speed On the playback control click the Stop button a at any time to return to live view The playback controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View Figure 38 shows the parts of the DX8100 playback controls ou d a Q 1 a gt Es Figure 38 Playback Controls Table T describes the parts of the payback controls Table T Parts of the Playback Controls Item Part Desc
215. g a Patten enrian fics Meee oe A ea A tht Ces dit dl eel a tit na ale 56 Activating Pattern A ls Bee er pede do oy ei eke Ns 57 Clearing a Pates sce done taa A E E DAS A SEPEN 57 Accessing Programming Features of Remote Cameras oooooooococococooco corr rr 58 Sending Auxiliary Commands to a Device 2 annuun eee EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 61 Configuring Preset TOURS os penas tenis ia a awl Wat asa Aaah 62 Programming a Prese TOUT i gsi asea an hare aa Ta ire 62 Activating a Freset Tour itita neni drehi a Be lola das dad a ts ai aaike 65 Deactivating a Preset Tour 3 44 A A ees Sy eee EY 65 Using the KBD 300A Keyboards ss eenaa e e ars altering ea ta tte ead ha and egos satin 66 KBD300A Standard Mode Operational Features nunnan nannu nunne eee rr 66 Working In Playback Mode A A ek See i a Pa eas be 68 PFINUINGsIMAGES ti A a a A a ate 68 Accessing Playback Mode A a 68 Assigning Cameras to View Panels ooo 68 Playback On sereem Display OSD siento plik atrae ali bi y dt liste hie bled Aba dete 68 Playback Controls lt 2 Aaa A AI he aca Dadisien ta cas nected ase 69 Playback AAA Ai Raton Salta Paha ie iat Cote bh eo Rte ak e oh del ab eed oh ar lad 71 Playing Back Video by TIME mrss drese rh eaten dares A e a Pes ESEU NSE A 71 Starting Playback from a Specific Point in Time o oooooococoooooococr rr 71 Understanding Instant Playback a 72 Playing Back Video DVEVEN ba Renn eats saat de a a a t
216. g an Export Process To halt an export that is in process while retaining current video data stored e From the DX8100 menu bar choose Export gt Interrupt Export Deleting Video Data When Stopping an Export Process To halt an export that is in process and delete any current video data stored e From the DX8100 menu bar choose Export gt Cancel Export C2630M C 7 09 WORKING WITH DX8100 BACKED UP VIDEO The DX8100 allows you to view search export back up and print backed up video To do so you must use the DX8100 Client application For more information about viewing backed up video refer to Viewing and Searching Backed Up Video in the Client Applications Help or the Client Applications manual C2630M C 7 09 109 Logs and Health Status This section describes how to work with the system log and system health status feature and includes the following topics e Viewing Logs from the Application Window e Viewing System Health Status on page 112 VIEWING LOGS FROM THE APPLICATION WINDOW You can access the system logs from the application window or from the System setup page For information about working with logs from the System setup page refer to Using System Logs on page 222 NOTE The UPS area is reserved for future use To access system logs 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click View gt Log A submenu is displayed listing the various commands View Export Favorite Help OSD l elemei Log dd System On Off
217. g mode b Click Load to load or modify an existing sequence The Load profile dialog box opens c Select a profile d Click OK The DX8100 dialog box opens prompting you to append the sequence to the list C2630M C 7 09 231 e E Manual Camera W Default Click No to the Append option External Output C Auto Camera Mapping Mode Panel Division Selection C EH LH fae Dwell time io 1 60 Seconds Override monitor output in response to this type of event Load profile Motion detection Motion alarm override dwell Panel Division Selec Drag and Drop cameras fron 0 Min 30 Sec Ch 1 Ch 3 Ch 4 ic Delete Apply Sequence No 2 y D z Min 1 J Sec Override monitor output in response to this type of event Alarm inpft El Motion alarm override dwell time 1 XI 17 60Seconds Cancel Apply Figure 176 Loading a Mapping Sequence Modifying a Sequence Instance in the List To modify a sequence instance in the list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a b Click the button if it is not selected to select the Manual Camera Mapping mode Click one of the sequence instances from the list Select a screen divis
218. ging Out of the Local DX8100 e Exiting to the Windows Operating System LOGGING IN TO A LOCAL DX8100 You must have a valid user name and password to log in to the DX8100 The user name and password are case sensitive To log in with a user name other than Guest 1 From the DX8100 main menu go to File gt User Log in The User Log in dialog box opens 2 Enter a valid user name in the User Name field and a valid password in the Password field 3 Click OK LOGGING OUT OF THE LOCAL DX8100 Logging out of the local or a remote HVR does not disconnect you from that system Logging out will return you to the Guest account To disconnect from a remote server refer to Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 19 To log the current user out of the system and return to the Guest account e Click File gt User Log out You can also log out of a local or remote HVR by right clicking its site name from the Site Tree and then selecting User Log Out from the shortcut menu 18 C2630M C 7 09 EXITING TO THE WINDOWS OPERATING SYSTEM You must have DX8100 Administrator user access and a Windows password to exit to the Windows operating system Refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 210 for information about users security levels For information about the Windows default password refer to the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide To exit the DX8100 application and log into the Windows operating system 1 F
219. gital video recorders and NVR300 Series network video recorders Endura Series distributed network based video products Genex Series products multiplexers server and keyboard PMCL200 300 400 Series LCD monitors Two years Standard varifocal fixed focal and motorized zoom lenses DF5 DF8 Series fixed dome products Legacy Series integrated positioning systems Spectra III Spectra Mini Spectra Mini IP Esprit ExSite and PS20 scanners including when used in continuous motion applications Esprit Ti and 112500 Series thermal imaging products Esprit and WW5700 Series window wiper excluding wiper blades CM6700 CM6800 CM9700 Series matrix Digital Light Processing DLP displays except lamp and color wheel The lamp and color wheel will be covered for a period of 90 days The air filter is not covered under warranty Intelli M elDC controllers One year Video cassette recorders VCRs except video heads Video heads will be covered for a period of six months Six months All pan and tilts scanners or preset lenses used in continuous motion applications preset scan tour and auto scan modes Pelco will warrant all replacement parts and repairs for 90 days from the date of Pelco shipment All goods requiring warranty repair shall be sent freight prepaid to a Pelco designated location Repairs made necessary by reason of misuse alteration normal wear or accident are not covered under this war
220. gured for the event To schedule a record mode for one or more channels 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the check box for the record mode you want to apply to a channel e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS Table AF describes the record modes Table AF Record Modes Mode Color Description Normal Green Continuous recording Motion Blue Recording is triggered during the selected time block if a motion event is detected in the camera s predefined motion field For information about motion detection refer to Motion Detection Setup on page 118 Alarm Red Recording is triggered during the selected time block when an alarm is activated At least one alarm must be linked to the camera for this option to work For information about alarms refer to Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 39 ATM POS Yellow Recording is triggered during the selected time block if an ATM or POS event is detected in the camera s predefined ATM POS field For information about ATM POS detection refer to Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 137 4 Click and drag the mouse to highlight the time periods and channels where you want the recording mode to apply Drag the mouse diagonally to highlight periods across multiple camera channels simultaneously C2630M C 7 09
221. hat Local Camera is displayed in the associated Selected Channel drop down box Optional To disable an analog camera select Disable in the associated Selected Channel drop down box Enter an optional new name in the Camera Name box for the camera Camera names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters The Camera Name box cannot be left blank or have any spaces If a valid name is not entered in the Camera Name box when you click Apply the previous name is displayed Set camera security level The default security levels are as follows e None The camera can be viewed by all users e Low The camera can be viewed by all users except the Guest account NOTE If you do not want video from a low security level camera to be viewed by the Guest user set the security level for that cameras to medium or higher e Medium The camera can be viewed by users with Standard User access and higher e High The camera can be viewed by users with Power User access and higher In the Protocol drop down box select the appropriate PTZ protocol for the camera or select No PTZ if the selected camera does not support PTZ functions Some of the supported protocol options are as follows e NO PTZ Disables all PTZ functions for the current camera e PELCO C Coaxitron e PELCO D Pelco engineered e PELCO P Pelco engineered e SAMSUNG V2 0 e PANASONIC e VICONO e KALATEL e Honeywell HSD251 e
222. he DX8100 server might experience an external AC power outage that impacts how the relay and alarm features function e Power outage Relays configured as NO are closed if the DX8100 is server is shut down by a power outage or the AC cord is unplugged e Power button Relays configured as NO are closed if the DX8100 power button is pressed and held down In the scenarios above a relay will remain closed as long as the DX8100 is powered down In this case alarms or sirens connected to the relays might produce a false alert Configuring DX8100 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings To access the Link page to program alarms and relays 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera setup page 2 Click the Linking button 29 The Link page is displayed C2630M C 7 09 Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties To configure basic relay operating properties 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button to display the Link page 3 In the Relay Settings section do the following a In the Relay Channel drop down box select the relay you want to configure b Inthe Relay Name box enter an optional new name for the relay Relay names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters You can also rename sites cameras alarms and relays from the Site Tree by slowly clicking twice on each obj
223. he DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Site Setup button 3 Select the Manual button if it is not already selected 4 Entera site name for the remote HVR Site names can be up to 32 characters long and can contain spaces and special characters for example Building 1 HVR C2630M C 7 09 5 Enter the IP address of the remote site 6 If necessary do the following a Entera new base port number 9002 is the default Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change port numbers from their default values Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical b Enter a new upgrade port number 9003 is the default c Enter a new information port number 9003 is the default d Click Add The site appears in the Site IP list on the right 7 Repeat steps 4 6 for each additional site Up to 50 remote sites can be added to the site list 8 Click Apply Once a remote site has been set up its name appears in the Site Tree It may take up to five minutes to initially connect to the site Once a connection has been established cameras from the remote site can be dragged onto the main screen view panels Site Infomation r Site IP het D r Manual Y 10 1 Sro Na
224. he following events Loss of synchronization This event occurs if the data cable between the camera and DX8100 is disconnected cable is cut or unplugged or when the camera looses power Low level of video This event occurs if the DX8100 detects a low level of video signal from the camera The available light source for the camera indoor outdoor lightly is greatly diminished The DX8100 data cable is disconnected You can adjust the operation time from 0 00 to 23 59 For example if the start time is 6 00 and the end time is 18 00 a low video level event from 18 01 to 5 59 will not be detected The low video level detection time option is only available when the low level of video option is selected The DX8100 also stores a video incident as a video loss recovery event The status provides the start and restore time for the video loss event The DX8100 allows you to select the loss of synchronization and low level of video option independently C2630M C 7 09 The PTZ camera and multiple relay output can be mapped to a video loss event Multiple cameras can be configured to record in response to a video loss event The DX8100 can be configured to use emergency agent notification In this case the last available video image at the time the event occurred is sent to the designated remote client If no image exist then the system attaches a red colored pane to the e mail The red pane contains the text Video Loss For info
225. he frame rate ranges from 1 to 30 ips depending on the DX8100 Series HVR configuration The 8 camera HVR has 8 sliders the 16 camera HVR has 16 sliders the 24 camera HVR has 24 sliders and the 32 camera HVR has 32 sliders Repeat step 5b for each camera you want to configure Click OK 157 158 8 Click Apply at the Schedule page Frame Rate Configuration x C Alam 320x240 1Ps 320x240 11PS 320x240 11P5 220x240 y 11PS esaa 11 320x240 y 11Ps 220x240 y 11PS 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 TIPS 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 7 11PS 3220x240 y 11PS 320x240 11P5 320x240 11PS 320x240 y 11PS C _ATM POS 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 Y 11PS 320x240 Y 1 1PS 320240 y 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 y TIPS 320x240 11PS 320X240 11PS 320X240 y 11PS 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 TIPS 320x240 11PS 320240 y Figure 130 Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box Setting the Resolution and Frame Rate Both resolution and frame rate settings can be adjusted using the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box For information about accessing the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box refer to Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box on page 156 To set recording resolution and frame rates for each channel 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The S
226. he user s group list The text will toggle from red to white and that permission will be denied for that user 4 Click Apply ADDING NEW USERS Administrators can create new user accounts and modify existing users this can be done locally on the DX8100 server or remotely from the DX8100 Client Application User names and passwords have the following requirements e User names can be between 4 and 20 alphanumeric characters in length e User passwords can be between 4 and 10 alphanumeric characters in length e User names cannot contain spaces and special characters e User names and passwords are case sensitive To add a new user 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the User button a The User page is displayed 3 Click Add The Add New User dialog box opens 4 Do the following a Entera login name for the user b Enter the user s full name c Enter a brief description for the user For example enter Building 6 Security Guard d Entera password for the user Passwords must be between 4 and 10 characters in length and cannot contain spaces and special characters e Re enter the same password to confirm 5 Click Next The user access level options for the New User dialog box are displayed 6 Select the user s access level Restricted Standard or Power 7 Click Finish C2630M C 7 09 211 212 8 Click Apply padnemuser x Enter
227. higher can configure the emergency agent notification system The first step in the setup process requires that clients be added to the emergency agent notification list To complete this step you must provide a valid name and the IP address of each client computer After clients have been added they can be linked to one or more cameras Finally the amount of time a server sends images after an event occurs and the interval between sending each image must be set NOTE Before configuring the Emergency Agent Notification make sure the Emergency Agent Client utility is installed on one or more client computers For information about installing the Emergency Agent Client utility refer to nstalling the Client Emergency Agent Application in the DX8100 Client Application manual This section describes how to setup emergency notification and includes the following topics e Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setup e Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified e Changing Client Emergency Agent Properties on page 236 e Deleting Clients from the Notification List on page 237 e Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 237 e Setting Server Event Transmission Time on page 237 ACCESSING THE EMERGENCY AGENT NOTIFICATION SETUP To access the Emergency Agent Notification setup 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is di
228. ice tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 3 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 4 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 5 Click the Data Format tab 6 In the Data Format page click Add The Data Format dialog box opens 7 Using the information from the transaction record or other source set the parameters for the following Data Format sections as applicable e Transaction Format e Monetary Format e Time Format e Character Format 8 Click OK 9 Verify that the new data format is listed in the Data Format List on the Data Format page Editing a Data Format The DX8100 allows you to edit a data format Once you click OK to accept the changes you cannot undo the changes To edit an existing data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 3 Inthe selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 4 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 5 In the Data Format List highlight the name of a data format 6 Click Edit The Data Format dia
229. ifferent view MODIFYING AN EXTENDED MONITOR VIEW To modify a display while viewing video on the extended monitor 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Channel Mapping button al 2 Click the division button for the current view displayed on the extended monitor 3 Modify the view add move and remove cameras 4 Click Apply The change is displayed on the extended monitor 36 C2630M C 7 09 WORKING WITH THE SITE TREE The Site Tree provides access to DX8100 resources such as cameras alarm inputs and relay outputs Objects can be selected by clicking the left mouse button once and then linked by dragging and dropping the icon into a view pane or another Site Tree item The Site Tree information reflects the current DX8100 server configuration Figure 10 shows the Site Tree Figure 10 Site Tree Parts C2630M C 7 09 37 38 Table M describes the Site Tree parts Table M Site Tree Parts Item Part Description Name Site Expands and collapses the DX8100 site Right clicking the site name opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands e User Log In opens the User Log In dialog box where you enter your user name and password to log into the DX8100 site e User Log Out Logs you out of the DX8100 site e Connect e Disconnect Camera Expands and collapses the Camera tree Channel information Displays icons that represent the configuration of the camera e Recording mode e Re
230. ified location for later retrieval For more information refer to Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export on page 220 Import Setup Opens the DX8100 Setup File Import dialog box for importing a DX8100 system configuration file For more information C2630M C 7 09 refer to Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export on page 220 25 26 View Menu Table D describes the DX8100 View menu commands Table D View Menu Commands 7 of 2 Command Description OSD Opens a submenu with the following choices e Site name A global setting that when selected displays a site s name in the respective view pane e Camera name A global setting that when selected displays a camera s name in the respective view pane e Video recording A global setting that when selected displays an icon in the upper right corner of the pane and enables video recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane e Audio recording A global setting that when selected enables audio recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane The DX8100 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio may not be of the same quality as live audio e PTZ A global setting that when selected displays PTZ if active for the cameras assigned to a view pane e Instant recording A global setting that when selected displays the instant recording icon for the cameras assigned to a view pane e POS A global setting that when sele
231. igure 84 High Sensitivity Setting Level e Figure 85 shows the position of the red sensitivity indicator at a medium 50 sensitivity setting default In this case a motion event is large enough to cause the green motion indicator to surpassed the red sensitivity indicator Figure 85 Adequate Sensitivity Level 118 C2630M C 7 09 5 Click Apply y Channel Informati a NamelCamera St Camela5 Zonet Z Camera Type Lochi Camer Resolution 640 x 40 Frame Rate 15 ffs Recording Mode totion Ai eording Pre Alarm 30 sec nds Post Alarm 60 sefands Linked Alarm 5 IP Camera Status Linked Relay 5 IP Camera Properties Audio Installed E jable r Camera Properties r Motion Detection Selected Channel Camera05 Local Camera y eS Z a pe ye Camera Name Camera 5 ti ee SelectAll Clear Al y E Protocol PELcO C al p D PTZ Locking Auto timeout 10 Sec z S Panl PanR Titu Tito p Audio Settings PTZ Adjustment Test Pant Pann tity meo Audio Channel I Disable Advanced gt gt o None Vi Dip Switch Address None sa r Video Loss Detection Picture Adjustment Video Loss Loss of synchronization Bri m Current Value I Low level of video tightness aS 0 Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time 7 a same Aa emit A Hue pee o 1128 r Apply to All Cameras 127 0 128 D IV Protocol IV Motion Detection Saturation i IV Came
232. il images Each thumbnail represents the first image recorded during a specified period of time Thumbnails can be expanded and collapsed to represent hourly 10 minute and 1 minute intervals The DX8100 allows sharing of time range search settings between the Thumbnail and Pixel search mode In this case if you initiate a Thumbnail search you can select a preview clip and initiate a Pixel search The Pixel search mode is based on the same time criteria as the preview Thumbnail clip To visually search video using thumbnail images 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button al On the DX8100 Search control click Thumbnail Search button aa i Select a camera from the Site Tree From the drop down box select the date on which you want to begin your search Sig Gk aS Click the thumbnail for the hour you want to begin searching 80 C2630M C 7 09 6 Click the Expand button to change the thumbnail time range to shorter intervals or click the Collapse button to change the C2630M C 7 09 thumbnail time range to longer intervals O ick the Expand button to change from 1 hour intervals to 10 minute intervals e O ick the Expand button again to change from 10 minute intervals to 1 minute intervals e O ick the Collapse button once to change from 1 minute intervals to 10 minute intervals o O ick the Collapse button again to change from 10 minute intervals to 1 hour intervals Click the thumbnail of
233. individual cameras for each recording mode Apply Saves current schedule Frame Rate Configuration Allows configuration of channel resolution and frame rates Configure Relays Allows configuration of relays that have been linked to cameras and alarms 8 8 0 0 O Instant Recording Enables or disables selection of instant recording from the View menu C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP THE CAMERA RECORDING MODE The DX8100 allows you to schedule each camera to record in a single or multiple event mode across a 24 hour timeline Users with Power User access or higher can schedule video recording for one or more cameras Use the Record Mode section near the bottom of the Schedule page to configure the recording mode for each camera This section describes how to schedule a recording mode and includes the following topics e Scheduling a Record Mode e Clearing a Scheduled Recording on page 146 Scheduling a Record Mode The DX8100 allows you to schedule a camera for multiple event recording In this case pre event motion alarm or ATM POS recording is set at the frame rate of the active record mode when the alarm motion or ATM POS event occurred For example if the DX8100 HVR is recording at 1 ips in the Normal record mode when an alarm event occurs video is recorded at 1 ips during the pre event time period After the pre event time period expires the recording rate switches to the frame rate confi
234. information about view panels and panes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 Allows users with access rights to operate camera lens control features and to program PTZ presets patterns auxiliary outputs and tours This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ control panel For information about how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 Index View Panel Allows users with access rights to search motion and alarm events within a 24 hour period specified in the playback timeline By default this panel is not displayed Playback Timeline Displays a 24 hour timeline marked with color coded video events Allows users with Standard User access rights to select a date and time for playback This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback timeline For information about how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 Playback Control Panel Provides buttons for users with access rights to control video playback Includes forward and reverse playback and still image It also provides controls for playback speed and volume This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback timeline control panel For info
235. io media formats It is designed to recognize and verify the digital watermark that is embedded in DX8000 Series HVR native video Watermarking is used to authenticate the originality of a video file and to alert users of possible image tampering The viewer application runs automatically each time a CD or DVD created by the DX8100 s export feature is inserted into a Windows based computer The software can also be installed on a computer and opened independently when necessary DX8100 MOBILE CLIENT The DX8100 Mobile Client allows you to view live video remotely from multiple cameras and sites Networking capabilities include local connection using wire bound or wireless local area network LAN technologies or remote connection using the Internet The DX8100 Mobile Client software runs on a standard pocket PC based personal digital assistant PDA and it can display a single channel of real time video from any camera attached to any DX8100 HVR on the network Features include hierarchical organization of multiple sites built in security through password protection and an adjustable viewing area including full screen view C2630M C 7 09 13 DX8100 WEB CLIENT The DX8100 Web Client allows you to view live video and operate pan tilt and zoom PTZ features of cameras attached to DX8100 HVRs Using a standard Web browser you can remotely monitor up to 16 cameras from up to five DX8100 HVR servers simultaneously Each DX8100 HVR can support up to
236. ion Drag cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel until cameras have been assigned to all panels From the Min and Sec drop down boxes select the amount of time the sequence instance will remain on the monitor Click Modify Click Save The Save dialog box open 4 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence list 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply 232 C2630M C 7 09 7 Click Apply in the External Monitor page 3c Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel fa Elfo A Else Override monitor output in response to this type of es nt Sequence No Motion alarm override dwell time Sequence Table o1 O Min 30 Sec oO 2 D Min 30 Sec CEI iin Sec oe OARS 4 gt Load Save g Delete App pl Alarm input 1 y 1 60 Second Figure 177 Modify a Mapping Sequence Deleting a Sequence Instance from the List To delete a sequence instance from the list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Manual Camera Mapping Mode section do the following a In the Sequence Table click the check box next to the sequence instance you want to delete b Click Delete c Click Save The Save profile dialog box opens 4 Select an existing profi
237. ion Live Enters the display mode and opens the DX8100 main window where live and playback video is displayed e Live mode Allows all users to view live video e Playback mode Allows users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher to play back recorded video fy Search Enters the search mode and opens the Search window providing access to search features Users with Standard User access and higher are allowed to search video data using specific criteria Y Setup Enters the setup mode and opens the Setup dialog box to the Camera page default view and allows access to the other pages Users with Power User access and higher are allowed to set up the features and options for the HVR SN Export Enters the export mode where you configure the export options and parameters Print Enters the print mode where you print the selected video image Ll Single Division Displays one camera E 4 Division Displays four cameras simultaneously quad display ES 9 Division Displays nine cameras simultaneously ES 16 Division Displays 16 cameras simultaneously 25 Division Displays 25 images Each HVR accommodates up to 32 cameras You can display images from the local and remote DX8100 HVRs Use the expansion unit to increase DX8108 from 8 to 24 camera inputs or the DX8116 from 16 to 32 camera inputs 36 Division Displays 36 images Each HVR accommodates up to 32 cameras You can display images from the local and remote DX8100 H
238. ion Setup tab Do the following a Click the To check box b In the drop down box select the group to which you want to send event notifications c Optional If you want to e mail a copy of the event notification to another group of users click the CC check box d In the drop down box select the group you want to copy Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup Disable Notification Enable Notification Full name E mail Address To E sScuity Department cc in 8100 Emergency E mail Notification maifSMTP fmtpdomaint pelco com I7 My E mail Server Requires Authentication Server address femtp domaint pelco com E Figure 185 Sending E mails to Groups 249 Administering and Maintaining the DX8100 This section describes how to perform DX8100 system administration and periodic maintenance including the following topics e Updating the DX8100 Server and Client Applications e Recovering a Password on page 252 UPDATING THE DX8100 SERVER AND CLIENT APPLICATIONS Software updates are available for both the DX8100 Series HVR server and client applications These updates are free and are available on the product resource disc or online at pelco com software downloads dvr Contact Pelco Product Support for more information When an update is issued it must be loaded onto a single DX8100 HVR server Once installed on a server
239. ion about setting up auto login refer to Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User on page 214 The Guest account has Restricted user access Table BC describes the default user group access rights Table BC Default User Group Access Rights UsarGimegs Live Raconted Oral Soarch Backup System poa Remove use Et Video Video System Users Properties Administrators Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Power Users Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Standard Users Y Y Y Y Restricted Users Y Guest Users Y DEFINITION OF CAMERA SECURITY ACCESS The administrator can limit the cameras that users are allowed to view Access to a camera is determined by its security designation The Admin user can configure access rights to any user group for any of the following functions e Camera security e View live video e Operate PTZ e Playback video e Set PTZ e Access export menu Only users with High Security access can view cameras designated as High Security Medium Security cameras can be viewed by users with Medium Security access and higher All users can view Low Security cameras All users can view No Security cameras If you do not want video from a low security level camera to be viewed by the Guest user set the security level for that cameras to medium or higher Table BD describes the default camera security levels and user access Table BD Default Camera Security Levels
240. ion view e AUX OFF 16 division view INSTALLING OR UPDATING DEVICE PROTOCOLS The DX8100 uses dynamic link library DLL files to support the various ATM dome and keyboard device protocols The DX8100 is shipped with a default set of protocols and devices for Pelco and other manufacturers As new devices or updates are made available the DX8100 allows you to install new or update existing device protocols to support the devices e DLL files for Pelco devices supported by the DX8100 are provided by Pelco e DLL files for other manufacturer devices supported by the DX8100 are provided by the respective vendor To install or update a device PTZ POS or keyboard in the DX8100 1 Insert the CD containing the Pelco DLL files in the DX8100 CD drive 2 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 3 Click Install The Protocol Install dialog box opens 4 Click Browse and locate the DLL files for the device 5 Click Update 6 Click Exit C2630M C 7 09 DATA BACKUP SETUP Video data recorded on the DX8100 can be backed up to a variety of media The backup process involves selecting a specific time range for archival and the type of media to be used The primary difference between backing up and exporting video is performing a backup archives all channels for a specific time period while exporting only archives selected channels Following the directions below Power User and Administrato
241. ions are as follows e All e None e Motion e Alarm in e ATM POS e Video Loss Select an event from the listing On the playback control click the Forward button J to begin viewing OPERATING PLAYBACK DIGITAL ZOOM Video playback can be zoomed using a control keypad or the mouse when the DX8100 is in the Playback or Search mode In Playback mode the on screen PTZ feature is replaced with the mouse activated digital zoom Playback digital zoom is also available in Search mode For information about the Playback mode refer to Working in Search Mode on page 77 For information about the Search mode refer to Working in Search Mode on page 77 The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to operate playback digital zoom and includes the following topics C2630M C 7 09 Zoom Using the Digital Zoom Control Zoom Using the Mouse on page 75 Panning a Zoomed Image on page 76 Working in Playback Mode on page 68 Working in Search Mode on page 77 13 ZOOM USING THE DIGITAL ZOOM CONTROL The digital zoom feature is accessible when the DX8100 is in the Playback or Search mode For information about the Playback mode refer to Working in Playback Mode on page 68 For information about the Search mode refer to
242. isconnect a mapped drive to disconnect 7 Inthe Device Selection section click the check box for the device to which you want the data backed up 8 Click OK The Backup schedule table is displayed the newly scheduled backup time range is listed in the table and the selection check box is marked 9 Click Apply EDITING AN EXISTING BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8100 allows you to edit or delete an existing backup schedule To edit a backup schedule 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Backup button 2 The Backup schedule page is displayed 3 In the Backup schedule table do the following a Click the backup schedule time range you want to edit b Click Edit The Edit Backup Schedule dialog box opens displaying the current settings for the selected backup schedule r Backup schedule Backup start time_ _ Backup time Filter Target device 13 42 13 42 13 43 81 1 REMOVALDRY 13 44 All 1 REMOVALDRY Name Daily Backup Daily Backup Instant Backup Delete Edit Add Figure 161 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule c Edit the backup parameters d Click OK The Edit Backup Schedule dialog box closes and the backup configuration screen is displayed The updated schedule details are displayed in the Backup schedule table 4 Click Apply 204 C2630M C 7 09 DELETING AN
243. ive button El or the Search button a Click the Forward button JJ if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode Select a camera from the Site Tree Locate the timeline slider at the beginning of the range you want to bookmark You can use the drop down box and spinner buttons above the timeline to locate a bookmark 97 5 Click A red bookmark flag appears on the timeline Figure 60 Setting a Starting Bookmark 6 Locate the timeline slider at the end of the range you want to bookmark 7 Click the Add Bookmark button The bookmark flag and the region between bookmarks turn gray Exporting a bookmarked region of video requires start and end bookmarks If only one bookmark is set video will not be marked for export 8 Repeat steps 4 7 for each additional region you want to bookmark for that camera 9 Click the Forward button Jr if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 8 if you are in Search mode 10 Click the Export button and follow the directions in Performing the Export on page 102 CLEARING BOOKMARKS This section describes how to clear bookmarks and includes the following topics e Clearing a Single Bookmark on page 98 e Clearing All Bookmarks on page 98 Clearing a Single Bookmark To clear a single bookmark 1 Select a bookmark flag from the timeline The bookmark flag should change to a light green color 2 Click the Remove Bookmark button to remove the selected b
244. k box for each channel you want to monitor for video loss detection events e Click Select All to monitor all channels for video loss detection e Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply SETTING UP E MAIL NOTIFICATION GROUPS The DX8100 allows you to set up groups to send an emergency notification to multiple users The DX8100 supports the following e You can create up to 32 e mail notification groups e Upto 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group e A group can be notified in response to an alarm or motion detection event This section describes how to set up e mail notification groups and includes the following topics e Adding an E mail Notification Group e Modifying an E mail Group Name e Deleting an E mail Group on page 244 Adding Members to an E mail Group on page 245 Deleting Members from an E mail Group on page 246 e Modifying E mail Group Member Attributes on page 247 Adding an E mail Notification Group To add an e mail notification group 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b Click Add Group The Manage Groups dialog box opens c Enter the name of the group Group names can
245. k button E The Network page is displayed 3 Click the Network tab if it is not already selected 4 Enter anew name for your HVR in the Site Name box Site names can be up to 30 characters in length the default site name is DX8100 5 Enter a unique System ID for your HVR in the System ID field System IDs must start with a letter be 15 characters or less and not include spaces or special characters Your HVR s site name is used to identify your system to clients and other DX8100 servers Your HVR s system ID is used to uniquely identify your system on a LAN System IDs are required to prevent possible conflicts with other network devices 168 C2630M C 7 09 6 Set up the For information about setting up DHCP or static IP addressing refer to Setting Up DHCP on page 169 or Setting Up a Static IP Address on page 170 Petwork DNSAMINS Port Device NTP Site Name oxei00 System ID oxe100_s147 F Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP P 0 oe oe fe emo on Default Gateway DX8100 Base Port ooz Software Upgrade Port 9003 Information Port os Figure 140 Network Setup Page Setting Up DHCP Your network must support DHCP and an active DCHP server must be present for dynamic addressing to work If you select DHCP and your network does not include an active DHCP server the IP address settings will default to addresses in the 169 254 x x range Consult your network administrator for more information
246. l IV Finish on End Date Record Mode JE Normal IM Motion JE Alarm FP armPos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 21 2 23 24 y Pm Figure 124 Month View Page Single Day Schedule C2630M C 7 09 151 152 Copying and Applying Schedule Attributes To copy the schedule attributes of one day and apply them to a different day 1 2 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button The Schedule page is displayed Right click the calendar day you want to copy Select Copy from the shortcut menu lt Back January 2004 Next gt OPE 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 ER Revert to daily schedule 23 24 31 Figure 125 Month View Calendar Shortcut Menu Right click on the calendar day to which you want to apply the copied schedule attributes Select Paste from the shortcut menu Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen To change a custom schedule day to a regular schedule day right click and select Revert to daily schedule from the shortcut menu EDITING SCHEDULES This section describes how to edit a schedule to change its profile or delete a schedule The following topics are included Changing an Existing Schedule Profile Deleting an Existing Schedule Profile on page 153 Changing an Existing Schedule Profile To change a profile 1
247. l Display Gard seses sperite naani a a Rah ee 21 Contiguring the Dual Display Card oss cdceg a ee nda ged Bada seg oes 21 Understanding the DX8100 Application Window oooooooccocoococc te tebe bette eee eee 22 Description of the DX8100 Main Window 22 DX9100 Menu Bala dd fae beac a Dt A anda he Stee 25 DX8100 Toolbar sour nasa 28 Displaying the DX8100 Window from a Page 0 ccc nanninannan EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 29 Description of Operating MGdeS cinc wins nue xa ad eae a ea Raat aieuatn cece A seals a Blea ee 29 Displaying Video in full screen View 29 Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views 2 0 0 0 0c ccc ccoo rr 30 Understanding View Panes and Panels 2 0 0 0 0 c cece cee e eben e nett e eben e beeen eee 30 Working with View Panes and Panels o 30 Configuring View Panels s ssa assivaemte oe Qaeda A Ron Rew denies beans Goad epee abated 31 Navigating View Panel 24 a a dade a c dada 31 Mapping Channels on the Extended Monitor 0 nnana anaana aanu 34 Viewing Video on The Extended Monitor 36 Modifying an Extended Monitor View 36 Working withthe MET a bic fee em A fading ede T EE TE E do ci aa des 37 Assigning Cameras to View Panes ooo 39 Seting Up LINKS e cte a li ston pa P EE eco nbd dada deta da te acca aha 39 Removing LNK ct erences A nea ee aan GES 40 Workingiin Eve View Mode lt 5 2uecued aes A A Seid eee kate Okada A Ad 42 Assigning and Removing Cameras from View
248. le or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence list 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 233 7 Click Apply at the bottom of the External Monitor page Manual Camera Mapping Mode paeromsonseete 7 EA EE AER EE Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Sequence Table Fe O 1 aaa 2 D Min 1 Sec O 3 OMin 7 Sec Add Modify Delete Ch 3 YN Sequence No 2 0 Min 1 Sec Load Save Delete Apply Override monitor output in response to this type of event Alarm input Motion alarm override dwell time 1 zi 17 60 Seconf Figure 178 Delete a Mapping Sequence Appending an Existing Sequence List To append an existing sequence list to the current list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Ext Monitor button The External Output page is displayed 3 Click Load The Load profile dialog box opens 4 Select a profile 5 Click OK The Append to list dialog box opens 6 Click Yes to add the new sequences to the existing list 7 To add delete or modify sequence instances follow the directions in the sections above 8 Click Save 9 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name to save the sequence list 10 Click OK 11 Click Apply in the Sequence Table section 12 Click Apply C2630M C 7 09
249. lected 4 Enter an IP address range to search for HVR sites a Enter the first three octets of the IP range you want to search for example 10 10 1 b Enter the beginning value for the search range in the fourth octet for example 001 c Enter the final value for the search range in the box provided for example 254 Each octet of the IP address must be an integer number between 1 and 255 5 Click Find and then wait while the DX8100 searches the network for remote HVR sites 6 Select the HVR site s you want to add to the site list 7 Click Add 8 Click Apply Site Information Site IP list Manual gt 70 1061 Cok Nowe Add gt gt OX8100Labf10 106 12 213 IP Address DX8100 Base Port Upgrade Port Information Port Search DX8100 I Server on NAT G 10 107 1 5 55 Find IP MAC 10 107 11 164 00 13D4 6 1C Add Group Camera Seb tion Setting E Ll F F fa Lal F FCs F r da rc E F F r r E r F r F E r r r F r gt F r a r a Figure 166 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address 216 C2630M C 7 09 FINDING ACTIVE REMOTE CAMERAS After connecting to a remote site you should query the server to determine which cameras are active HVRs can have 8 16 24 or 32 channels To determine which cameras are active 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Site Setup button A 3 Select the Manual button if it is no
250. led analog camera can be reassigned to the Site Tree For information about restoring a disabled analog camera refer to Restoring a Disabled Analog or IP Camera on page 131 Disabling an IP Camera Disabling an IP camera does not delete its customized settings For example you can temporarily disable an IP camera to recover system resources For information about other reasons to disable an IP camera refer to About Analog and IP Camera Channel Configurations on page 123 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Camera Properties section do the following a Inthe Site Tree select an IP camera The IP camera name is displayed in the Selected Channel drop down box b Select Disable in Camera page Selected Channel drop down box Camera Properties Camera Name Sarix IXSO Camera SAARE ae i Figure 100 Disabling an IP Camera C2630M C 7 09 3 Click Apply The IP camera is removed from the Site Tree but it is still assigned to the channel in the IP Camera Properties dialog box The IP camera can be reassigned to the Site Tree For information about restoring a disabled IP camera refer to Restoring a Disabled Analog or IP Camera on page 131 Deleting an IP Camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click IP Camera Properties The IP Camera Properties dialog box appears 3 In the IP Camera Properties
251. lete 22 This section describes the DX8100 main window and includes the following topics DX8100 Menu Bar on page 25 DX8100 Toolbar on page 28 Displaying the DX8100 Window from a Page on page 29 Description of Operating Modes on page 29 Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 C2630M C 7 09 Figure 3 shows the parts of the DX8100 main window 3 Parar ON 02 03 04 05 05 07 08 09 10 11 1213 1415161710122 234 Ett dd tt Figure 3 DX8100 HVR Main Window C2630M C 7 09 23 24 Table A describes the parts o the DX8100 application window Table A Parts ofthe DX8100 Application Window Item Part Description O Title Bar Displays the DX8100 application title O Menu Bar Provides access to drop down menus 3 Toolbar Provides access to display setup export and search tools O Site Tree Displays top down hierarchical management of DX8100 resources such as servers cameras alarms and relays O View Panels Display live and playback video from attached cameras A view panel consists of view panes PTZ Control Panel e View pane A view pane is a division of a view panel Each view pane contains only a single camera channel Up to 36 view panes can fit in a single view panel e View panel A view panel is made up of the entire DX8100 viewing area View panels are divided into multiple panes A panel can display from one to 36 individual cameras For additional
252. lick the Schedule button C 3 In the Camera Settings Panel from the Instant Recording drop down box select Enable Disabling Instant Recording To disable the Instant Recording mode 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Schedule button C 3 In the Camera Settings Panel from the Instant Recording drop down box select Disable ADDING INSTANT RECORDING TO OSD To add the Instant Recording icon to the OSD e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Instant Recording The Instant Record icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the view pane STARTING AND STOPPING INSTANT RECORDING The Instant Recording mode must first be enabled from the Schedule page and the Instant Recording icon must be visible in the lower right corner of the view pane For more information about DX8100 instant recording refer to Instant Recording on page 47 For information about OSD refer to Live View On Screen Display OSD on page 46 Figure 17 shows the Record and Instant Record icons Figure 17 Activating Instant Recording C2630M C 7 09 Table O describes the recording indicators Table 0 Recording Indicators Item Icon Description 1 REC Indicates camera recording mode and status A blinking REC indicator signifies event recording e Green indicates normal recording e Blue indicates motion recording e Red
253. log box opens 7 Make sure the correct data format name appears in the Data Format Name box 8 Perform the edits 9 Do one of the following e To accept the changes click OK e To not accept the changes click Cancel C2630M C 7 09 189 190 Deleting a Data Format To de A Ze ete an existing data format n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Data Format tab The Data Format List page is displayed n the Data Format List highlight the name of a data format Click Delete A DX8100 message box is displayed prompting you to confirm deletion of the data format Do one of the following e To delete the data format click Yes e To not accept the deletion click No or Cancel Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device After you have created a data format you can assign it to a specific ATM POS device To assign an existing data format to a specific ATM POS device 2 n the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed n the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device n the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Settings tab The Available ATM POS Device
254. mages and the transmission interval 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 In the Option section of the Emergency Agent page enter the amount of time in seconds that you want the DX8100 to continue sending still images after an alarm motion or video loss event has been detected 4 Enter the time interval in seconds that you want the DX8100 to wait between sending each still image 5 Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 237 EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION SETUP 238 The DX8100 can be configured to send e mail notifications alerting users of motion alarm and video loss events Users with Power User access and higher can configure the notification function Notifications can be sent to a single e mail address or a group of addresses either immediately after an event occurs or periodically according to a predefined schedule You can configure up to 32 e mail groups and up to 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group Before sending notifications you must provide information about your e mail server and establish the events motion alarm and video loss that you want to include in the e mail message Timing and frequency of the e mail notifications must also be set You should test the e mail notification function immediately after configuration to ensure your system is set up correctly NOTES
255. me EE Add gt gt 0X81 00Lab 10 106 12 213 IP Address 6a oxet00 Base Por 5002 amp Upgrade Port 5003 Information Port 8005 6c p Search DXB100 I Server on NAT Name IP MAC Address J TE Camera Selection Setting I Camera 1 l Camera 2 I Camera 3 I Camera 4 I Camera 5 I Camera 6 I Camera I Camera 8 F Camera 9 I Camera 10 I Camera 11 I Camera 12 IF Camera 13 F Camera 14 F Camera 15 F Camera 16 I Camera 17 FT Camera 18 I Camera 19 M Camera 20 F Camera 21 T Camera 22 I Camera 23 I Camera 24 I Camera 25 I Camera 26 Refresh F Camera 27 T Camera 28 T Camera 29 T Camera 30 F Camera 31 M Camera 32 Figure 165 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address C2630M C 7 09 215 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address An Administrator level user can connect DX8100 units even when the exact IP address of a remote HVR is not known To add a site successfully the following items must be established e Each HVR must be attached to the same TCP IP subnet or LAN e The first three octets of the IP address of the HVR host or subnet must be known e The range of addresses used in the last octet of the HVR host or subnet must be known To add a remote HVR site when the IP address is known 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Site Setup button f 3 Select the Search DX8100 button if it is not already se
256. mera repositions to the new preset Figure 24 Activating a Preset C2630M C 7 09 CLEARING A PRESET To clear a preset 1 On the PTZ keypad click the Set button to enter programming mode 2 Click the number of the preset you want to clear from the PTZ keypad 3 Click the Cir button cir 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to clear multiple presets f Set 5 Click the Set button to exit programming mode Figure 25 Clearing a Preset PTZ PATTERNS A pattern is a user defined viewable camera path with a definite beginning and end Patterns are made up of a sequence of standard pan tilt and lens commands Patterns are stored in the internal memory of the PTZ device such as a Spectra dome that is connected to the DX8100 The Spectra IIl supports one pattern and the Spectra IIl SE supports up to four unique PTZ patterns Depending on the type and configuration of the PTZ device the DX8100 can address up to four unique PTZ patterns Once defined a pattern can be activated with a series of on screen commands A pattern will run continuously until it is deactivated Only PTZ enabled cameras that support pattern programming through D P Coaxitron or supported third party protocols can use this feature The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt
257. motion detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work 6 Click Apply Poo CAMERAD Camera Name C mera 1 Linked PTZ Setting Linked Camera Channel ob E C Linked Camera Pattern Not in use y Figure 114 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Motion Events C2630M C 7 09 139 140 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events To link an alarm input to a camera so activation of the alarm results in a repositioning of that camera 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Linking button ee The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Alarm Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an alarm from the Alarm Channel drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to an alarm input detected by the source alarm To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to an
258. n e Spanish Click Update The Restart dialog box opens Click Yes The changes are applied and the DX8100 restarts SETTING THE SYSTEM TIME Be sure to set the system time before using the DX8100 setting the internal clock for each HVR on the network ensures that each unit accurately reflects the local time This section describes how to set the DX8100 system time and includes the following topics Setting System Time Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time on page 225 C2630M C 7 09 Setting System Time Pelco recommends that the system time be configured only at the DX8100 server System page Only Administrator access or higher can change the system time If a subsequent attempt is made to set the system clock to a time earlier than the current time the DX8100 server will display the Confirm dialog box to alert the user The user will then be prompted to do one of the following e Accept the new system time and delete data recorded between the current time and the newly set time If this option is accepted the data is deleted and the DX8100 automatically restarts e Accept the new system time with the following conditions Previously recorded data will not be deleted The DX8100 will not record new data until the system time passes the time that data was previously recorded For example if data was recorded at 3 00 p m and at that time the system time was reset to 2 30 p m the DX8100 will not commence recordi
259. n be expanded and collapsed to represent hourly 10 minute and 1 minute intervals POS Search Allows users to search ATM POS transaction text data Pixel Search Allows users to search any 24 hour period of recorded video automatically for changes in screen pixels View Window Displays search video image thumbnails and pixel grid Site Tree Facilitates top down hierarchical management of DX8100 resources such as servers cameras alarms and relays Event Index Panel Select All Check Box Lists motion and alarm events over the 24 hour time period specified in the playback timeline Enables playback for all visible view panels when selected If this check box is deselected only the selected channel will play This control is only available while using Index Search Playback Timeline Displays a 24 hour timeline marked with color coded video events Allows user to select a date and time for playback 81686 0 9 0000 Playback Control Provides buttons to control video playback Includes forward and reverse playback and still image Also Panel provides controls for playback speed and volume Playback Zoom Provides access to digital zoom features during playback Control Search Control Provides access to the index thumbnail POS and pixel search controls DISPLAYING A DEINTERLACED IMAGE IN THE SEARCH MODE If you are searching for an image that is recorded at 4CIF at a low frame
260. n the Information Port box enter a new information port 9005 is the default 4 To set the network bandwidth throttle to limit the amount of network resources allocated to client connections drag the network bandwidth throttle slider to the desired value Client bandwidth can be adjusted from a minimum of 64 Kbps to a maximum of 10 Mbps in increments of 64 Kbps 5 Click Apply WORKING WITH MULTICASTING The DX8100 supports a layer 2 multicast feature that allows the multicast and unicast mode to co exist In this case the DX8100 Web Client and DX8100 Client software can connect to a DX8100 server simultaneously The recommended multicasting IP range is from 224 0 1 1 to 224 0 1 253 If the DX8100 server is not configured to operate in the multicast mode then the DX8100 network automatically uses the unicast protocol C2630M C 7 09 The DX8100 layer 2 multicast feature conserves bandwidth and reduces network traffic by simultaneously delivering one stream of data to an unlimited number of connections This section describes the DX8100 layer 2 multicasting feature and is organized into the following topics e Multicast Requirements e Enabling Multicasting on page 171 Multicast Requirements The DX8100 multicast feature has the following requirements Table AQ DX8100 Multicast Requirements and Operation Item Description Network equipment The switch or router must support layer 2 multicasting Network requirements
261. n the same day of every month or the same day every year To set the HVR to record on a specific day 1 2 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button fi The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected Select Custom Mode from the drop down box Click New The New File Name dialog box opens Enter a new file name for the profile The profile file name follows the standard Windows file naming conventions Click OK Select Once Per Month or Once Per Year Select the date range for the custom schedule a Set the start date with the Start spinner buttons The start date cannot be set later than the end date b If you want the schedule to recur indefinitely deselect the Finish on End Date check box c Set the end date with the End spinner buttons On the calendar click the desired date Select the recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule Refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 145 for instructions Click Save Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 14 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen O View Year View Back August 2005 Next Es eae ea 2 3 4 5 6 Custom z E New Save aj Delete Apply Once Per Month Once Per Year 14 15 107 17 18 19 20 10 Start 08 2005 End 08 2005 E
262. ned 192 modifiers 195 overview 84 89 191 audio 119 audio indicator 46 audio listening to 121 auxiliary feature external equipment 61 how used 61 protocols supported 61 backed up data backup schedule creating 202 deleting 205 editing 204 instant starting 205 overview 202 media device selecting 207 overview 201 viewing 109 201 207 backed up video working with 96 109 207 bandwidth throttle options 170 base port 170 baud rate 180 181 C calendar See schedule camera alarm input linking to camera 39 assigning all cameras to view panes 39 assigning to a view pane 39 42 D P or Coaxitron protocol support 53 event detection repositioning PTZ preset patterns linked to alarm events 140 ATM POS events 141 motion events 139 video loss events 142 expanded audio 119 external event recording alarm event linking multiple cameras to record 137 254 ATM POS event linking multiple cameras to record 137 motion event linking multiple cameras to record 136 video loss event linking multiple cameras to record 138 IP camera setting up 122 123 lens adjusting 51 mapping 229 motion detection zones 118 PC keyboard using shortcuts to operate PTZ and lens functions 52 PTZ protocols 116 Coaxitron DX8100PELCO C D protocol DX8100PELCO D disable protocol DX8100NO PTZ P protocol DX8100PELCO P recording modes 144 relay linking tocamera 40 remote setup using preset 95 53 remote accessing programming features 58 removing f
263. nfigure Install Device configuration button that opens the Device Configuration dialog box The Device Configuration dialog box performs two functions depending on the type of device selected e KBD300A and dome devices only displays device configuration information e ATM POS devices allows you to configure ATM POS device options and parameters for the selected device Protocol installation button that opens the Protocol Install dialog box The Protocol Install dialog box allows you to do the following e View the current device protocols already installed e Update the device protocols Interface Mode Interface mode drop down box that allows you to select the serial data standard for the selected device The DX8100 supports COM1 RS 232 and Port 1 to Port 4 RS 422 RS 485 O O Baud Rate Baud rate drop down box that allows you to select the baud rate for each device Available baud rates are as follows 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 28800 38400 57600 or 115200 Q Parity Parity drop down box You select the parity for none odd or even O Data Bits Data bits drop down box Configure the number of data bits for 5 6 7 or 8 O Stop Bits Stop bits drop down box Select the number of stop bits for 1 or 2 Table AS describes the ports and the associated serial data communication standard they support For COM1 RS 232 is the default serial data standard For Port 1 to 4 RS 422 and RS 485 are the
264. ng again until the system time passes 3 00 p m If the user changes the system time from the Windows Control Panel the data recording protection feature described above is defeated resulting in impairment of the recording time line Without notice previously recorded data can be overwritten by new data To set the system time 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 9 The System page is displayed 3 In the Date Time Setup section do the following a In the Date Time drop down box select the current month day and year b Select the current time WARNING Attempting to set the system clock to a time earlier than the current system time will require that you either perform one of two options delete all data recorded between the current time and the new time or do not delete previously recorded data and begin recording only after the system time has passed the recorded time One exception to this rule involves Daylight Saving Time For more information refer to the Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time on page 225 c Click Update d In the Time zone drop down box select the correct time zone e Click Update 4 Click Apply Date Time Setup Date Time Wednesday August 03 2005 X 3 40 03 PM Update Time zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana Y Update Figure 172 System Setup Time Working with Standard and
265. nput You can assign one camera to record video in association with the audio input Audio output Allows you to connect an audio output device such as an amplifier to listen to recorded video and audio simultaneously e Optional expanded audio input To use the DX8100 expanded audio feature the optional DX8100 AUD audio card must be installed You can determine if the audio card is installed by checking the Audio option status in the Channel Information section of the Camera page The Audio status is one of the following Not installed If the optional audio card is not installed the Advanced button in the Audio Settings area is available installed enabled If the optional audio card is installed the Advanced button in the Audio Settings area is not available The DX8100 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio that may not be of the same quality as live audio Consult your Pelco sales representative for more information regarding the DX8100 AUD option C2630M C 7 09 119 This sections describes how to setup the audio feature and is organized into the following sections e Setting Up the Standard Audio Options e Setting Up the Expanded Audio Options on page 121 e Listening to Live Audio at the Server on page 49 Setting Up the Standard Audio Options By default the DX8100 supports two standard audio inputs if the expanded audio card is not installed If the expanded audio card is installed the two
266. nt a tala Nolan RAE vom baie ale ated 73 Operating Playback Digital Zom fies 4a as A A ake fad aaa See Nee cea dn eae 73 Zoom Using the Digital Zoom COntrOl ceca ir sae ab laa dida 74 Zoom Using the Mousie chelsea hah eet dei ee A Be ete i tek Sg lena E oa et ale a ene wale e Cd 75 PANNING zoomed IMAGE kiaia oipe A A Sl e aAA EE E e 76 Working Search Mode a att lesa iaai 77 SEAICHIWVINdOW ie cits naaa a adora lo ba ida E A E RE tale E 77 Displaying a Deinterlaced Image in the Search Mode 2 0 0 coco rr 78 Reusing the Search limes RA sais Guineas tee AA Raa oe SiS oes Win EEL e e Wie a alate es 78 Index Video SECO aia hiker a sa 79 Thumbnail Video Search its acd oats Aste aes ratas ada wile aia ele ikea Wiad oe a a 80 POS SAIC bento pape earner ica eae awe sale eee Se cal ae Si td eee ae aa ts As ad ahs TN le i a ae 82 Understanding the POS Search MW A ao 82 Searching and Displaying POS Data by Device Name 2 corr 85 Searching by POS Transaction Number 87 Searching for All Transactions with Exceptions oooooocococooo o 88 Searching for Transactions That Satisfy Specific Exceptions 00 0 0 02 rre 89 Searching for Transactions by Line Item ooo 90 Searching for Transactions by Action Code 0 0 6 nnn nett n ene ee 91 Pixel Video AAA A A 93 Searching Video Based on Changes in Screen Pixels 2 20 00 ccc rr 93 Miewinig a VideouTMumbiialll Altea Ma take en es Mia a da e ta ea le a ao LS 95 C2630M
267. o be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to an ATM POS input detected by the source ATM POS device To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to an ATM POS input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 e To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to ATM POS input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Click Apply ATM POS Link Settings ATM POS Address AIM POSOI ATM POS Name farmoPosor gS m Linked PTZ Setting Linked Camera Ct came aor q Linked Camera Preset Not in use Linked Camera Pattem ranas Figure 116 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events 141 142 Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events To link a video loss event to a camera so the detected video loss event results in a repositioning of that camera 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Set
268. odify a user s e mail address or group affiliation 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Do the following a In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Click the e mail address of the user you want to edit c Click Edit The E mail Settings dialog box opens d In the Group drop down box select a different group for the user e If necessary enter a new e mail address for the user in the E mail Address box 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply C2630M C 7 09 m Mail Group Security Department A Emal Gop bwade pelco com Security Department smite pelco com Security Departmen I Figure 183 Modify Member Attributes 247 248 SENDING E MAIL NOTIFICATIONS This section describes how to send e mail notifications and includes the following topics e Sending E mail Notifications to Individuals on page 248 e Sending E mail Notifications to Groups on page 249 Sending E mail Notifications to Individuals To configure e mail notifications to send alerts to an individual 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup ta
269. of the following a To accept backup schedule options 1 Click Estimated Backup Size The Estimated Backup Size dialog box opens displaying backup details 2 Read the backup information and verify that the selected backup device provides adequate space to receive the backed up data 3 Click OK 4 Click OK to accept the defaults for the time setting channel record type and categories The backup starts immediately or b To customize the backup options 1 Change the backup time range channel record type and category 2 Click Estimated Backup Size The Estimated Backup Size dialog box opens displaying backup details 3 Read the backup information and verify that the selected backup device provides adequate space to receive the backed up data 4 Click OK 5 Click OK The backup starts immediately C2630M C 7 09 205 Device Selection 1 r Time Setting 9 E amp CO R AW O NEC DVD_RW ND 3550A DVD R RW NEC DVD_RW ND 3550A 5 62 HARD DISK DRIVES ji e Mic 5 0 non E fa NOT INSTALLED GF a rl GF Gel Time 12 4 fr gt fs aan Peer ie a Peper rete ejeje am meeta Bislzislalsinte Map a network dive Discomectmeppeddive Categories alRecodng y g Estimated Backup Size Cancel Figure 162 Instant Record Backup Now Dialog Box MAPPING A NETWORK DEVICE The DX8100 allows you to map to or disconnect from a network drive You need to know the drive
270. om the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed Click the Month View tab if it is not currently selected Select All days Weekday or Weekends from the drop down box Click New The New File Name dialog box opens In the New File Name box enter a new filename for the profile The profile file name follows the standard Windows file naming conventions Click OK Using your mouse select the recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule For information about camera scheduling refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 145 Click Save Click Apply Click the Apply button at the bottom of the Schedule page Month View Year View O lt Back August 2005 Next gt AugWeekends E New Save Delete Apply Once Per Month Once Per Year Start 08 2005 End 08 2005 Jv Finish on End Date Figure 123 Month View Page Multi Day Schedule 149 150 Creating Single Day Schedules This section describes how to create a single day schedule and includes the following topics Working with Single Day Schedules Copying and Applying Schedule Attributes on page 152 Working with Single Day Schedules Custom Mode schedules are defined for single days only A custom scheduled day can be set to recur o
271. on and the actual record rate is 1 image per second ips In this case live video for channel 1 is displayed at 15 ips Additionally the capture card provides a BNC analog output of the live video image The analog image is the same as the image displayed on the VGA monitor The DX8100 External Monitor option allows you to configure how analog video is displayed on an external monitor connected to the capture card For information about the External Monitor feature refer to External Monitor Setup on page 228 e MUX card displays real time video If the DX8100 is equipped with the MUX option real time video from the MUX card s is displayed on the main VGA monitor at 30 ips Real time video is displayed for all the channels regardless of the recording resolution Additionally the MUX Card provides a BNC analog output of the real time video image The analog image is the same as the image displayed on the VGA monitor The analog output does not contain any display icons labels or text but video is displayed on the analog monitor in the same division mode as is displayed on the VGA monitor One operational difference is that the MUX stops the display of real time video if the search mode is active for one channel In this case the capture card s are used to display the video When installing the MUX card option ensure that the MUX Card matches the capture card channel capacity as follows e Ifan8 channel capture card is installed the DX8
272. onding button on the toolbar Table describes the DX8100 operating modes Table I Operating Modes Icon Mode Description Live Enters the display mode and opens the DX8100 main window where live and playback video is displayed e Live mode Allows all users to view live video e Playback mode Allows users with playback access rights to play back recorded video Search Enters the search mode and opens the Search window providing access to search features Allows users with playback access rights to search video data using specific criteria Setup Enters the setup mode and opens the Setup dialog box to the Camera setup page default view and allows access to the other setup pages Users with Power User access and higher are allowed to set up the features and options for the HVR DISPLAYING VIDEO IN FULL SCREEN VIEW The DX8100 allows full screen viewing of video data in the live playback and index search mode providing more screen area to display video Displaying Live Video in Full Screen View To display live video in full window view 1 Select the live video mode For information about working in the playback mode refer to Working in Live View Mode on page 42 2 Select a window division 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Full Screen button 2 Live video is displayed in full screen view To display the DX8100 main window from the full screen view e Right click in the DX8100 window C263
273. ookmark Figure 61 Removing a Single Bookmark Clearing All Bookmarks To clear all bookmarks e Click Remove All Bookmarks 98 C2630M C 7 09 BOOKMARKING AND EXPORTING MULTIPLE CHANNELS The DX8100 allows you to bookmark a video region for one camera and apply that book marked time window to multiple channels This feature is used in conjunction with the export feature For example if you want to export video recorded between 9 00 a m and 9 05 a m for multiple cameras you set the bookmarks for camera 1 at 9 00 a m and 9 05 a m During the export process you can associate that same bookmarked time window with multiple cameras To book mark data and export video for multiple channels 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button al This ensures that the HVR is in the Search mode 2 Select a camera from the Site Tree 3 Locate the timeline slider at the beginning of the range you want to bookmark You can use the drop down box and spinner buttons above the timeline to locate a bookmark 4 To create book marks do the following a Click the Expand Bookmark button A red bookmark flag appears on the timeline b Locate the timeline slider at the end of the range you want to bookmark c Click Expand Bookmark button The bookmark flag and the region between bookmarks turn gray Exporting a bookmarked region of video requires start and end bookmarks If only one bookmark is set video will not be marked for ex
274. ord 18 V video full window view displaying 29 images printing 15 live viewing 19 22 playback viewing 19 video compression 156 video loss detection of 121 emergency notification 235 relay output linking to 136 synchronization loss of 121 video level low 121 video low level 121 view cycle view setup 26 dwell time 26 extended 30 pane panel See pane panel standard 30 viewing area See pane panel W warranty period 15 wildcard character 90 wildcard character 90 wiper operating 61 Z zones motion detection 118 zoom adjusting camera 51 261 C2630M C 7 09 262 PRODUCT WARRANTY AND RETURN INFORMATION WARRANTY Pelco will repair or replace without charge any merchandise proved defective in material or workmanship for a period of one year after the date of shipment Exceptions to this warranty are as noted below e Five years Fiber optic products TW3000 Series unshielded twisted pair UTP transmission products CC3701H 2 CC3701H 2X CC3751H 2 CC3651H 2X MC3651H 2 and C3651H 2X camera models ee years Pelco branded fixed camera models CCC1390H Series C10DN Series C10CH Series IP3701H Series and IX Series EH1500 Series enclosures Spectra IV products including Spectra IV IP Camclosure Series IS ICS IP integrated camera systems DX Series digital video recorders DVR5100 Series digital video recorders Digital Sentry Series hardware products DVX Series di
275. our 62 deleting presets from a tour 64 programming 62 printing 15 protocols D P Coaxitron 53 device installing updating 200 PTZ OSD menu control 58 PTZ presets and patterns alarm events linking to 140 ATM POS events linking to 141 motion events linking to 139 video loss events linking to 142 PTZ protocols testing PTZ functionality 117 reboot automatic automatic reboot 227 C2630M C 7 09 record indicator 46 record rate maximum 160 161 recording mode alarm camera settings supported alarm image quality 156 frame rate during alarm 156 image resolution 156 post motion 156 pre alarm 156 pre alarm frame rate 156 pre alarm image quality 156 ATM POS camera settings supported ATM POS image quality 156 frame rate during ATM POS 156 image resolution 156 post ATM POS 156 pre ATM POS 156 pre ATM POS frame rate 156 pre ATM POS image quality 156 instant 47 instant disabling 48 instant enabling 48 motion camera settings supported frame rate during motion 156 image resolution 156 motion image quality 156 post motion 156 pre motion 156 pre motion frame rate 156 pre motion image quality 156 normal 47 normal camera settings supported frame rate 156 image quality 156 image resolution 156 recording schedule profile 144 scheduled modes 144 145 alarm ATM POS motion normal recording modes 145 recording schedule 143 relays Event Relay Link Settings page accessing 134 linked relay output removing from a camera 40
276. owing topics e Exporting the Current HVR Settings e Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export on page 220 Exporting the Current HVR Settings To save current HVR configuration settings 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button Q The System page is displayed 3 Select the Export button 4 Select the check boxes of each configuration item you want to back up 5 Do one of the following a To specify the file name to which you want to export enter the drive path and file name information into the box Setting file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions for example C DX8100 Jan_2004_config bak or b To browse for a location 1 Click Browse The DX8100 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Entera file name in the File name box 3 Navigate to the drive and folder in which you want to save the settings file 4 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 5 Click Save C2630M C 7 09 219 6 Click Export Now r Export lmport Configuration Export Browse Export Now Import Browse Import Now TF Camera Linking Schedule I User I Monitor TF Emergency I Port J Backup I Site Setup M 05D TF ATM POS FF Select All Figure 168 Exporting HVR Settings Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export To save the current HVR settings 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose Edit g
277. ows the amount of disk space used by recorded video The red indicator marks the current recording position of the disk array blue indicators mark parts of the array that are storing previously recorded video and clear indicates that no video has been recorded in that area of the array C2630M C 7 09 DX8100 MENU BAR This section describes the DX8100 menu bar commands and includes the following topics File Menu on page 25 Edit Menu on page 25 View Menu on page 26 Export Menu on page 27 Favorite Menu on page 27 Help Menu on page 28 File Menu Table B describes the DX8100 File menu commands Table B File Menu Commands Command Description User Log in Opens the User Log In dialog box for entering the user name and password to log in to the DX8100 User Log out Immediately logs the current user out of the DX8100 The system returns to the default mode Software Upgrade Opens the Select Upgrade Package dialog box for selecting the source from which to access files to upgrade the DX8100 software This command is available only when you log in to the DX81000 as Administrator Password Recovery Opens the Password Recovery dialog box for entering the password provided by Pelco Product Support For more information refer to Recovering a Password on page 252 For information about recovering a password contact Pelco Product Support include contact information or a link to the contact information el
278. ox n the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 C2630M C 7 09 7 Do the following a Verify that transaction data is displayed in the ATM POS Raw Data View area b Verify that transaction data as interpreted by the DX8100 is displayed in the Result Box General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics fine Infomanon ATM POS Raw Data View Port COM1 WELCOME CHOCOLATE MILK 802 0 49 5a IRDASTED NUTS 1 79 Mode Single Mode Device ID JATM POS 01 IBACON PREMIUM 3 49 ICHIPS 1 99 ATM POS Name ATM POSO1 MPPLE 0 59 ISUB TOTAL 8 35 Protocol POS GENERAL TAX 0 67 Data Format ER 650 ITOTAL 9 02 ii 7 29 2005 9 13 22 0042 ITHANK YOU ae The Diagnostics Result Box contains the parsed information recevied from the ATM POS device All Clear Result Box START TRANSACTION DVR DATE M D 2005 07 29 DYRA TIME H M S 16 14 02 ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM gt coa Figure 157 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection Recording ATM POS Events To view POS recorded dates the OSD POS view option must be selected at the View menu For information about the POS option refer to View Menu on page 26 To record ATM POS events 1 Setup the ATM POS device communication and do the following a Assign the ATM PO
279. ox c In the Synchronize Time in Intervals H M spin box set the interval in hours and minutes d Click the Enable NTP Service check box Click Apply Enabling Database Overwrite In the event that the DX8100 time is reset to a period earlier than the current time the DX8100 allows you to do one of the following Database Overwrite Enabling this option causes the DX8100 to overwrite previously recorded data coincide with the time at which the clock is turned back For example if at 2 00 p m current time you set back the DX8100 clock to 1 30 p m an earlier time the previously recorded data beginning at 1 30 p m is overwritten Select not to enable Database Overwrite If this option is not enabled previously recorded data is not overwritten For example if at 2 00 p m current time you set back the DX8100 clock to 1 30 p m an earlier time the DX8100 does not record data between 1 30 p m and 2 00 p m In this case any video events occurring during that half hour time period are not recorded Recording does not begin again until after the DX8100 clock exceeds 2 00 p m To enable Database Overwrite 1 Li On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed Click the Database Overwrite check box to select the option C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP PORT AND DEVICE COMMUNICATION
280. page 145 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional day you want to schedule Click Apply Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day To copy the schedule attributes of one day and apply them to a different day i Ze From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed Right click the calendar day you want to copy Select Copy from the shortcut menu January 2004 oe AMO ET EAA IE EA SA 000 900608600 0000660 C Oa ORRA 53 ciena Revert to daily schedule Figure 122 Year View Calendar Shortcut Menu Right click the day on the calendar you want to apply the copied schedule attributes Select Paste from the shortcut menu Click Apply To change a custom schedule day to a regular schedule day right click and select Revert to daily schedule from the shortcut menu C2630M C 7 09 CREATING MONTHLY OR MULTIPLE DAY RECORDING SCHEDULES Unlike schedules set in the Year View Month View schedules are recurrent Schedules can be set for subsequent weekdays weekends everyday or a single day This section describes how to create a monthly or multiple day schedule and includes the following topics Creating Multiple Day Schedules Creating Single Day Schedules on page 150 Creating Multiple Day Schedules To create a recording schedule to recur indefinitely 1 Le 10 11 C2630M C 7 09 Fr
281. played 3 In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialo 156 page g box opens C2630M C 7 09 Setting the Frame Rate The DX8100 Series HVR is optimized to provide 8 16 24 or 32 cameras of continuous video recording with a frame rate of 30 ips at a resolution of 320 x 240 NTSC or 320 x 288 PAL The DX8100 allows you to change the frame rate independent of the resolution For information about accessing the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box refer to Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box To set the frame rate values for cameras 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens Select the button for the recording mode you want to configure Options are as follows e 604 e 704 e Normal e Motion e Alarm e ATM POS Do the following a Using the ALL frame rate settings slider set the frame rate for all channels b To set the frame rate for an individual channel use the frame rate slider for that channel to select a frame rate from 1 30 ips according to the available capacity for the channel The frame rate of an individual channel is limited to the maximum setting of the ALL frame rate slider T
282. port d Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional region you want to bookmark for that camera I Select all S01 C05 Camera 5 08 24 2006 yf 124 for Sj Al 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 V PS O PS O A A OO PS O E E O O S S O A S l Figure 62 Book Marking Multiple Time Regions 5 Click click the Export button The Export Video dialog box opens 6 Do the following a Right click the time range you want to assign to multiple channels The Duplicate Bookmark submenu is displayed r Time Range _ StatDay Start Time EndDay EndTime Name 08 24 2006 08 57 00 000 ch01 082406_084151__ Duplicate Bookmark Delete Item File name Apply Figure 63 Selecting a Time Range for Duplication b Click Duplicate Bookmark The Select Channel dialog box opens c Click the check box for each channel to which you want to assign the book mark region d Click OK The time range for each selected channel is displayed in the Time Range table C2630M C 7 09 99 7 Do the following a In the Device panel click the check box of the desired export device b Click the check box for each time range you want to export 8 Click Export x r Device 1 Time Range 3 69 OPTICAL DISK DRIVES amp CD R RW M1 08242006 08 39 00 000 08 24 2006 09 09 00 000 ch01 082406 083900 E NEC DVD_RW ND 3550A 2 08242006 09 51 00 000 08 24 2006 10 1
283. ra OSD menu choice e Accesses menu option parameters For example point the cursor at the Language option and click Enter accesses the list of available languages Exit N A 2 O Up and Down Buttons Navigate up and down the remote camera OSD menu or cycle through a list of options or parameters O Left and Right Buttons Perform no activity Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu The DX8100 allows you to navigate the remote camera menu system using any of the following e PTZ OSD Menu controls For information about using the PTZ OSD Menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 58 e Keypad controls For information about using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu e Keyboard keys For information about using the keyboard keys refer to Using Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 52 The following procedure instructs you to use the PTZ OSD Menu control to navigate the remote camera programming menu To access a programming menu for a remote camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button 4 2 Drag a remote camera from the Site Tree onto a view panel For certain camera models you can also select preset number 95 from the keypad to access remote setup mode 3 To access remote camera setup mode do one of the following e On the PTZ keypad click the Pgm button Parr e On the PTZ keypad click the Set button E
284. ra Security IV Audio Settings 127 0 128 0 Y Picture Adjustment Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras Comcel tro Figure 86 Camera Motion Detection Setup AUDIO SETUP The DX8100 server supports two audio configurations standard audio and optional expanded audio Both of these configurations allow you to configure individual camera channels to listen to and record live audio You can monitor live audio at a local server or listen to live audio from a remote DX8100 server or client system You can play back audio recorded by a camera channel For information about listening to live audio at the server or client system refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 66 NOTE Live audio is not supported for IP cameras e Standard audio input The DX8100 provides two standard audio inputs Line In stereo Mic In mono and one audio output The standard audio inputs are available by default if the optional audio option card is not installed If the optional audio card is installed the standard audio inputs are disabled The standard audio connections are described as follows Line In stereo A 2 channel stereo input left and right channel allows you to connect up to two external audio sources You can assign a specific camera to record video in association with each audio channel For example you can assign camera 2 to the left audio channel and camera 32 to the right audio channel Mic In Accepts one audio i
285. ra page 2 To set up the motion grid do the following a Select the motion zone 1 5 from the drop down box b Click the Hide Show button to either hide or display the motion grid c Move the Number of Blocks slider to change the grid size of the motion overlay 3 Define the area for motion detection as follows a Click Clear All to remove the currently defined motion detection area b Click Select All to enable motion detection for the entire viewable area c Hold down the eft mouse button and drag to select areas d Hold down the right mouse button and drag to deselect areas 4 In the Motion Detection section move the Sensitivity slider to adjust motion sensitivity Moving the slider to the left decreases the sensitivity moving the slider to the right increases the sensitivity The motion sensitivity window provides a visual indicator that helps you set the sensitivity to the correct level so that erroneous motion events caused by wind or other disturbances are avoided e Figure 83 shows the position of the red sensitivity indicator at a low sensitivity setting In this case a large motion level is needed to cause the green motion indicator to exceed the red sensitivity indicator Figure 83 Low Sensitivity Level e Figure 84 shows the position of the red sensitivity indicator at a high sensitivity setting In this case a low motion level will cause the green motion indicator to surpass the red sensitivity indicator F
286. ransactions that Satisfy Specific Exception Filters SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS BY LINE ITEM The DX8100 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions that contain a unique line item Use the asterisk as a wildcard character to substitute for zero or more characters The search criteria is based on the following e Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data e Date time The date and time window within which the transaction s were recorded e Line item The line item has the following guidelines Line item entries are not case sensitive Enter lower or uppercase characters Specify the asterisk wildcard Search by a single word or multiple words appearing in a transaction line Enter the first few characters of the first word appearing in the transaction and the wildcard For example type sma for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word small Enter the first few characters of the second word in a transaction and the wildcard For example type ora for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word orange Search by abbreviation For example type 6 pk for a line item containing the entry Soda 6 pk The search returns all transactions that contain the abbreviation 6 pk To search
287. ranty Pelco assumes no risk and shall be subject to no liability for damages or loss resulting from the specific use or application made of the Products Pelco s liability for any claim whether based on breach of contract negligence infringement of any rights of any party or product liability relating to the Products shall not exceed the price paid by the Dealer to Pelco for such Products In no event will Pelco be liable for any special incidental or consequential damages including loss of use loss of profit and claims of third parties however caused whether by the negligence of Pelco or otherwise The above warranty provides the Dealer with specific legal rights The Dealer may also have additional rights which are subject to variation from state to state If a warranty repair is required the Dealer must contact Pelco at 800 289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain a Repair Authorization number RA and provide the following information Model and serial number 2 Date of shipment P O number sales order number or Pelco invoice number 3 Details of the defect or problem f there is a dispute regarding the warranty of a product that does not fall under the warranty conditions stated above please include a written explanation with the product when returned Method of return shipment shall be the same or equal to the method by which the item was received by Pelco RETURNS To expedite parts returned for repair or
288. rd 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the User button a The User page is displayed Click a user name in the main user list Click Set Password The Set Password dialog box opens Enter a new password in the New password field Retype the password again in the Confirm new password field Click Apply in the Set Password dialog box Click Apply in the User Setup screen CHANGING A USER S GROUP AFFILIATION An Administrator level user can also change users group affiliation of users by dragging user names to different groups To change a user s group affiliation In the User name column of the User page click the user s name and drag it into a group DELETING EXISTING USERS Administrators can delete existing users To delete a user s account A Ze On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the User button a The User page is displayed Click the user name of the user you want to delete from the main user list Click Remove The Remove User dialog box opens Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel and return to the User Setup screen Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen SETTING LOGIN TIMEOUT Administrators can define the amount of time a user s account can remain idle before having to log in again This setting applies to all users r
289. re Event Frame Rate ES ImagesiSecond X Pre Event Image Quality BEST Event Image Quality BEST X Pre Event 30 Seconds X Post Event 60 Seconds X 155 Table AG describes the settings for the supported modes Table AG Camera Settings for the Supported Recording Modes Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS Image Resolution Frame Rate Image Resolution Frame Rate During Motion Image Resolution Frame Rate During Alarm Image Resolution Frame Rate During ATM POS Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre Motion Frame Rate Pre Alarm Frame Rate Pre ATM POS Frame Rate Pre Motion Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre Alarm Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre ATM POS Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Motion Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Alarm Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest ATM POS Image Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre Motion 1 60 sec Pre Alarm 1 60 sec Pre Event 1 60 sec Post Motion 1 180 sec Post Alarm 1 180 sec Post Event 1 180 sec This field appears for information purposes only To change this setting refer to Configuring the Frame Rate on page 156 Image quality is a function of video compression Higher quality video images require larger file sizes CONFIGURING THE FRAME RATE
290. rectangle about 0 25 inches 6 4 mm square provides a x6 zoom factor As the selection area increases in size the zoom in out factor decreases x5 x4 x3 x2 and x1 e Ifyou use the mouse to select an area about 0 25 inches 6 4 mm in size the zoom feature performs as follows If zooming in the zoom factor is at x6 The selected viewing area is zoomed to the largest size If zooming out the zoom factor is at x6 The selected viewing area is zoomed to the original size e Ifyou use the mouse to select the entire pane the zoom feature performs as follows If zooming in the zoom factor is at x1 In this case the selected viewing area is slightly enlarged You will have to perform many zoom in operations to arrive at the largest zoom size fzooming out the zoom factor is at x1 In this case the selected viewing area is slightly reduced You will have to perform many zoom out operations to arrive at the original size e You can also use the hand tool and the mouse wheel to zoom in and out The zoom factor is displayed in the upper right corner of the pane The effective zoom in factor is displayed after the zoom operation is performed The effective zoom out factor is not displayed To zoom using the mouse 1 To place the DX8100 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following e On the DX8100 toolbar click Live e On the DX8100 toolbar click Search 2 On the playback control click the Forward but
291. relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay Output Activation Period ATM POS 01 ATM POS 02 ATM POS 03 ATM POS 04 ATM POS 05 No Link ATM POS 06 No Link ATM POS 07 No Link ATM POS 08 No Link Relay 03 Yf Follow Event No Link Y No Link Y io Link Y No Link 7 No Link To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt POS gt in the linking setup Figure 138 Linking Relays to ATM POS Table AN describes the available ATM POS activated relay options Table AN ATM POS Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when the ATM POS event occurs Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment the ATM POS event occurs 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the ATM POS event occurs C2630M C 7 09 Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output To configure an advanced video loss activated relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Schedule button fi The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the Video Loss tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is link
292. removing from an alarm input 41 manually turning On and Off 38 multiple relays linking to one camera 40 relay output alarm event linking to 40 135 ATM POS event linking to 135 motion event linking to 134 number supported 132 video loss event linking to 136 setting up advanced relay output 163 basic operating properties 133 creating custom name for 133 relay output type selecting 133 C2630M C 7 09 relay selecting 133 single relay linking to multiple cameras 40 remote camera menu system navigating using Keypad controls 58 59 PC keyboard keys 58 59 PTZ OSD menu control 58 PTZ OSD menu controls 58 59 programming features accessing 58 protocol support 58 remote site accessing features of 19 activating 217 active remote cameras finding 217 connecting to 19 deleting 218 DHCP IP addressed adding 216 disconnecting from 19 editing 218 logging into 19 logging out of 20 modifying 218 overview 214 static IP addressed adding 214 remote sites overview 214 resolution resolution value setting for recording 159 screen 26 Resource Meter 129 RS 232 178 RS 422 RS 485 178 180 S schedule accessing 143 all record modes clearing schedule 147 clearing a recording schedule 146 copying attributes 148 152 custom settings 144 deleting a schedule 153 editing a profile 152 individual days scheduling 148 multi day schedule creating 149 record mode 143 setting up 145 single day creating 150 types of 1
293. rer 146 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode 2 2 ence EEE EEE 146 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes 0 0 0 0c ener nbn tenn ees 147 9 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 57 58 59 60 61 62 163 164 165 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 Year View Cale dar Shortcut Menuts tos aie ees e le eden it dedo ahaa he 148 Month View Page Multi Day SchEdulE osa ti era aise drayeve E a a ov aa eee ds 149 Month View Page Single Day Schedule 2 2 0 0 n ea raaa aai Ey 151 Month View Calendar Shortcut Menus eresse bolas ae A keer Pa ee ae lo T 152 Month Mew Page oia thal da a a e da fe AS lel ai het ros A ans 153 Month View Pages 0200 sa A A A e A cee em a 154 Custom Gameta Settings Panel ta a leas ls aah 155 Examples of Custom Camera Settings hai A A yee a A ecm ek Sere tiers ala 155 Frame Rate Configuration Dialog BOX 158 Frame Rate Configuration Screen sansi oi cado dl dl la doe Gos as dls id dd sida 159 Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording ooooooocoooococo corr 161 REA AA A 162 Maximum Rate and Resolution ReCOrdinQ oooooooooo oo 162 Example of Frame Rate Gapaci sc 2acias ora sd a aerea 163 Linking Relays to Motion DECO A oe PEE ew aren 164 Emking Relays to Alarm
294. ription Frame By Frame Reverse Each frame is displayed in the reverse direction with each click of the Frame by Frame Reverse button Frame By Frame Forward Each frame is displayed in the forward direction with each click of the Frame by Frame Forward button Fast Forward to End Advances the bookmark to the end of the latest recorded video Play Forward Stop Initiates normal playback of recorded video in the forward direction Stops playback control activity and returns to the Live View mode Pause Pauses video playback in the forward or reverse direction Play Reverse Initiates normal playback of recorded video in the reverse direction 00000000 Rewind to Beginning Returns the bookmark to the start of the earliest recorded video C2630M C 7 09 69 70 Figure 39 shows the parts of the DX8100 playback speed and volume controls Figure 39 Playback Speed and Volume Controls Table U describes the parts of the playback speed and volume controls Table U Parts ofthe Playback Speed and Volume Controls Item Part Description 1 Normal Playback speed is at normal rate O Faster Playback speed is increased to a faster rate Slower Playback speed is reduced to a slower rate O Louder Volume is increased to a higher level or decreased to a lower level O Mute Volume is silenced C2630M C 7 09 PLAYBACK TIMELINE The playb
295. rmation about how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 PTZ OSD Menu or Digital Zoom Control This control provides two functions depending on whether the DX8100 is operating in Live view or playback mode e Live view mode Provides whether the DX8100 is operating in Live view or playback mode users with access rights to operate PTZ OSD features For information about using the PTZ OSD menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 58 This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback zoom control For information about how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 e Playback mode Provides users with access rights to operate digital zoom features This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback zoom control For information about how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 Status Bar Displays the current date and time recorder processing status disk status indicator user name of the current logged in user and total amount of recorded video NOTE As the storage array of the DX8100 fills beyond its capacity video is deleted in a first in first out FIFO fashion The disk status indicator on the status bar sh
296. rmation about setting up emergency notification refer to Emergency Notification Setup on page 235 The DX8100 can be configured to send an e mail notification in response to a video loss event In this case the last available video image at the time the event occurred is attached to the e mail If no image exist then the system attaches a red colored pane to the e mail The red pane contains the text Video Loss For information about setting up emergency notification refer to Emergency E Mail Notification Setup on page 238 The record icon turns purple indicating a video loss recording regardless of the schedule The video loss utility is constantly running in the background If a schedule is not available the record icon defaults to purple If the DX8100 loses feed video on that channel is recorded 121 To set up video loss detection 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the Video Loss Detection section do one or both of the following e Click the Loss of synchronization check box e Click the Low level of video check box e In the Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time section set the Start Time and the End Time 3 Click Apply Video Loss Detection Video Loss Y Loss of synchronization M Low level of video Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time Po me AA Figure 89 Video Loss Detection APPLYING SETTINGS TO ALL CAMERAS If
297. rmation from your network administrator If your e mail server requires you to log in do the following a Select the check box labeled My E mail Server Requires Authentication b Enter your e mail server address c Enter your user name User names can be up to 31 characters in length and cannot include spaces or special characters d Enter your password Passwords can be up to 19 characters in length and cannot include spaces or special characters Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification G Enable Notification Full name Shipping Area OVA None y Subject 0xa100 Emergency E mail Notification malSMTP smtpdomaint pelco com 1 Minute Figure 179 Basic E mail Notification Setup 239 240 Testing E mail Notification You test the e mail notification configuration in the Emergency E mail Notification page For information about accessing the Emergency E mail Notification page refer Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup on page 238 To test e mail notification 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Select the My E mail Server Requires Authentication check box if it is not already selected Enter your personal e mail ad
298. rom a view pane 42 scheduled recording mode setting up 145 security levels 116 high low medium none settings custom settings examples of 155 customizing 144 154 support for recording modes 156 supported for recording modes 155 settings customizing 154 setup applying settings to all cameras 122 communications protocol 116 enabling disabling camera 116 127 161 expanded audio option 121 motion detection zones 118 name customizing 116 127 pan tilt and zoom 116 picture 116 picture properties 117 PTZ locking auto timeout 117 PTZ protocol 116 127 security level 116 security level selecting 116 127 video loss detection 122 single assigning to view pane 39 standard audio 119 zoom adjusting 51 camera designator 46 camera event detection and repositioning overview 139 camera mapping 229 camera removing a linked alarm input 40 capture card analog output setting up 228 optional 228 capture card displaying video 42 channel mapping 34 channel resolution 144 client remote 13 C2630M C 7 09 Coaxitron protocol 53 COM1communications properties 179 commands auxiliary sending 61 compression video 156 connecting DX8100 HVRs 114 D protocol 53 data bits 180 181 data communications dome devices setting up 180 data packets 170 data retention time 227 data transmissions 170 designators camera 46 site 46 digital zoom control 24 disk space 24 disk status indicator 24 display mode Live video 29 playback
299. rom the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut down dialog box opens 2 Click Exit to Windows 3 Click OK The Log On to Windows dialog box opens 4 Enter the Windows password and then click OK The system logs you into the Windows operating system REMOTE DX8100 LOGIN You can view live and playback video from up to five DX8100 Series HVRs simultaneously To access the features of a remote DX8100 a link must be established between the local and remote HVRs Refer to Adding a Remote Site on page 214 for instructions on establishing a network connection with a remote HVR After establishing an active connection refer to Logging in to a Remote Site on page 19 for instructions This section includes the following topics e Connecting to a Remote Site e Discomnecting from a Remote Site e Logging in to a Remote Site e Logging Out of a Remote Site CONNECTING TO A REMOTE SITE To connect to an active DX8100 server on the network 1 In the DX8100 main window right click the remote site name from the Site Tree The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Connect from the shortcut menu DISCONNECTING FROM A REMOTE SITE To terminate a connection with a remote DX8100 server 1 In the DX8100 main window right click the remote site name from the Site Tree The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Disconnect from the shortcut menu LOGGING IN TO A REMOTE SITE After a connection to a remote site has been established log in
300. rs can set up and perform backups NOTE The DX8100 Export feature backs up all configuration settings to the target device however the target device setting is not restored after the import process is executed The target device setting must be re entered before the scheduled backup routine can execute You must use the DX8100 Client application to view backed up data For more information about viewing backed up data refer to the client application manual This section describes how to back up data and includes the following topics e Accessing the Backup Configuration Page on page 202 e Adding a Backup Schedule on page 202 e Editing an Existing Backup Schedule on page 204 e Deleting an Existing Backup Schedule on page 205 e Initiating an Instant Backup Schedule on page 205 e Mapping a Network Device on page 206 e Discomnecting from a Network Drive on page 206 e Selecting a Backup Media Device on page 207 e Viewing Backed Up Video on page 207 Figure 159 shows the parts of the Backup schedule page Backup schedule Backup start time Backup time Filter Target device Instant Backup Running backup information Waiting backup information Backup time Filter Target device Enqueue time Priority Up Priority Down Delete 4 Cancel Apply Figure 159 Backup Configuration Screen C2630M C 7 09 201 202 The following table describes the parts of the Backup schedule page Table BA Par
301. rsion 1 2 and later units include a standard dual display card By default the DX8100 is set up to display video on the extended monitor connected to the VGA connector on the dual display card Alternately you can configure the dual display card to display video on a composite monitor connected to the BNC connector on the dual display card For information about how to reconfigure the dual display card refer to the dual display card installation manual The dual display card must be installed in the DX8100 and you must be logged on to the DX8100 application for the Channel Mapping icon to be available The DX8100 division buttons allow you to configure multiple extended monitor views Figure 7 shows the 9 Division view The DX8100 supports up to nine different channel mapping views Selected cameras from the Site Tree can be displayed on the extended monitor and can be assigned to multiple views Each view is set up independently removing a camera from one view does not remove it from another To set up channel mapping for the extended monitor VGA or composite 34 C2630M C 7 09 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Channel Mapping button El The setup page opens to the Channel Mapping for Extended Monitor tab You can also access this page from the Setup dialog box by clicking the Ext Monitor icon Extemal Output Channel Mapping for Extended Monitor O E E E El ll Oe E Panel 1 4 N A NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A
302. rt drop down box select the port number you want to configure 3 In the device drop down box select a device ATM POS devices can use COM1 and Port 1 to Port 4 The KBD300A and third party dome devices use Port 1 to Port 4 For information about interfacing ATM POS devices to the DX8100 using COM1 refer to Setting Up COM Port Properties on page 179 4 Configure the following port settings using the drop down box e Interface mode e Baud rate e Parity e Data bits e Stop bits 5 Click Apply SETTING UP ATM POS DEVICE PROPERTIES The DX8100 allows you to connect up to 16 ATM POS devices and provides 2 ATM POS device modes e Single Mode Use this option to connect up to 4 ATM POS devices to the DX8100 e Multi Mode Use this option to connect up to 16 ATM POS devices to the DX8100 over one serial connection Single Mode and Multi Mode can be combined to connect up to 16 ATM POS devices to the DX8100 For information about installing the ATM POS equipment for each mode refer to the DX8100 Installation manual This section describes how to configure ATM POS device properties and includes the following topics e Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options e Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format e Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 190 e Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 196 e Recording ATM POS Events on page 197 C2630M C 7 09
303. ry Disconnect NetDry Beto ikem Figure 70 Renaming Export Time Ranges 105 106 SELECTING THE EXPORT FORMAT The DX8100 allows you to select the export format Table AB describes the available export formats e Native format When exporting video in the native format the DX8100 embeds a digital watermark in the video stream for the purpose of authentication Watermarking ensures that an image has not been edited or damaged after it has been recorded The watermark is an encrypted digital signature embedded in the video stream during the compression stage protecting the video from the moment of creation The DX8100 Viewer software is capable of reading a DX8100 watermark and verifying the originality of the video e AVI or ASF format Video exported in AVI or ASF format can be viewed using standard viewer software such as Windows Media Player NOTE Refer to the DX8100 product specification or DX8100 Client Operation Configuration manual for recommended computer requirements for playing back exported video When exporting video in the native format to a CD or DVD device the DX8100 will automatically include the DX8100 Viewer application along with the video This viewer is designed to play a variety of still image video and audio media formats including the native DX8100 format The DX8100 Viewer application will automatically run each time a CD or DVD created by the DX8100 s export feature is inserted into a Windows
304. s refer to the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide To enable the Ctrl Alt Del key combination 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 9 The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Setup Ctrl Alt Del key combination section click the Enable Ctrl Alt Del key combination selection check box 4 Click Apply 5 Reboot the DX8100 Using Ctrl Alt Del You must enable the Ctrl Alt Del key combination and verify your actual keyboard mapping In some cases the DX8100 keyboard is remapped and the actual Ctrl Alt and Delete key function is assigned to other keys Ctrl Alt Del allows you to access the Windows Task Manager dialog box from within the DX8100 shell When you exit the Windows environment you are returned to the DX8100 shell In this case you do not have to log back into the DX8100 To access the Windows Task Manager dialog box 1 Press the assigned keys that implement the Ctrl Alt Del function The Windows Security dialog box opens 2 In the Windows Security dialog box click Task Manager The Windows Task Manager window opens To return to the DX8100 shell without rebooting the DX8100 exit the Windows Task Manager dialog box C2630M C 7 09 SETTING UP AUTO REBOOT The DX8100 allows you to select the day and time for the server to perform an automatic reboot If there are mapped network drives the Windows f
305. s Export in Live mode To export video or still images to a CD R RW or DVD R RW you must have Nero Express 7 Essentials software installed on the DX8100 HVR This section describes how to export video and includes the following topics Exporting Bookmarked Video Regions Inserting and Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 100 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter on page 101 Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 101 Performing the Export on page 102 Stopping an Export While in Process on page 108 EXPORTING BOOKMARKED VIDEO REGIONS You can bookmark multiple regions of video along the timeline for export Bookmarked regions are designated with start point and end point bookmarks Multiple regions can be bookmarked along a single 24 hour timeline but only a single channel can be exported at a time Bookmarked regions are listed in the Export Video dialog box at the time of export Table Z describes the bookmark controls Table Z Bookmark Controls Button Command Description Add Bookmark Does the following e Adds a red bookmark flag to mark the beginning of a start point e Adds a gray bar to indicate the range between the start point and end point Remove Bookmark Removes the selected bookmark Remove All Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks CREATING BOOKMARKS To select a region to export 1 2 C2630M C 7 09 Make sure the HVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking the L
306. s a nos ol aa lo 247 C2630M C 7 09 184 185 186 187 188 189 C2630M C 7 09 Sending Esmallsito divida e a eo a e dd tee da de a 248 SEMA O a a Eee ES 249 sotiwareUpgrade SenerCon levitra carr cai as nadA 250 Software Upgrade Server Cl Gaia le Si aa ves 1 CA a ae ee 251 Password Recovery Dialog BO os art a canine ete Milas tuto al alias a Wile dn tet alta laud dt aol teen Pella eas aden als 252 REMOVING the RIEL coo E E An ER I Canes AS HOR Sa eee Lee LEI Ae ee EO ce emotes 253 11 List of Tables A Parts of the DX8100 Application VIA iaa 24 B File Mendo Na e o Dale ac ay 25 C Edit Menu Commands 20 Id EE A A NA 25 D View Menu Commands liada cs ia a da e ete 26 E Export Menu COMMON a a 27 F Favorite Menu COMME ahd g E EE Ra Male canis ne Mg nin lection EERS 27 G DX8100 Help Ment Commands a t suceda cts blade aa bead teen e whl oa ed Gd ales lle Dodo 28 E DXB TOO OOIBarBUTLONS a aaa 28 Operating MOdeS ee A lad tes abe testes tech as botnet ale bag oul Mach het tae et abate ual ala Sula 29 wit AVG WHPANES PANG A O RR A 31 How View PanelsiareOrganized stat E A GN Oe oak is 32 E MEW Panes and Panel ii A ii 33 Me SITE RELH 1a E is AR ke e A E ET ANOS 38 N Parts of the Live View OSO Pe o A A AA A A OESS 46 Os Recording Indicators lr a bt Ae gtd distan 49 P Standard Keyboard Functions for Controlling PTZ and Lens Functions 2 0 0 0 00 0 0 cece cece ect c tenets 52 Q Parts of the PT
307. s about an event A single camera can be linked to one or more client emergency agents Up to 32 IP addresses can be assigned to each camera The DX8100 can transmit up to 10 IP addresses simultaneously To link a camera to one or more clients 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 In the Camera Setup section click a camera button Camera 1 32 The Emergency Agent Selection dialog box opens 4 Click the check box to select the name of the client site you want to notify when a motion alarm or video loss event is detected by this camera 5 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to 32 cameras on the current site 6 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen 7 Configure the server event transmission time For information about setting the duration and transmission interval refer to Setting Server Event Transmission Time on page 237 SETTING SERVER EVENT TRANSMISSION TIME After clients have been added and linked to cameras you must set the amount of time a server sends images after an event occurs and the interval between sending each image for one of more clients For information about adding clients refer to Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified on page 236 For information about linking cameras refer to Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 237 To set the duration for sending i
308. s displayed in the Video window C2630M C 7 09 6 Use the playback control to stop or pause playback reverse playback and so forth Start or 10 2008 fos foo oo End for 10 2006 093 05 00 m Transaction Information I Device Name Jarm Poso1 T Transaction Number I p Data Information IT Transaction with Exception Only F Line Item I I Action Code I zj Exception Code 01 10 2006 09 03 21 562 F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 16 DATE 1 10 2006 TIME 9 3 36 Start Search Stop Search z 5 ATM POSO1 ATMIPOSO1 ATM POSOL ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 NN Nan a Figure 52 Display a POS Transaction Search by Device Name SEARCHING BY POS TRANSACTION NUMBER The DX8100 allows you to search for a POS event by transaction number You must specify the channel date and a time window in which the transaction is recorded To search for a POS event by transaction number 2 3 C2630M C 7 09 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button ak On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed To select a device name do one of the following e n the DX8100 Site Tree click a camera that is linked to an ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name box In this case the Device Name box is deselected e
309. s removes one of the 4CIF interlaced fields even or odd from the 4CIF recorded image to arrive at 2CIF resolution for the displayed image The original image is retained at the recorded 4CIF resolution For exported images the DX8100 provides a global option for enabling a deinterlacing filter In this case the selected channel s image is exported at 2CIF resolution This setting is effective for all channels and cannot be set for individual channels For more information about enabling the denaturalizing filter refer to Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter on page 101 To view video using the deinterlaced option 1 Click the Forward button J gt to start video playback 2 On the menu bar click View gt Display deinterlaced image VIEWING LIVE AND PLAYBACK VIDEO SIMULTANEOUSLY The DX8100 allows simultaneous viewing of live and playback video from a single camera source To view live and playback video from the same camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button 4 2 Drag a camera from the Site Tree to a view panel 3 Click the Forward button Jr to begin playback 4 Drag the same camera from the Site Tree onto a different view panel while video is playing C2630M C 7 09 Exporting Video Users with export access rights Power Users and Administrators by default can export sections of prerecorded video to magnetic or optical media The DX8100 must be in the Playback or Search mode to export video You cannot acces
310. s section describes how to configure system options and parameters including the following topics Accessing the System Page on page 219 Working with the Export Feature on page 219 Working with the Import Feature on page 220 Using System Logs on page 222 Selecting the Language on page 224 Setting the System Time on page 224 Selecting the Video Format on page 226 Working with Ctrl Alt Del Function on page 226 Setting Up Auto Reboot on page 227 Specifying the Data Retention Time Limit on page 227 Working with Online Help on page 228 C2630M C 7 09 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM PAGE To access the System page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 9 The System page is displayed WORKING WITH THE EXPORT FEATURE The DX8100 provides an import and export feature that allows you to save and reload DX8100 configuration settings You can save your DX8100 HVR configuration settings by exporting them to a specific storage location You can reload a specific configuration profile by importing its configuration file NOTE The DX8100 Export feature backs up all configuration settings to the target device however the target device setting is not restored after the import process is executed The target device setting must be re entered before the scheduled backup routine can execute This sections describes how to use the import and export feature including the foll
311. s section includes the following topics e Upgrade Policy e Starting and Shutting Down the DX8100 on page 16 UPGRADE POLICY Pelco s representations regarding product features and performance are limited to those made in the specification sheet and installation operation manual at the time the product was manufactured Pelco does not represent or warrant that any upgrades to product hardware or software will be made available in the future When possible Pelco will offer product upgrades to purchasers of its products The upgrade policy is described in the following sections e Software Upgrades e Hardware Upgrades SOFTWARE UPGRADES 1 All upgrades for Pelco software shall be free to the customer for the duration of the warranty period This offer does not apply to software that may be installed in a Pelco product that is licensed from another supplier All other software such as operating systems drivers for accessory devices and so forth shall be governed by the software manufacturer s upgrade policy even when said upgrades are necessary to implement an upgraded version of Pelco software 2 Whenever possible software upgrades with detailed instructions shall be provided to the customer through Web site download Pelco will not be responsible for loss of data losses due to down time or damage to product as a result of a customer attempting to perform an upgrade 3 Hard copies on appropriate medium CD DVD ZIP or floppy disk sh
312. s the CPU and memory resource levels that are specific to the DX8100 server application They do not match the resource levels that appear in Windows Task Manager on the server Memory Level Blue ndicates the DX8100 server s memory usage CPU Level Orange ndicates the DX8100 server s CPU usage Data Area Displays the CPU and Memory usage as a percentage IP Camera Status Button Sends a command to the IP address of the camera displayed in the Selected Channel drop down box The ping command opens and displays the results in the IP Camera Network Status dialog box o 0 LLOO IP Camera Properties Button Opens a dialog box that allows you to assign an IP camera to a camera channel C2630M C 7 09 129 130 CONFIGURING ANALOG AND IP CAMERAS FOR OPTIMAL HYBRID VIDEO RECORDING If the CPU level or the Memory level exceeds 100 percent the DX8100 System Resources Warning dialog box appears Click the check box to disable the DX8100 System Resources Warning dialog box DX8100 System Resources Warning x Analog and IP camera capacity has exceeded system resources Reduce the number of cameras being recorded or lower their resolution and frame rate FF Do not show this waming again Figure 99 DX8100 System Resources Warning Dialog Box You can easily add remove and configure analog and IP cameras to achieve optimal hybrid video recording and system resources performance NOTE The s
313. sed with 1 740 null frames If the Real Time check box is not selected one minute of video recorded at 1 fps will play back in two seconds in real time Figure 72 illustrates the two video streams 1 one padded with null frames to match the actual time duration and 2 another stream without null frames Figure 72 Real Time Versus Non Real Time Export To finalize the export process 1 Make sure that the export media selected Is inserted in the drive unit that the drive is ready 2 Inthe Time Range table click selection box for each backed up video time range you want to export 3 In the Export Format section do the following a Click the Audio Record check box to include recorded audio b Click the Real Time check box to export video using standard clock time 4 Click Export to export video data STOPPING AN EXPORT WHILE IN PROCESS Once an export operation has begun a user can easily stop it by interrupting or canceling the operation from the Export menu on the main or search screens Interrupting an export simply stops the progress of the export while keeping all current video information intact Canceling an export will delete any video data exported during the operation as well as end the export itself This section describes how to stop an export process and includes the following topics e Retaining Video When Stopping an Export Process e Deleting Video Data When Stopping an Export Process Retaining Video When Stoppin
314. server system from your local computer Fully implemented networking capabilities allow remote administration playback and export using the accompanying client application Live viewing is supported on a variety of client platforms including Internet browsers and pocket PC compatible hand held devices Versatile high speed search operations include time and date event list thumbnail and intelligent pixel searching Extensive scheduling features allow customizing of weekday weekend and special event recording The DX8100 provides a graphical user interface GUI allowing you quick and efficient access to all setup and operations functions Scheduled or manual backup can be performed using a number of optical external and mapped network drive options An online Help system allows you quick access to information about how to configure and operate the DX8100 server and DX8100 client application The DX8100 also supports the following computer based applications e DX8100 Client Emergency Agent e DX8100 Viewer on page 13 e DX8100 Mobile Client on page 13 e DX8100 Web Client on page 14 DX8100 CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENT The DX8100 Client Emergency Agent works with networked DX8000 Series HVRs to alert users when one or more particular channels detect a motion and or alarm event The Emergency Agent runs on a networked client computer DX8100 VIEWER The DX8100 Viewer is capable of playing back a variety of video still image and aud
315. sets to a Tour To add presets to a tour 1 Access the Preset tour group dialog box For information about accessing the Preset tour group dialog box refer to Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 62 2 Click the check box beside one of the presets you want to add to the tour 3 Double click in the Dwell Time field of a preset and then increase or decrease the time in seconds at which the camera will remain during that sequence of the tour 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each additional preset you want to add to the tour 5 Click Add to Group 6 Click Save 7 Click Exit to return to the main screen Preset tour group x Available presets Preset01 PresetO2 Preset03 4 Preset04 5 PresetO5 R Preset y Number Name DwellTime Sec O 1 Preset01 2 O 2 Preset02 7 O 3 Preset03 5 Delete Save Apply Exit bebe y seve aw em Figure 34 Adding Preset to Tour C2630M C 7 09 63 64 Deleting Presets from a Tour To delete presets from a tour 1 Access the Preset tour group dialog box For information about accessing the Preset tour group dialog box refer to Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 62 Click the check box beside one or more presets you want to delete from the preset tour group Click Delete Click Save Click Exit to return to the main screen Preset tour group A xj Available presets y Number Name DwellTime Sec 1 Prese
316. sewhere in the document Unplug Eject Hardware Opens the Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box for a specific device Multiple Configuration Upload Opens the Multi configuration Upload dialog displaying a list of DX8100 sites and groups Use this dialog box to select specific DX8100 sites to configure the file to upload to those sites and to initiate the upload process Exit Opens the Shut down dialog box for selecting one of the following actions requires a specific level of user permission e Shut down Shuts down the DX8100 machine You must have Power User or Administrator access to shut down the DX8100 machine For more information refer to Shutting Down the DX8100 on page 16 e Restart Restarts the DX8100 application You must have Administrator or Power user access to restart the DX8100 application For more information refer to User Setup on page 208 e Exit to Windows mode You must have Administrator user access to exit the DX8100 application to the Windows operating system For more information refer to Exiting to the Windows Operating System on page 19 Edit Menu Table C describes the DX8100 Edit menu commands Table C Edit Menu Commands Command Description Export Setup Opens the DX8100 Setup File Export dialog box for exporting the DX8100 system configuration settings to a specific file name and location The Export feature also allows you to export the DX8100 settings to a spec
317. sired preset number Number PATTERN long Starts the pattern record mode ACK Stops the pattern record mode Number PATTERN Runs the desired pattern Number AUX ON AUX OFF Turns the specified auxiliary output on or off Number MON Assigns the selected camera to the desired view pane The active view pane is highlighted C2630M C 7 09 199 200 KBD300A Shift Key Features Table AZ describes the KBD300A Shift key features Table AZ KBD300A Shift Key Features Control Action Joystick Activity within the DX8100 Site Tree e Up Down direction Moves the cursor vertically through each element in the Site Tree An element is a DX8100 site a camera within each DX8100 site alarm or ATM POS or are relay within each DX8100 site If an element is expanded the joystick moves the cursor vertically through the objects of that element e Left Right direction Right Expands an element to display objects contained under the element Left Collapses an element and hides its objects Select a camera unit at the tree Number CAM Expands the specified DX8100 Site Tree If there are two sites 1 CAM expands DX8100 site 1 2 CAM expands DX8100 site 2 F2 F3 ON OFF Cameras are assigned numerically 1 16 to the respectively numbered video These controls display DX8100 video in the following divisions e F2 0FF Single division view e F3 MOM 4 division view e AUX ON 9 divis
318. specific day and the configured time constraints 2 Under the Backup Start Time click the Time drop down boxes simultaneously select the time you want the backup schedule to start 3 Under the Backup Time Range click the Day drop down boxes Select the day you want the backup schedule to start and the day you want the backup schedule to stop 4 Under the Backup Time Range click the Time drop down boxes Select the time of day you want the backup schedule to start and the time you want the backup schedule to stop 5 Inthe Channel amp Record Type section select the channel record type as follows 1 Click the All or Clear button to select or clear all of the channels simultaneously or click channels 1 32 individually to select or deselect a channel 2 Click the Categories drop down box to select the type of recording The backup schedule includes only the type of recording you have specified C2630M C 7 09 203 6 Optional In the Device Selection section map a network drive for backup by performing one of the following a Click the Map a network drive button The Windows Map Network Drive dialog box opens For more information about mapping a network drive refer to Mapping a Network Device on page 206 1 Specify the drive letter for the connection and to which folder you want to connect 2 Click Finish The mapped drive is displayed in the Device Selection area under Remote drives or b Click D
319. splayed C2630M C 7 09 235 236 ADDING CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENTS TO BE NOTIFIED After clients have been added cameras must be configured to notify individual clients of an event A single camera can be linked to one or more client emergency agents For information about linking cameras to client emergency agents refer to Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 237 To add clients to the Emergency Agent Notification list 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click Add The Agent Setup dialog box opens Do the following a Enter a name for the client Client names can be up to 63 characters and can include spaces but not special characters b Enter the clients IP address c If necessary enter a port number in the Agent Port box The default port number is 9004 Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change the Emergency Agent port number from its default of 9004 Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical Click OK Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen CHANGING CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENT PROPERTIES To change an existing client s information in the emergency notification list le 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button
320. ss Loss of synchronization Bri p Current Value I Low level of video ene 0 Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time 127 o 128 Sii Contrast E Stat Time PAH EndTime Ear ie pa pa Apply to All Cameras 127 0 128 0 Y Protocol Motion Detection Saturation Lg Camera Security I Audio Settings 127 0 128 2 I Picture Adjustment F Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras a A D Cancel Apply Figure 81 Parts of the DX8100 Setup Dialog Box Table AC describes the parts of the Setup dialog Table AC Parts of the DX8100 Setup Dialog Box Item Button Part Description Cam Camera Click the Camera button to configure cameras Available options are PTZ functions motion detection picture adjustment audio and video loss detection settings 2 eo Linking Click the Linking button to configure relays and alarms associate relays and alarms with cameras link relays to alarms and link cameras to other cameras Schedule Click the Schedule button to build custom recording schedules set image resolution frame rate and image quality and configure relay settings O Network Click the Network button to set up the network configuration and communication port settings O Backup Click the Backup button to configure and perform backups O Ca User Click the User button to add delete or change user accounts O Site Click the Site Setup button to add delete and configure additional DX81
321. such as sirens light fixtures and door locks The DX8100 Series HVR allows Administrators and Power users to link relays to cameras and alarms Up to 20 seconds of delay can be set from the moment an event is triggered to the time when a relay is activated Make sure you have linked relays to the appropriate cameras and alarm inputs before attempting to configure them For instructions on linking alarms and relays refer to Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 39 and Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs on page 40 This section describes how to setup advanced alarm and motion relay output and includes the following topics e Configuring Advanced Motion Activated Relay Output e Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output on page 165 e Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output on page 166 e Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output on page 167 Configuring Advanced Motion Activated Relay Output To configure a motion relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the Motion tab 5 Configure each relay that is linked to a camera a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box 6 Click Save C2630M C 7
322. t Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 28800 38400 57600 or 115200 Parity None Odd or Even Data Bits 5 6 7 0r 8 Stop Bits 1or2 To set up COM1 communication properties 1 2 3 C2630M C 7 09 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select COM1 RS 232 is the serial data communication standard In the device drop down box select a device Configure the following COM port settings using the drop down boxes provided e Interface mode RS 232 is the only allowed setting by default e Baud rate e Parity e Data bits e Stop bits Click Apply 179 180 Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties The DX8100 interfaces with the KBD300A ATM POS and third party dome devices using Port 1 to Port 4 All ports are compatible with both RS 422 or RS 485 serial data communication standard This setting describes how to connect a device to the DX8100 using Port 1 to Port 4 Access the Network page to configure Port 1 to Port 4 communication properties For information about accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 168 For information about the Port Device page refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 177 To configure Port 1 to Port 4 properties 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Po
323. t System Off 01 28 2008 00 01 00 Admin A scheduled reboot was performed Figure 77 System On Off Log Events 7 To save the log search results to a file do the following a Click Save As The DX8100 Save As Log Info dialog box opens b Select a destination folder and then type the name of the file c Click Save The file is saved 8 Do one of the following e To remain in the Log View dialog box and run another report click Clear e To exit the Log View dialog box click OK C2630M C 7 09 VIEWING SYSTEM HEALTH STATUS 112 T he system health feature allows you to view the health status and configure low and high operating thresholds for various system devices If a threshold is exceeded the system displays an alert notification You can elect to open a subsequent event log which provides a more detailed description about the event The system devices are as follows A CPU temperature Fan speed Power supply status Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology SMART for hard disk drive status Network information Uninterruptible power source UPS status when connected NOTE The UPS area is reserved for future use n alert notification also appears on the remote client computer For this to occur the remote client must be connected to the server to receive the notification WORKING WITH SYSTEM HEALTH STATUS VIEW To access the System Health dialog box 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click View
324. t Export Setup The DX8100 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Select the folder in which you want to save the settings file 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 4 Entera file name in the space provided 5 Click Save WORKING WITH THE IMPORT FEATURE This sections describes how to import DX8100 HVR settings and includes the following topics e Importing HVR Settings e Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Import on page 221 Importing HVR Settings To import a saved settings file 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the System button 9 The System page is displayed 3 Select the Import button 4 Do one of the following a To specify the file name for import enter the drive path and file name information in the box Settings file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions For example CASystem Settings Backup bak or b To browse for a location 1 Click Browse The DX8100 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Navigate to the drive and folder where the settings file is located 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 4 Select the settings file you want to open 5 Click Open 5 Click Import Now C2630M C 7 09 6 Click Apply r Export Import Configuration Export Browse i Export Now a Q Import Browse Import No
325. t already selected 4 Entera remote site IP address 5 Click Refresh 6 Click Apply Site Information Site IP fst Pasar a DXB100Lab 10108 12 213 ON IP Address 10 106 12 213 Add Group Edit Jelete Camera Selection Setting FF Camera 1 F Camera 2 F Camera 3 I Camera 4 I Camera 5 I Camera 6 F Camera 7 F Cameta 8 F Camera 9 F Camera 10 I Camera 11 T Camera 12 I Camera 13 F Camera 14 I Camera 15 I Camera 16 I Camera17 I Camera 18 T Camera 19 M Camera 20 I Camera 21 I Camera22 M Camera23 7 Camera24 I Camera2 Camera 28 B I Camera 27 I Camera 28 I Camera 29 I Camera 30 I Camera 31 I Camera 32 y Figure 167 Finalizing Site Setup ACTIVATING REMOTE SITES The DX8100 only supports up to five remote connections however one computer client can connect up to 200 servers simultaneously Using the multicast feature the DX8100 HVR can support an unlimited number of Web client connections To activate up to five remote sites 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click the Site Setup button 3 Inthe Site IP list select up to five HVR sites to be activated 4 Click Apply The new DX8100 server site s should now be listed in the Site Tree C2630M C 7 09 217 MODIFYING A REMOTE SITE This section describes how to modify a remote site and includes the following topics
326. t01 2 2 Preset02 7 3 Preset03 5 O 4 Preset04 2 O 5 Preset05 2 Na PresetnA 2 zl Add to Group Preset Tour Group Iv 01 y y Number Name Dwell Time Sec O 1 Preset0 2 O ARE Figure 35 Deleting Preset from Tour C2630M C 7 09 ACTIVATING A PRESET TOUR This section describes how to activate a preset tour You can save a preset tour for later use without engaging the tour by not performing step 5 Then continue on to step 6 without clicking Apply To activate a preset tour 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EW 2 On the PTZ keypad click the Set button and then click the Pgm button to bring up the Preset preset tour group dialog box 3 From the drop down box select the preset tour 1 4 you want to activate 4 Click Save 5 Click Apply 6 Click Exit to return to the main screen 7 Click the Set button on the PTZ keypad to exit programming mode 8 Click the Preset button on the PTZ keypad to activate the tour xl Available presets Number Name DwelTime sec Preset01 2 Preset02 Preset03 Preset04 Preset05 PresetnA Add to Group Preset Tour Group Iv 02 O Number Name Dwell Time Sec 2 oO O 2 O 3 O 4 Os Ma NNN Os H O Preset01 O 2 Preset02 7 O 3 Preset03 5 Delete Save Apply Exit Pl ea e al Figure 36 Activating a Preset Tour To reactivate the last preset tour you configured e Onthe keypad click Preset DEACTIVATING A PRESET
327. tandard view 51 instant record starting 49 instant record starting and stopping 48 instant record stopping 49 instant recording 47 interface 180 181 ive recording 50 Live View mode working in 58 ive view working in 42 normal recording 47 recording modes scheduled 144 See recording mode monitor extended 34 monitor external 228 motion detection of 134 145 See also relays detection zones 118 emergency e mail notification 238 emergency notification 235 motion event recording mode settingup 145 sensitivity setting 118 multicast enabling 170 multi event recording 145 multiple event recording 145 multiplexed analog output 228 MUX card displaying real time video 42 National Television System Committee NTSC 156 network camera 122 123 network drive disconnecting from 206 network ports logical 170 network requirements connecting DX8100 HVRs 19 DX8100 network properties 15 normal recording mode 47 notification e mail 121 257 emergency agent 121 Notification page 235 0 online Help 228 on screen display add instant record icon to OSD 48 customizing 47 overview 26 46 selections 47 Audio Recording Background Color Camera Name Instant Recording POS PTZ Select All Site Name Video Recording operating modes function 29 Display Search Setup instant record starting and stopping 48 instant recording 47 live recording 50 operation and configuration user access level 18 overriding o
328. te Tree These channels are listed in the Selected Channel drop down box located on the Camera page Each IP camera configured as a network camera is displayed in the Site Tree The steps for configuring the DX8100 to record IP camera video are organized into the following topics e About Analog and IP Camera Channel Configurations e Searching for IP Cameras e Assigning an IP Camera to a Camera Channel on page 124 e Configuring IP Camera Settings on page 126 e Customizing IP Camera Display Settings on page 127 About Analog and IP Camera Channel Configurations The DX8100 channel configuration is as follows e Standard analog channel The DX8108 and DX8116 channel capacity can be expanded by 16 channels using the DX8100 16 channel expansion unit kit DX8108 channel configuration Camera channels 1 to 8 are standard analog inputs and are displayed in the Site Tree channels 9 to 24 sixteen total are available for assigning IP cameras DX8116 channel configuration Camera channels 1 to 16 are standard analog inputs and are displayed in the Site Tree channels 17 to 32 sixteen total are available for assigning IP cameras DX8124 channel configuration Camera channels 1 to 24 are standard analog inputs and are displayed in the Site Tree channels 25 to 32 eight total are available for assigning IP cameras DX8132 channel configuration Camera channels 1 to 32 are standard analog inputs and are displayed in the Site Tree Analog
329. that the DX8100 will continuously record even while users view simultaneous live and playback video or modify the system setup To assign a single camera to a view pane 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button 2 In the Site Tree click the plus sign next to rT Y expand the tree if necessary yy 3 Do one of the following e To assign a single camera to a view pane drag the camera from the Site Tree onto a view pane e To assign all cameras from a single site to the view panes drag pa onto a single view pane The default arrangement of cameras is Camera1 Camera2 Camera3 from left to right top to bottom 4 Repeat the process in step 3 for up to 36 cameras and up to five HVR sites SETTING UP LINKS The DX8100 allows you to set up links in various configurations e You can link multiple alarms and relays to a single camera e You can link a single alarm or relay to multiple cameras e You can link alarms and relays to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes e You can also manually turn a relay on and off from the Site Tree This section describes how to set up links and includes the following sections Manually Turning On and Off a Relay on page 39 Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 39 e Linking a Relay Output to a Camera on page 40 Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs on page 40 Manually Turning On and Off a Relay To manually turn on and off a relay 1 Right click
330. the Port Device page do the following a In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration dialog box opens b In the Device Mode drop down box select either Single Mode the default setting or Multi Mode 181 182 5 In the Device Configuration page do the following a Click Data Format The Data Format List page is displayed By default the ER 650 data format is selected You can modify the ER 650 data format or create a new format Device Configuration General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics m Data Format List options Data Format Name This page is where you configure the data format transaction monetary time and character Add Edit Delete IMPORTANT The options and parameters configured at this page determines how data from ATM POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transactions Every field format must match that of the selected ATM POS device especially the month format xl Configure a data format Apply Te Cancel Figure 146 Default Data Format List Page e To use and modify the ER 650 format highlight the data format and then click Edit e To start a new data format click Add The Data Format dialog box opens In the Data Format Name box type a name D
331. the basic information for the new user User name jdoe 6 Full name redo he Description Front desk security Type and confirm a password for the user Password R Confirm password p e 1 4e Back Next gt Cancel Figure 164 Add New User Dialog Box MODIFYING USER PROPERTIES Follow the steps below to change user attributes such as user name and group affiliation Users with Admin or Power User access can change name and description properties of lower level users However only Admin level users can change a user s group affiliation To modify a user s properties 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the User button a The User page is displayed 3 Do one of the following e Inthe main user list 1 Click a user name 2 Click Properties The Property dialog box opens e In one of the group lists 1 Click a user name 2 Click Properties The Property dialog box opens 4 Edit the following user properties e Username e Full name e Description e Group 5 Click Apply in the Property dialog box 6 Click Apply in the User Setup screen An Administrator level user can also change the group affiliation of users by dragging user names to different groups C2630M C 7 09 CHANGING USER PASSWORDS Administrators and Power Users can change or reset an existing user s password To change a user s passwo
332. ther users 114 P P protocol 53 pan tilt and zoom PTZ control panel 24 pan tilt and zoom control enabling 46 focus command using 53 operating 50 preset programming 53 programming guidelines 53 protocols camera support 50 pan tilt and zoom indicator 46 pane panel background color 26 channel camera assignment to 32 configuring 31 division display format 32 division selection of 31 hidden panels automatically cycling through 33 hidden panels manually cycling through 33 live playback video display of 24 navigating between 31 32 overview 30 pane expanding and collapsing 33 site name displayed in 26 video viewing 115 parity 180 181 258 password recovery 25 pattern activating 53 55 57 clearing 53 57 overview 55 programming 53 56 programming starting 56 programming stopping 56 protocols PTZ enabled cameras 55 PC client application server connections number of 217 Phase Alternating Line PAL 156 ping port 170 playback control panel 24 playback timeline 24 port and device communications properties ATM POS device data format 186 mode selecting 181 COM1 port 178 COM1 setting up 179 overview 177 RS 232 178 RS 422 RS 485 178 port numbers changing 170 pre alarm recording rate 145 preset activating 53 54 clearing 53 55 guidelines 53 Preset 95 53 Preset 99 53 programming 53 preset tour accessing a preset tour group 62 adding presets toatour 62 63 configuring 62 delete presets from a t
333. ties dialog box scan utility The scan utility locates Pelco IP devices IP cameras and Axis IP cameras NOTE The DX8100 Client application IP Camera Properties scan utility is unavailable 1 Click Scan The IP Camera Searching dialog box appears 2 After the IP Camera Searching dialog box closes the IP scan results are displayed in the scan table NOTE The scan results are cleared if the IP Camera Properties dialog box is closed IP Model 192 168 2 215 IXE20DN PELCO 192 168 286 IXSODN PELCO 192 168 2 213 IXE20DN PELCO 192 168 3 15 IDE20DN PELCO 192 168 1 86 IXE20DN PELCO a Figure 90 DX8100 Scan Utility Results e Using the Pelco Device Utility For information about installing the Device Utility refer to Utility Device for Pelco IP Cameras manual NOTE Install the Device Utility only on a remote computer Do not install it on the DX8100 server 1 On a remote computer start the Pelco Device Utility and allow the Device Utility to discover IP devices on the network 2 Search the Device Utility IP Address column for supported IP camera devices For information about the supported IP cameras refer to DX8100 Series HVR Version 2 0 Release Notes To access this document go to http www Pelco com and navigate to the Hybrid Video Recorders page 4 Note the IP address and model number of the supported IP cameras to be configured 5 Assign each IP cameras to a DX8100 camera channel refer to Assigning an IP Camera
334. tion 240 time period notification frequency setting up 241 overview 241 setting the time of day 241 video loss events sent in response to 243 event jump to 69 events alarm 132 ATM POS 134 motion detection 118 recording modes 145 video loss detection 121 exception 191 Expansion Unit 28 export setup 25 Ext monitor camera mapping automatic camera mapping setting up 229 manual camera mapping setting up 230 overview 229 Capture Card configuring interrupt override 235 external monitor option 235 overview 228 sequence instance appending to an existing sequence list 234 creating 230 deleting 233 loading an existing list 231 256 modifying in the list 232 extended monitor 34 extended view mode 51 external events 134 external storage 13 14 20 F file size video image 156 frame rate about calculating 163 advanced configuring 158 overview 144 156 range of 156 resolution value 159 frame rate setting 157 full screen view video displaying 29 full window view 29 index video displaying 30 live video displaying 29 playback video displaying 30 selecting 29 G getting started exiting the DX8100 19 first time login 18 powering on the DX8100 16 shutting down the DX8100 16 starting the DX8100 16 user security levels 16 H hard disk 16 hardware capture card 230 DX8100 AUD audio card 119 external equipment 61 upgrading 16 Help enabling disabling 228 online viewing 228 import setup 25 index view pan
335. ton Jr to start video playback 3 Do the following a To zoom in click and drag the mouse diagonally to your right in a downward direction Figure 44 Zoom In Using Mouse b To zoom out click and drag the mouse diagonally to your left in an upward direction Figure 45 Zoom Out Using Mouse C2630M C 7 09 75 76 PANNING A ZOOMED IMAGE This section describes how to use the hand tool and mouse wheel to zoom in and out To pan a zoomed portion of video within the view panel 1 To place the DX8100 in the Playback or Search mode do one and of the following On the DX8100 toolbar click Live On the DX8100 toolbar click Search 2 Right click in the view panel The mouse pointer now resembles a hand 3 Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse in the direction you want to move the video image 4 Right click again to return to zoom mode O 16 200513 3 Figure 46 Panning Zoomed Video with the Mouse C2630M C 7 09 Working in Search Mode The DX8100 Series HVR supports four video search methods index thumbnail POS and pixel For information about the user access level required to search video data refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 210 To enter the Search mode e On the DX8100 toolbar click Search This section describes how to use the Search mode and includes the following topics e Search Window e Displaying a Deinterlaced Image in the Search Mode on page 78 e
336. tra Ill are trademarks of Pelco Inc DLP is a registered trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated All product names and services identified throughout this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies The absence of a trademark or registered trademark from this document does not constitute a waiver of intellectual property rights Copyright 2009 Pelco Inc All rights reserved PELLO by Schneider Electric www pelco com Pelco Inc Worldwide Headquarters 3500 Pelco Way Clovis California 93612 USA USA 8 Canada Tel 800 289 9100 Fax 800 289 9150 International Tel 1 559 292 1981 Fax 1 559 348 1120
337. ts and patterns to motion and alarm events including the following topics e Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Motion Events on page 139 e Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events on page 140 e Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events on page 141 e Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events on page 142 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Motion Events To link two cameras so that motion detected on one results in the repositioning of another 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab 4 In the Motion Detection Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Camera Channel drop down box This camera will be the motion source b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to motion detected by the source camera 5 To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to motion detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 e To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to
338. ts of the Backup Schedule Page Item Part Description 1 Backup schedule Describes the configured backup schedule details table e Name The type of backup schedule Daily or Weekly Daily includes all days of the week Monday through Sunday Weekly indicates a specific day of the week that the backup schedule is to occur A selection check box allows you to select or deselect a backup schedule to run as scheduled A deselected backup schedule does not run as scheduled e Backup start time The date and time a backup schedule is defined to run e Backup time The time period entered for the backup schedule e Filter The channels selected for back up e Target device The selected backup media device 2 Backup schedule Allows you to do the following buttons e Add Opens the Add Backup Schedule dialog box for configuring a backup schedule For more information about the Add Backup Schedule dialog box refer to Adding a Backup Schedule on page 202 e Edit Allows you to edit the details of the selected backup schedule e Delete Allows you to delete a selected backup schedule e Instant Backup Opens the Backup Now dialog box where you enter options to start a backup schedule Waiting backup Displays backup schedules waiting to be executed information e Backup time The date and time a backup schedule is defined to run e Filter The channels selected for back up e Target device The selected backup media device
339. tup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Do the following a b d In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box Ensure that the group check boxes under To and CC are deselected Enter an e mail address in the To or CC boxes Click Add to Group Click Apply C Disable Notification Enable Notification Full name ox3100 First Floor Lobby E mail Address d 8100_first_fr pelco corm To psmte pelco com Addto Group e cc Add to Group Subject mail Notification Figure 181 Add User to E mail Group 245 246 Deleting Members from an E mail Group To delete a user from a group 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Notification button 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Do the following a In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Select the user you want to delete from the list c Click Delete Click Apply m Mail Group Security Department Ai Gio bwade pelco com Security Department smite pelco com Security Department Figure 182 Remove User from E mail Group C2630M C 7 09 Modifying E mail Group Member Attributes To m
340. tween the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to access the programming features of remote cameras and includes the following topics e Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control e Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 59 Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control The DX8100 allows you to navigate the menu system of remote cameras using the PTZ OSD Menu control The PTZ OSD Menu control is available when the DX8100 is in Live View mode The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View Alternative methods to navigate the remote camera menu system are as follows e Keypad controls For information about using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming Menu on page 59 e Keyboard keys For information about using the keyboard keys refer to Using Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 52 Figure 29 shows the parts of the PTZ OSD Menu control e PTZ OSD MENU Figure 29 PTZ OSD Menu Control C2630M C 7 09 Table O describes the parts of the PTZ OSD Menu control Table O Parts of the PTZ OSD Menu Control Item Part Description 1 Enter Provides the following actions e Accepts the selected remote came
341. umber assigned by the ATM POS device that is printed on the sales are transaction receipt Data Information Allows POS search by data information options as follows e Transaction with Exception Only Finds all transactions for which an exception is defined e Line Item Allows you to search POS data by a specific transaction line item based on the following guidelines Line item entries are not case sensitive Enter lower or uppercase characters Specify the asterisk wildcard Search by a single word or multiple words appearing in a transaction line Type the first few characters of the first word appearing in the transaction and the wildcard For example type sma for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word small Type the first few characters of the second word in a transaction and the wildcard For example type ora for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word orange Search by abbreviation For example type 6 pk for a line item containing the entry Soda 6 pk The search returns all transactions that contain the abbreviation 6 pk e Action Code A two letter abbreviation designating a specific action code For information about action codes refer to Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 180 e Exception Code A predefined
342. unication Properties 0 02 cnn bbe tenes 177 Understanding the Port Device Page 0 00 c cece eed nt rreran tent e tere e ees 177 Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports aanu ununun serrara anar rr 179 Setting UR ATM POS Device Properti S cti va Leases A Maire ak dae ey ane 180 Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard 20 nen nnn eben ett een eens 198 Installing or Updating Device Protocols 2 2 02 ata i a corr 200 Data Backup Setup A aos 201 Accessing the Backup Configuration Page cessas nenatis e eed ee da a 202 Adding a Backup Schequle ti a aia rana ds 202 Editing an Existing Backup Schequle yerno rata aid 204 Deletind aniExisting Backup Schedule o dd Dti 205 Initlating an Instant Backup Chace A a 205 Mapping a Network Device ccoo A tae Keren eae 206 Disconmiecting from a Network Drive i niid cesses noe sided woe phaina ada dd dad tb 206 sel ctinga Backup Media DEVICE A ge ee ee aa ee os es ela 207 Viewing Backed UP Vide o a a dois 207 User Set ceci tar td dp tell dad tl teh dl ide dead 208 Accessing Me Wser Fage dazadi ES A A A a eb ds 208 B iltAMUSErACCOUNIS A a ei dee des dana nde tol A A dt 209 Definition of User Access Levels ooooooooccoccoccccocc rr 210 Definition of Camera Security ACCESS aeisi si paaka hra m ene ene eee bended eee aaia aia y ai al 210 Modifying User Acces Rights a teas 211 AGING NEW USCIS Yans sneer tetera eaten oe delta allt a A Male te Yel ole e O e We nee de 21
343. up button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click the Linking button 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Video Loss Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera channel from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to a video loss event detected by the source camera To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do the one of the following e To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to a video loss event detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 for the camera to move to e To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to video loss input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Click Apply Video Loss Link Settings y io CAMERAD1 y Camera Name c era 1 1 Linked PTZ Setting Linked Camera Channel CAMERAO1 Linked Camera Preset Notin
344. ure 54 Searching for Transaction with Exception Only Events SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS THAT SATISFY SPECIFIC EXCEPTIONS The DX8100 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions that meet conditions as defined by one or more exceptions You can use specific exception codes to define the search criteria To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data The search criteria is based on the following e Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data e Date time The date and time window within which the transactions were recorded e Exception code The predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data To search for transactions that meet specific exceptions 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Search button ta 2 On the Search control click the POS Search button The POS search view is displayed POS Search 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following e n the DX8100 Site Tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name box In this case th
345. urrent transaction 192 C2630M C 7 09 Creating an ATM POS Exception To create an ATM POS exception ie 2 C2630M C 7 09 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM1 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab For information about the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 191 In the ATM POS Name drop down box select an ATM POS device General Settings Data Format Textto Screen Advanced Diagnostics ATM POS Name tarmoposo1 JATM POSO1 Exception Table R Any field containing values must all be found or satisfied before a data device exception is generated Exception Name Each data device can trigger the DX8000 to record at a special rate and for a special length of time D ATM POS Name Action Code aL ALL CODES item or merchandise sold normally y User Sting User Mapping Table Action Code Define String You can search recording data by this user mapping table Figure 154 Advanced Page 193 194 7 n the Exception Table section click Add The Exceptions dialog box opens Exceptions x
346. use y Linked Camera Pattem x Figure 117 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events C2630M C 7 09 SCHEDULE SETUP The DX8100 provides extensive scheduling capabilities Flexible recording schedules can be established for daily weekday weekend or individual day recording Recording time can be broken up into increments of one half hour and each increment can be scheduled to record continuously or in response to an alarm motion or ATM POS event Users with Power User access and higher can create recording schedules This section describes how to setup recording schedules and includes the following topics Accessing the Schedule on page 143 Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode on page 145 Creating Yearly Recording Schedules on page 147 Creating Monthly or Multiple Day Recording Schedules on page 149 Creating Single Day Schedules on page 150 Editing Schedules on page 152 Working with Custom Camera Settings on page 154 Configuring the Frame Rate on page 156 Setting Up Advanced Relay Output on page 163 ACCESSING THE SCHEDULE To access the scheduling features of the DX8100 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click the Schedule button C The Schedule page is displayed Figure 118 shows the parts of the Schedule page C2630M C 7 09 gt 008100 gt Month View Year View
347. ut 3 Left click and drag the relay outside the Site Tree panel to the DX8100 toolbar or panel above or below the Site Tree panel and then release the mouse button 4 Repeat the above process for each relay you want to remove C2630M C 7 09 Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input To unlink a relay from an alarm 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button Ea 2 In the Site Tree click the plus sign next to the alarm input from which you want to remove the relay output 3 Left click and drag the relay outside the Site Tree panel and then release the mouse button Repeat the above process for each relay you want to remove C2630M C 7 09 41 Working in Live View Mode This section describes how to use the DX8100 to view and record live video All users can view live video from the main window Users with PTZ access rights Standard User by default and higher can operate the on screen PTZ controls Live video can also be displayed in full screen view For information about displaying playback video in full screen view refer to Displaying Live Video in Full Screen View on page 29 The DX8100 displays live video based on one of the following scenarios e Capture card displays live video The capture card is used to display live video on the main VGA monitor For each channel live video is displayed on the VGA monitor at the maximum recording rate For example channel 1 is set to 2CIF recording resoluti
348. video will not be displayed on the extended monitor d In the Screen resolution area set the resolution to match the resolution set for the primary monitor e By default the extended monitor s icon is located to the right of the primary monitor s icon Do nothing to accept the default location or left click and drag the icon to the desired location Click OK Restart the DX8100 The Pelco slash screen is displayed on the extended monitor For information about mapping channels refer to Mapping Channels on the Extended Monitor on page 34 C2630M C 7 09 21 Understanding the DX8100 Application Window This section describes the DX8100 application window and its operation The application window is the central control center where you can access to the DX8100 features and functions View both live and recorded video Exit to the Windows environment Access DX8100 setup features Control camera PTZ functions Select cameras for viewing and recording Specify playback date and time Access playback controls This section includes the following topics Description of the DX8100 Main Window Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 Working with the Site tree on page 37 DESCRIPTION OF THE DX8100 MAIN WINDOW The application window is displayed after the DX8100 starts The main window provides access to both live and recorded video The DX8100 displays an hour glass when a task requires a longer time to comp
349. view pane The mouse pointer will change to a black cross when on screen PTZ control is available x Y E 7 Figure 18 On Screen PTZ Control 4 Click and hold the left mouse button and then drag the mouse pointer in the direction you want to move the camera The display changes to an arrow indicating the direction of the mouse Y Figure 19 On Screen PTZ Movement 5 Release the mouse button when you have repositioned the camera to the desired location C2630M C 7 09 ADJUSTING THE CAMERA LENS The keypad is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the keypad To switch between the standard and extended view mode e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View For information about changing view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 30 To adjust camera lens features e Click the plus or minus button next to the zoom focus and iris function on the keypad Figure 20 PTZ Keypad with Camera Lens Controls ADJUSTING THE CAMERA ZOOM To adjust camera zoom using the mouse e Rotate the mouse wheel forward to zoom in and backward to zoom out Figure 21 shows how to operate the mouse to zoom in and out You can also use keyboard shortcuts to operate the lens features of cameras such as Pelco s Spectra Ill For more information about using keyboard shortcuts refer to Using Keyboard Shortcuts to
350. w I Camera JE Linking TF Schedule TT User IF Monitor IF Emergency T Port TT Backup E Site Setup M asp TT ATM Pos TT Select All Figure 169 Import DX8100 Server Configuration Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Import To import a settings file from a specific drive or folder 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose Edit gt Import Setup The DX8100 Setup File Import Dialog box opens 2 Select the folder location of the file you want to import 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 4 Click the settings file you want to open 5 Click Open C2630M C 7 09 USING SYSTEM LOGS The DX8100 automatically stores system information in a number of log files Users with Power User or greater permissions can use these files to track system statistics and monitor security The DX8100 allows you to view its activity log and Windows OS log files NOTE If the Log View dialog box displays multiple System On notifications but does not display any System Off notifications the unit has failed Contact Pelco Product Support for more information This section describes how to use the system logs and includes the following topics e Viewing a Log File on page 222 e Exporting Log Information on page 224 Table BE describes the DX8100 activities and Windows OS log views The log views are available from the DX8100 server s View menu Table BE DX8100 Activities and Windows OS Log Files DX
351. y Stream ns al Pelco com M 4 Figure 95 Pelco 1P110 General Tab 126 C2630M C 7 09 5 Configure the IP camera settings 6 Log out of the IP camera A login dialog box appears 7 Click Hide Setup 8 Click OK The camera settings are saved and the DX8100 Camera page appears 9 Set up the IP camera to be displayed in the DX8100 Site Tree refer to Customizing IP Camera Display Settings on page 127 Using the Device Utility to Configure IP Cameras 1 Run the Device Utility on a remote computer and configure the IP camera settings 2 Set up the IP camera to be displayed in the DX8100 Site Tree refer to Customizing IP Camera Display Settings on page 127 Customizing IP Camera Display Settings The Camera page allows you to customize the IP camera display settings Perform this step after the IP camera is assigned to a camera channel NOTE The IP camera s status is automatically set to Network Camera when it is assigned to a camera channel and assumes the default camera settings for that channel For information about assigning an IP camera to a camera channel refer to Assigning an IP Camera to a Camera Channel on page 124 For information about removing an IP camera from the Site Tree refer to Disabling an IP Camera on page 130 To customize an IP camera s display settings 1 If the Camera page is not displayed click the Setup button on the DX8100 toolbar The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the
352. you would like to store the exported file You can also click the Browse button to access the file system for the appropriate folder If your DX8100 is connected to a network that supports shared folders and drives you can map a network drive from within the Export Video dialog box For more information refer to Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 101 Table AA describes the available devices Table AA Available Backup Space Type Description Optical drives The DX8100 supports the following drives e CD R e DVD R Hard disk drives The hard disk drive can be any of the following e Local drives e Remote drives Removable drives USB flash drives 6 Select the check box of the video time range you want to export You can export multiple time ranges simultaneously For more information refer to Changing a Bookmarked Time Range on page 104 7 Click in the File Name box and then type the file name for each selected video time range You can accept the default file name assigned to the time range For more information refer to Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name on page 104 8 Select the export format For more information refer to Selecting the Export Format on page 106 9 Click Export i x r Device r Time Range a Optical disk drives StatDay StatTime EndDay EndTime Name 5 65 CD R RW O1 10432004 0800 00 10 13 2004 08 02 00 Lobby O TEAC CD W552E M2 1013
353. ystem operates best when the CPU and Memory levels are less than 100 percent For information about the DX8100 Resource Meter refer to Understanding the DX8100 Resource Meter on page 129 The DX8100 Resource Meter provides a real time display of available system resources Use the DX8100 Resource Meter to help you fine tune the analog and IP camera recording settings In summary to configure the unit for optimal hybrid video recording do any combination of the following e Adjust the analog camera recording settings refer to Basic Camera Setup on page 116 and Schedule Setup on page 143 e Adjust the IP camera recording settings refer to Configuring IP Camera Settings on page 126 and Customizing IP Camera Display Settings on page 127 e Disable an analog camera refer to Disabling an Analog Camera on page 130 e Disable an IP camera refer to Disabling an IP Camera on page 130 and Deleting an IP Camera on page 131 e Restore a disabled analog or IP camera refer to Restoring a Disabled Analog or IP Camera on page 131 Disabling an Analog Camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Setup button YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 From the Selected Channel drop down box select an analog camera The camera is highlighted in the Site Tree 3 From the extended Selected Channel drop down box select Disable 4 Click Apply The selected analog camera is removed from the Site Tree The camera s customized settings are retained A disab
354. zed Table L View Panes and Panel Item Description 1 Indicates the panel number being viewed 2 Indicates the total number of panel pages available Expanding and Collapsing View Panes To expand a view pane to fill the entire panel e Double click a view pane The view fills the entire view panel To collapse a view pane e Double click the expanded view pane The view pane returns to its default size Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels To manually cycle through hidden view panels e On the DX8100 toolbar click one of the panel division buttons The view sequences through the view panels For example when you repeatedly click a 4 Division display format button HA the DX8100 cycles through each of the eight available view panels Automatically Cycling Through View Panels The DX8100 provides an automatic cycle feature that when selected automatically cycles through each view panel ensuring all cameras get displayed Group permission to change the dwell time is assigned by the Administrator to the following groups Restricted User Group Standard User Group and Power User Group This section describes how to configure the DX8100 to automatically cycle through camera views and includes the following sections e Starting an Automatic Cycle View Mode on page 34 e Stopping an Automatic Cycle View Sequence on page 34 e Selecting User Groups to Set the Cycle View Dwell Time on page 34 e S
355. zoomed to the last two or three minutes of data The user can view video that has just been recorded This video resides in memory and has not yet been stored on the hard drive The color of the timeline for this video will be green This is because the system cannot identify the data characteristic until the data is stored on the hard disk drive For example if this data is recorded from a camera configured to monitor motion and there is no motion activity the data will not be stored on the hard disk drive C2630M C 7 09 PLAYING BACK VIDEO BY EVENT Users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher can search video by events such as motion detection or alarm activation A sensor event is identical to an alarm event To play back video recorded during an alarm or motion event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Live button EX 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Index View The Event Type drop down box is displayed All z Motion 12 13 16 Motion 12 12 45 Motion 12 12 20 Motion 12 11 45 Motion 12 10 41 Motion 12 10 27 Motion 12 10 12 Motion 12 10 01 Motion 12 09 38 Motion 12 09 20 Motion 12 08 49 Motion 12 08 06 Figure 42 Event Type Drop down Box Select a camera by clicking it in the Site Tree In the Date Section drop down box above the playback timeline select the day that you want events to be displayed In the Event Type drop down box select the event type you want to view Opt

Pelco DX8100 DVR User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents